9YZ-04152-0021-REZZA LR14.1.L 9926 DBS HW Maint Upgd Guide 0.10 Prelim June 2014

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
PRELIMINARY
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 9926
Distributed Base Station - LTE Baseband Unit (BBU) | LR14.1.L
Hardware Maintenance and Upgrade Guide for FDD LTE
9YZ-04152-0021-REZZA
Issue 0.10 | June 2014
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Legal notice
PRELIMINARY
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2014 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Conformance statements
Product conformance statements can be found in Appendix B, “Product conformance statements”.

Developed by the Alcatel-Lucent Documentation Team.
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Contents
PRELIMINARY
About this document
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi
What's new .................................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

xxi
Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxii

xxii
Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

xxiii
How to use this document .................................................................................................................................................... xxiv

xxiv
Safety information .................................................................................................................................................................... xxv

xxv
Conventions used ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxv

xxv
Related information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxvi

xxvi
Document support ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

xxxi
Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

xxxi
How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxxi

xxxi
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

xxxi
Part I: 9926 BBU Maintenance
1 LTE Product Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1-2
General precautions for installation procedures ............................................................................................................ 1-3

1-3
Specific safety hazards ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-5

1-5
2 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance

PRELIMINARY
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements ........................................................................................................ 2-2

2-2
9926 BBU preventive maintenance schedule ................................................................................................................. 2-2

2-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary iii
9YZ-04152-0021-REZZA LR14.1.L Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 0.10 June 2014
PRELIMINARY Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake ................................................................................. 2-3
2-3
Procedure 2-2: Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans ........................................................................................................ 2-7

2-7
3 Corrective maintenance process
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Replacement/repair process .................................................................................................................................................. 3-2

3-2
Safety requirements .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5

3-5
Required tools ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-5

3-5
Torque requirements for mechanical connections ........................................................................................................ 3-7

3-7
4 Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 eNodeB
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
9926 BBU replacement procedures in 9412 eNodeB .................................................................................................. 4-2

4-2
Procedure 4-1: Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells ................................................................................................................ 4-3

4-3
Procedure 4-2: Replace RUC/Fan Tray ........................................................................................................................ 4-10

4-10
Procedure 4-3: Replace CCM using NEM .................................................................................................................... 4-24

4-24
Procedure 4-4: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM ......................................................................................................... 4-49

4-49
Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM .......................................................................................................................................... 4-86

4-86
Procedure 4-6: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet ................................................. 4-96
4-96
Procedure 4-7: Replace SFP transceivers .................................................................................................................... 4-115

4-115
5 Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 BBU
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
9926 BBU replacement procedures ................................................................................................................................... 5-2

5-2
Procedure 5-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU ....................................................................................... 5-4
5-4
Procedure 5-2: Replace CCM using NEM .................................................................................................................... 5-17

5-17
PRELIMINARY
Procedure 5-3: Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM ............................................................................. 5-42
5-42
Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM .......................................................................................................................................... 5-77

5-77
Procedure 5-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU ....................................................................... 5-88
5-88
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Use pursuant to applicable agreements 9YZ-04152-0021-REZZA LR14.1.L
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-6: Replace eAM .......................................................................................................................................... 5-108
5-108
6 Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures .................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2
Procedure 6-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet ............................................................................................. 6-4

6-4
Procedure 6-2: Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet ................................................................. 6-17
6-17
Procedure 6-3: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet ........................................................................ 6-43
6-43
Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet ........................................................................................................... 6-78

6-78
Procedure 6-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet .............................................................................. 6-90
6-90
Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM ........................................................................................................................................... 6-111

6-111
Part II: 9926 BBU Upgrade/Reconfiguration Procedures
7 Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
Hardware issues ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
Procedure 7-1: Install a new bCEM ................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7-2
Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM ........................................................................................................................... 7-4

7-4
8 Add new cell to eNodeB
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
LTE cell creation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
Procedure 8-1: Add new cell to eNodeB .......................................................................................................................... 8-3

8-3
9 Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1
Preparation .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2

9-2
PRELIMINARY
Procedure 9-1: Configure 9926 BBU hardware ............................................................................................................ 9-9

9-9
Procedure 9-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation with two modems ......................................... 9-12
9-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary v
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Reconfiguring cells
Procedure 10-1: Reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs ..................................................................................................... 10-1

10-1
11 Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11-1
Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-1

11-1
Procedure 11-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for dual-carrier, single-band operation .................................................. 11-9
11-9
Procedure 11-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation ...................................................................... 11-12
11-12
Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH (OEM) configuration .................................................................................... 11-19
11-19
12 Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation (Commercial Carrier

Aggregation (CA))
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12-1
Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2

12-2
Procedure 12-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for multi-carrier, multi-band operation .............................................. 12-10
12-10
Procedure 12-2: Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation ................................................................... 12-14
12-14
13 Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13-1
Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode operation with
TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs .......................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13-2
A References
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
Reissue history .......................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
B Product conformance statements
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1

B-1
United States .............................................................................................................................................................................. B-2

B-2
PRELIMINARY
Canada .......................................................................................................................................................................................... B-4

B-4
European Union ........................................................................................................................................................................ B-5

B-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Contents
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C Abbreviations
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... C-1

C-1
Abbreviations ............................................................................................................................................................................ C-1

C-1
D LED status
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... D-1

D-1
eCCM-U LED status .............................................................................................................................................................. D-1

D-1
eCCM-U Model 2 LED status ............................................................................................................................................ D-5

D-5
bCEM LED status ................................................................................................................................................................. D-11

D-11
TRDU LED status ................................................................................................................................................................. D-13

D-13
E Update 9926 BBU software loads
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... E-1

E-1
Required software and eCCM-U identification ............................................................................................................ E-2

E-2
Procedure E-1: Establish connection between NEM and eCCM-U ...................................................................... E-4
E-4
Procedure E-2: Check eCCM for current LTE RAN load on the system ............................................................ E-5
E-5
Procedure E-3: Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM PC ........................................................................ E-6
E-6
Procedure E-4: Download release notes .......................................................................................................................... E-9

E-9
Procedure E-5: Update to current LTE RAN load on system ................................................................................ E-10
E-10
F Recommission 9926 BBU
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... F-1

F-1
Requirements
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... F-2

F-2
Documentation Requirements .............................................................................................................................................. F-2

F-2
Hardware Requirements ......................................................................................................................................................... F-3

F-3
PRELIMINARY
Software Requirements .......................................................................................................................................................... F-4

F-4
Recommissioning scenarios
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... F-6

F-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary vii
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure F-1: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with NEM ............................................................. F-7
F-7
Procedure F-2: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with delta work order ..................................... F-13
F-13
Procedure F-3: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with full snapshot file ..................................... F-18
F-18
Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self commissioning ..................................................... F-23
F-23
Procedure F-5: Set OAM Routing ................................................................................................................................... F-27

F-27
G Change CCM static MAC address in 7750 SR
Procedure G-1: Change CCM static MAC address ..................................................................................................... G-1

G-1
H Restore from Factory Mode Procedure
Procedure H-1: Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode ............................................................................................ H-1
H-1
Index
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
List of tables
PRELIMINARY
1 What's new for LR14.1.L Issue 0.08 ................................................................................................................... xxi
2 How to use this document .................................................................................................................................... xxiv
3 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM documents ........................................................................................................... xxvii
1-1 Signal words for hazard severity .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
2-1 9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements ......................................................................................... 2-2
2-2 9926 BBU preventive maintenance schedule .................................................................................................. 2-2
3-1 Hot-swapped components ...................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU configurations ........................................................................................................ 3-3
3-3 Required tools ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-5

3-5
3-4 Torque requirements for mechanical connections ......................................................................................... 3-7
4-1 BBU replacement procedures ............................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 RUC/Fan Tray terminal lug specifications .................................................................................................... 4-12
4-3 RUC/Fan Tray replacement procedure overview ........................................................................................ 4-14
4-4 CCM connector changes ....................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using NEM .................................................................................. 4-28
4-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM ....................................................................... 4-53
4-8 bCEM replacement procedure overview ........................................................................................................ 4-87
4-9 CPRI interface SFP optical modules .............................................................................................................. 4-117
4-10 Backhaul interface SFP optical modules ...................................................................................................... 4-120

PRELIMINARY
5-1 9926 BBU component replacement procedures ............................................................................................. 5-2
5-2 RUC/Fan Tray terminal lug specifications ....................................................................................................... 5-6
5-3 RUC/Fan Tray replacement procedure overview .......................................................................................... 5-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary ix
PRELIMINARY List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using NEM .................................................................................. 5-21
5-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM ....................................................................... 5-46
5-8 bCEM replacement procedure (rack-mounted) ............................................................................................ 5-79
6-1 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures ..................................................................................... 6-2
6-2 RUC/Fan Tray terminal lug specifications ....................................................................................................... 6-6
6-3 RUC/Fan Tray replacement procedure overview (MBI) ............................................................................. 6-9
6-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using eNodeB-NEM ................................................................ 6-21
6-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet ....................................... 6-47
6-8 bCEM replacement procedure (rack-mounted) ............................................................................................ 6-80
9-1 Supported RFM combinations for dual-band operation .............................................................................. 9-4
9-2 Configure 9926 BBU hardware procedure overview ................................................................................... 9-6
9-3 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation procedure overview ...................................................... 9-7
11-1 Install second bCEMP1.1 hardware procedure overview ........................................................................ 11-6
11-2 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation procedure overview ................................................. 11-6
12-1 Install second/third bCEMP1.1 hardware procedure overview .............................................................. 12-6
12-2 Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation procedure overview ............................................... 12-7
13-1 CPRI cable connections between BB1, RF1, and RF2 ........................................................................... 13-11
13-2 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode TRDUs to RF feedthru connectors ............................................... 13-13
13-3 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode RF cables to antennas ........................................................................ 13-14
A-1 Revision history for LR14.1.L Issue 0.05 ........................................................................................................ A-1

PRELIMINARY
A-2 Revision history for LR14.1.L Issue 0.03 ........................................................................................................ A-2
D-1 SYNC LED status during D30 software loads .............................................................................................. D-2
D-2 SYNC LEDs status during D50 and D60 software loads .......................................................................... D-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
List of tables
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-3 eCCM-U CPRI LEDs ............................................................................................................................................. D-4
D-4
D-4 Four LED bCEM status ....................................................................................................................................... D-11
D-5 TRDU General Status LEDs .............................................................................................................................. D-14
D-6 TRDU CPRI PRI/SEC Status LED ................................................................................................................. D-15
F-1 Fixed OAM IP address alpha parameters ......................................................................................................... F-7
F-2 Macro eNodeB Minimum Commissioning Loads ........................................................................................ F-8
F-3 Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads ..................................................................................... F-8
F-4 Delta work order alpha parameters .................................................................................................................. F-13
F-5 Macro eNodeB Minimum Commissioning Loads ...................................................................................... F-14
F-6 Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads ................................................................................... F-14
F-7 Macro eNodeB Minimum Commissioning Loads ...................................................................................... F-19
F-8 Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads ................................................................................... F-19
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xi
PRELIMINARY List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
List of figures
PRELIMINARY
1-1 Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................... 1-2
4-1 Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit front view ........................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 RUC/Fan Tray module .......................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4-3 RUC/Fan Tray connections ................................................................................................................................. 4-12
4-4 eCCM-U faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 4-26

4-26
4-5 eCCM2/eCCM2-HR faceplate ........................................................................................................................... 4-26
4-6 eCCM-U faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 4-51

4-51
4-8 bCEM faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-86

4-86
4-9 eCCM-U front panel ............................................................................................................................................ 4-116
4-10 9926 BBU to RRH SFP selection diagram .................................................................................................. 4-119
5-2 RUC/Fan Tray module ............................................................................................................................................. 5-5

5-5
5-3 RUC/Fan Tray connections .................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5-4 eCCM-U faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 5-19

5-19
5-6 eCCM-U faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 5-44

5-44
5-8 Replace bCEM in rack-mounted 9926 BBU ................................................................................................. 5-78
5-9 bCEM faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-78

5-78
PRELIMINARY
5-10 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU ....................................................................................... 5-89
5-11 Replace eAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-109

5-109
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xiii
PRELIMINARY List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 Replace RUC/Fan Tray module in MBI cabinet ............................................................................................ 6-5
6-3 RUC/Fan Tray module ............................................................................................................................................. 6-6

6-6
6-4 RUC/Fan Tray connections .................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-5 eCCM-U faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 6-19

6-19
6-7 eCCM-U faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 6-45

6-45
6-9 Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet .......................................................................................................................... 6-79
6-10 bCEM faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-79

6-79
6-11 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet ............................................................................................. 6-91
6-12 Replace eAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-112

6-112
9-1 bCEM faceplate .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9-3
9-2 Dual-band 9926 BBU with two bCEMs ........................................................................................................... 9-3
11-1 bCEM faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 11-2

11-2
11-2 Dual-carrier, single-band 9926 BBU ............................................................................................................... 11-3
11-3 RRH cabling for dual-carrier, single-band configuration ...................................................................... 11-20
12-1 bCEM faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 12-2

12-2
12-2 Multi-carrier, multi-band 9926 BBU ............................................................................................................... 12-3
13-1 2T2R, Normal Transmit Mode configuration ............................................................................................... 13-2
13-2 2T2R, Combined Transmit Mode configuration ......................................................................................... 13-3
13-3 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode CPRI cabling ........................................................................................ 13-10
13-4 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode RF cabling ............................................................................................. 13-12
13-5 RF feedthru connectors ....................................................................................................................................... 13-14
D-1 eCCM-U LED matrix ............................................................................................................................................. D-2

D-2
PRELIMINARY
D-2 eCCM2 LED Matrix ................................................................................................................................................ D-5

D-5
D-3 eCCM2 CMA 3 and 4 ............................................................................................................................................. D-6
D-4 eCCM2 CMA 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... D-7

D-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
List of figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-5 eCCM2 CMA 1 ......................................................................................................................................................... D-7
D-7
D-6 eCCM2 SYNC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... D-8

D-8
D-7 eCCM2 SYNC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... D-8

D-8
D-8 eCCM2 SYNC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... D-9

D-9
D-9 eCCM2 SYNC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... D-9

D-9
D-10 eCCM2 LNK 1, 2, 3, and 4 ................................................................................................................................ D-10
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xv
PRELIMINARY List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
List of procedures
PRELIMINARY
2 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance
2-1 Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake ................................................................................................. 2-3
2-2 Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans ........................................................................................................................ 2-7
4 Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 eNodeB
4-1 Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells ............................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-2 Replace RUC/Fan Tray ........................................................................................................................................ 4-10

4-10
4-3 Replace CCM using NEM ................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4-4 Replace CCM using 5620 SAM ........................................................................................................................ 4-49
4-5 Replace bCEM ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-86

4-86
4-6 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet ................................................................. 4-96
4-7 Replace SFP transceivers ................................................................................................................................... 4-115
5 Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 BBU
5-1 Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5-2 Replace CCM using NEM ................................................................................................................................... 5-17
5-3 Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM ............................................................................................ 5-42
5-4 Replace bCEM ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-77

5-77
5-5 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU ....................................................................................... 5-88
5-6 Replace eAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-108

5-108
PRELIMINARY
6 Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
6-1 Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet ............................................................................................................ 6-4
6-2 Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet ................................................................................. 6-17
6-3 Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet ........................................................................................ 6-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xvii
PRELIMINARY List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet .......................................................................................................................... 6-78
6-5 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet ............................................................................................. 6-90
6-6 Replace eAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-111

6-111
Part II: 9926 BBU Upgrade/Reconfiguration Procedures
7 Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU
7-1 Install a new bCEM .................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7-2
7-2 Remove existing bCEM .......................................................................................................................................... 7-4

7-4
8-1 Add new cell to eNodeB ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
9 Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation
9-1 Configure 9926 BBU hardware ............................................................................................................................ 9-9
9-2 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation with two modems ........................................................ 9-12
10-1 Reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs ....................................................................................................................... 10-1
11 Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation
11-1 Upgrade 9926 BBU for dual-carrier, single-band operation ................................................................... 11-9
11-2 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation ....................................................................................... 11-12
12 Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation (Commercial Carrier

Aggregation (CA))
12-1 Upgrade 9926 BBU for multi-carrier, multi-band operation ................................................................ 12-10
12-2 Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation ..................................................................................... 12-14
13 Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
13-1 Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
PRELIMINARY
............................................................................................................................................................................ 13-213-2
13-2
E Update 9926 BBU software loads
E-1 Establish connection between NEM and eCCM-U ...................................................................................... E-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
List of procedures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-2 Check eCCM for current LTE RAN load on the system ............................................................................ E-5
E-3 Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM PC ........................................................................................ E-6
E-4 Download release notes .......................................................................................................................................... E-9

E-9
E-5 Update to current LTE RAN load on system ................................................................................................ E-10
F Recommission 9926 BBU
F-1 Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with NEM ............................................................................. F-7
F-2 Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with delta work order ..................................................... F-13
F-3 Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with full snapshot file .................................................... F-18
F-4 Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self commissioning ..................................................................... F-23
F-5 Set OAM Routing ................................................................................................................................................... F-27

F-27
G Change CCM static MAC address in 7750 SR
G-1 Change CCM static MAC address ..................................................................................................................... G-1
H Restore from Factory Mode Procedure
H-1 Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode ............................................................................................................. H-1
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xix
PRELIMINARY List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This document describes the preventive and corrective maintenance process and
procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit (Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU) in
both distributed (remote radio heads (RRH)) and non-distributed
(Transmit/Receive/Duplexer Units (TRDUs)) BTS deployments.
Important
Note: This guide is written to function with the EMS, Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service
Aware Manager (SAM) Release 12 Rx and later.
What's new
The revision history of this document is shown in Appendix A, “References”.
The revision history shown in the following table describes the updates/changes included
in this issue.
Table 1 What's new for LR14.1.L Issue 0.08
Location Revision
Procedure 4-4.4: “Install new CCM using Updated Step 10 per CRI-01273490.01 as
5620 SAM” (p. 4-69), Step 10 follows:
Procedure 5-3.4: “Install new CCM using For mis-aligned software: if 5620 SAM detects a
5620 SAM” (p. 5-61), Step 10 mis-aligned software image between the expected
Procedure 6-3.4: “Install new CCM using (in SAM) and actual eNodeB and SNMP IDs, the
5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-62), following alarms are raised:
Step 10 • NodeSoftwareMisalignmentDetected
for factory loads from LA2 to LA6.
• NodeSoftwareMisalignmentDetected
PRELIMINARY
and NodeDatabaseCorruptionDetected
starting with LR13.x factory loads.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxi
PRELIMINARY About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intended audience
This document is intended for personnel that perform preventive and corrective
maintenance on the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Hardware maintenance for the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU requires a series of coordinated
tasks between on-site (field) technicians and OMC network operators to resolve hardware
issues with minimal impact to network traffic and service availability. Both on-site
technicians and network operators must have access to this guide during the replacement
procedures.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported systems
This document supports the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit in distributed and
non-distributed deployments in the following configurations.
LTE configurations
The Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU is deployed in one of the following LTE configurations:
• Standard 19/23-inch equipment rack (standalone rack mounted)
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Indoor cabinet
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Rack-mounted cabinet (similar to Indoor
cabinet, but mounts in 19/23-inch equipment rack)
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB cabinet (with single
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU)
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB cabinet (with dual Alcatel-Lucent
9926 BBU)
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB cabinet (with single
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU) with secondary heater
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB cabinet (with dual Alcatel-Lucent
9926 BBU) with secondary heater
• Evolium cabinet
Transceivers (TRDU/RRH)
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network Customer Documentation
Overview, 9YZ-04152-0002-ACZZA, for available TRDU and RRH maintenance guides
as well as technical descriptions, installation manuals, and site preparation guidelines.
Sub-racks
The Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU is deployed with the following sub-rack:
• BBU V2 (d2UV5) — -48 V/+24 V eCCM-U/eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, bCEM, and/or -48
V/+24 V RUC/HC Fan Tray (High-Capacity (HC) Fans) for future enhancements.
RUC/Fan Trays
The Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU is deployed with one of the following RUC/Fan Trays:
• -48 V/+24 V RUC/Fan Tray, with/without power switch (mounts in BBU V2)
• -48 V/+24 V RUC/HC Fan Tray (High-Capacity (HC) Fans), with/without power
switch, for current configurations or for future enhancements (mounts BBU V2)
• Unless otherwise indicated RUC/Fan Tray refers to both versions of the RUC/Fan
Trays.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxiii
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multi-band configurations
The Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU supports the following multi-band configurations:
• GSM with the following:
– 1800 MHz MC-TRX MSR (LTE/GSM)
• CDMA with the following:
– LTE PCS Band R-OCM (3GPP Band Class 2)
– LTE AWS Band R-OCM
How to use this document

This document describes the preventive and corrective maintenance procedures for the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU as follows:
Table 2 How to use this document
Document organization When to use

Part I: “9926 BBU Maintenance” Describes preventive and replacement
procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base
Band Unit.
Chapter 1, “LTE Product Safety” Describes precautions to be followed when
working on the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Chapter 2, “9926 BBU Preventive Describes preventive maintenance procedures
Maintenance” for the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit.
Chapter 3, “Corrective maintenance process” Describes the corrective maintenance process,
and safety, tools, and torque requirements for
the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Chapter 4, “Corrective maintenance Describes the replacement procedures
procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 eNodeB” applicable to the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
installed in the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
Chapter 5, “Corrective maintenance Describes the replacement procedures
procedures for rack-mounted 9926 BBU” applicable to the rack-mounted Alcatel-Lucent
9926 BBU.
Chapter 6, “Corrective maintenance Describes how to replace failing/failed
procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet” components applicable to the Alcatel-Lucent
9926 BBU in a MBI cabinet
Part II: “9926 BBU Upgrade/Reconfiguration Describes upgrades and/or reconfiguration
PRELIMINARY
Procedures” procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base

Band Unit
Appendix A, “References” Provides reference material and reissue history
of this guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2 How to use this document (continued)
Document organization When to use

Appendix B, “Product conformance Describes the product conformance statements
statements” that apply to the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
cabinet.
Appendix C, “Abbreviations” List acronyms and abbreviations used in this
guide.
Appendix D, “LED status” Describes the functional status of the CCM
(eCCM-U/eCCM2/eCCM2-HR), bCEM, and
TRDU LEDs. The functional status of the
RRHs can be found in the appropriate RRH
maintenance guide.
Appendix E, “Update 9926 BBU software Describes how to bring a previous
loads” Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB software load up
to the current LTE RAN loads on the system.
Appendix F, “Recommission 9926 BBU” Describes how to recommission the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU after replacing a
failed CCM.
Appendix G, “Change CCM static MAC Describes how to update the CCM static MAC
address in 7750 SR” address in Alcatel-Lucent 7750 router when the
eCCM is replaced in the Alcatel-Lucent 9926
BBU.
Appendix H, “Restore from Factory Mode Describes how to recover from Factory Mode
Procedure” on a CCM.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Conventions used
The following conventions are used in this document:
Naming conventions
The full product name, Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit, is also referred to in one of
PRELIMINARY
the following formats throughout this manual:

• Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
• 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxv
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The full product name, Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact, is also referred to in one of
the following formats throughout this manual:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB
• 9412 eNodeB
The full product name, Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM), is also
referred to in one of the following formats throughout this manual:
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM
• 5620 SAM
Related information
The following documents are referenced in this document or include additional
information relevant to the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Alcatel-Lucent LTE documents
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network Customer Documentation
Overview, 9YZ-04152-0002-ACZZA, for the purpose of each LTE RAN document listed.
Service personnel should have access to the following Alcatel-Lucent documents:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network Terminology Overview,
9YZ-04152-0003-TQZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Macro and Metro Products Alarms and Events
Reference Guide, 9YZ-04152-0018-RKZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, 9YZ-04152-0026-PCZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) LTE Base Band Unit (BBU)
Technical Description, 9YZ-04152-0020-DEZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact/eNodeB Compact Smart Technical
Description, 9YZ-04152-0022-DEZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact/eNodeB Compact Smart Hardware
Maintenance and Upgrade Guide, 9YZ-04152-0023-REZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent LTE FDD Remote Radio Head (RRH) Maintenance Guide,
9YZ-04152-0025-REZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD Release
Notes, 9YZ-04152-0001-FMZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent CDMA and Dual Technology Base Stations Operations,
Administration and Maintenance, 401-703-407 (for Reverse OneBTS CPRI Module
PRELIMINARY
(R-OCM) replacement procedure)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Other documents
The following other documents are recommended.
• Standard for Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, NFPA 780
• Recommended Practices on Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits, IEEE
C62.41 (Latest Edition)
• Generic Requirements for Electronic Equipment Cabinets, Telcordia, GR-487-CORE
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM documents
The following table describes the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM documents that may be
referenced in this manual.
Table 3 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM documents
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Description

SAM LTE documents
5620 SAM LTE Release Provides information about the LTE features associated with the
Description release.
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Describes how to discover, configure, and manage LTE ePC devices
Service Aware Manager using the 5620 SAM. The guide is intended for LTE ePC network
LTE ePC User Guide planners, administrators, and operators and is to be used in
conjunction with other guides in the 5620 SAM documentation suite
where management of ePC devices does not differ from other
network elements.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you review the entire 5620 SAM
LTE ePC User Guide before you attempt to use the 5620 SAM in
your LTE network.
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Describes how to discover, configure, and manage the Evolved
Service Aware Manager NodeB, or eNodeB, using the 5620 SAM. The guide is intended for
LTE RAN User Guide LTE RAN network planners, administrators, and operators and is to
be used in conjunction with other guides in the 5620 SAM
documentation suite where management of RAN devices does not
differ from other network elements.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you review the entire 5620 SAM
LTE RAN User Guide before you attempt to use the 5620 SAM in
your LTE network.
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Provides a list of all LTE ePC and LTE RAN parameters supported in
Service Aware Manager the 5620 SAM.
LTE Parameter
PRELIMINARY
Reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxvii
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM documents (continued)

SAM LTE documents
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Provides information about developing LTE OSS applications,
Service Aware Manager including information about the 3GPP OSS interface components and
LTE OSS Interface architecture, understanding the 5620 SAM-O schema in the context
Developer Guide of LTE, compliance with 3GPP standards, and typical operational
scenarios.
SAM documents
5620 SAM Release Provides information about the new features associated with a 5620
Description SAM software release.
5620 SAM Release Provides important information about the software release, including
Notice outstanding issues and restrictions. This document is not shipped
with the on-product customer documentation and must be obtained
from OLCS as described in Documentation and resources on the
web.
5620 SAM Planning Provides information about 5620 SAM scalability and recommended
Guide hardware configurations.
5620 SAM System Intended for technology officers, network planners, and system
Architecture Guide administrators to increase their knowledge of the 5620 SAM software
structure and components. It describes the system structure, software
components, and interfaces of the 5620 SAM. In addition, 5620 SAM
fault tolerance, security, and network management capabilities are
discussed from an architectural perspective.
5620 SAM | 5650 Provides OS considerations, configuration information, and
CPAM Installation and procedures for the following:
Upgrade Guide • installing, upgrading, and uninstalling 5620 SAM and 5650
CPAM software in standalone and redundant deployments
• 5620 SAM system migration to a different system
• conversion from a standalone to a redundant 5620 SAM system
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SAM LTE documents
5620 SAM User Guide Provides information about using the 5620 SAM to manage the
service-aware IP/MPLS network, including GUI basics, service
configuration, and policy management.
The 5620 SAM User Guide uses a task-based format that employs
both high-level workflows and detailed procedures.
5620 SAM management information specific to LTE network
elements is covered in the 5620 SAM LTE ePC User Guide and 5620
SAM LTE RAN User Guide.
5620 SAM management information specific to 1830 PSS network
elements is covered in the 5620 SAM Optical User Guide.
5620 SAM System Provides information about the tasks performed by a user with a 5620
Administrator Guide SAM admin role, including:
• 5620 SAM security management tasks such as setting up all
required user accounts and user groups
• advanced configuration tasks such as configuring, maintaining,
and administering the 5620 SAM operational environment
• routine maintenance tasks to maintain the 5620 SAM hardware
and system integrity and efficiencies
5620 SAM Integration Provides procedures to allow the 5620 SAM to integrate with other
Guide Alcatel-Lucent products and third-party products.
5620 SAM Supervision Provides information about how to configure and use the web-based
Module User Guide 5620 SAM Supervision Module for fault management and
at-a-glance network element monitoring.
5620 SAM Scripts and Provides information that allows users to develop, manage, and run
Templates Developer CLI-based or XML-based scripts or templates.
Guide The guide is intended for developers, skilled administrators, and
operators who are expected to be familiar with the following:
• CLI scripting, XML, and the Velocity engine
• basic scripting or programming
• 5620 SAM functions
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxix
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SAM LTE documents
5620 SAM Parameter Provides:
Guide • parameter descriptions that include value ranges and default
values
• parameter options and option descriptions
• parameter and option dependencies
• parameter mappings to the 5620 SAM-O XML equivalent
property names
Parameters specific to LTE network elements are covered in the 5620
SAM LTE Parameter Reference.
Parameters specific to 1830 PSS network elements are covered in the
5620 SAM Optical Parameter Reference.
The 5620 SAM online help system includes a Parameter Search Tool
that allows you to look up parameters or 5620 SAM and 5650 CPAM
forms. See the 5620 SAM User Guide for more information about
using the Parameter Search Tool.
5620 SAM Statistics Provides information about how to configure performance and
Management Guide accounting statistics collection and how to view counters using the
5620 SAM. Network examples are included.
5620 SAM Provides task-based procedures and user documentation to:
Troubleshooting Guide • help resolve issues in the managed and management networks
• identify the root cause and plan corrective action for:
– alarm conditions on a network object or customer service
– problems on customer services with no associated alarms
• list problem scenarios, possible solutions, and tools to help
check:
– network management LANs
– network management platforms and operating systems
– 5620 SAM client GUIs and client OSS applications
– 5620 SAM servers
– 5620 SAM databases
5620 SAM Alarm Provides a description of all alarms supported on the 5620 SAM,
Reference including LTE and optical alarms, the raising and clearing conditions
of each alarm, and the remedial action to fix the problem. The
PRELIMINARY
reference is organized by network element type.

5620 SAM Glossary Defines terms and acronyms used in all of the 5620 SAM
documentation, including 5620 SAM LTE documentation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
About this document
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SAM LTE documents
5620 SAM Network Provides release-specific information about the compatibility of
Element Compatibility managed devices in 5620 SAM releases. This document is updated
Guide regularly; always consult the latest version on OLCS as described in
Documentation and resources on the web.
Document support
For support in using this or any other Alcatel-Lucent document, contact Alcatel-Lucent at
the following telephone numbers.
From United States
• If you are using a landline, a cellular phone or VoIP, dial this number: 1-888-582-3688
From other countries
• If you are using a cellular phone or VoIP, dial this number: +1-630-224-2485
• If you are using a landline (phone without a plus [+] character), replace the plus sign
with your country's exit code. Dial this number: Exit code for the country of origin:
1-630-224-2485. See the country-specific exit codes listed here.
These numbers apply for document support only. Please see the section “Technical
support” for details about product hardware, software, and technical support.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
PRELIMINARY
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxi
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
Overview
Purpose
This part describes preventive and corrective replacement procedures for the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit in the following configurations:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Indoor
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB
• Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Rack-Mount
• Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit in an MBI cabinet
• Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit rack-mounted (19/23 inch equipment rack)
Contents
Chapter 1, LTE Product Safety 1-1

Chapter 2, 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance 2-1
Chapter 3, Corrective maintenance process 3-1
Chapter 4, Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 eNodeB 4-1
Chapter 5, Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 BBU 5-1
Chapter 6, Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet 6-1
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary I-1
PRELIMINARY 9926 BBU Maintenance Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
1 LTE Product Safety
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter presents the safety precautions that apply to the product. In regions such as
North America and the European Union, the statements that are required are determined
primarily by national or multi-national regulations. However, in some regions, contract
terms determine which statements are required. The presence of the statement indicates
that the product does comply with that statement wherever it is required to do so.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-2

General precautions for installation procedures 1-3
Specific safety hazards 1-5
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-1
PRELIMINARY LTE Product Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
Figure 1-1 Structure of safety statements
CAUTION
M P L E
Lifting hazard
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
Item Structure element Purpose

1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
LTE Product Safety Structure of safety statements
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Table 1-1 Signal words for hazard severity
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
Within this document, the safety label typically includes additional information such as
the hazard type, a description of the damage that can be caused, and the steps that should
be taken to avoid the hazard.
General precautions for installation procedures

Overview
The following general precautions must be observed for installation procedures.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LTE Product Safety General precautions for installation procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Personal injury
Failure to observe these safety precautions may result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.
To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment, observe the following instructions:
• Read and understand all instructions.
• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this product.
• Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and performed by trained
personnel only.
• The equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part of
site preparation.
• The equipment is intended for installation in restricted access locations where access
is controlled or where access can only be gained by service personnel with a key or
tool. Access to this equipment is restricted to qualified service personnel only.
• Grounding and circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of the equipment. Never
operate the equipment with grounding/bonding conductor disconnected.
• Install only equipment identified in the product's installation manual. Use of other
equipment may result in an improper connection which could lead to fire or injury.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunications lines.
• The product has multiple power inputs. Before servicing, Disconnect all inputs to
reduce the risk of energy hazards.
• For continued protection against risk of fire, all fuses used in this product must be
replaced only with fuses of the same type and rating.
• Never install telecommunications wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telecommunications connections in wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telecommunications wiring or terminals unless the
telecommunications line has been disconnected at the interface.
• Never push objects of any kind into the product through slots, as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or an electrical
short.
• Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.
• Slots and openings in the product are provided for ventilation. To protect it from
overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The product should not
be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
PRELIMINARY
• To reduce the risk of an electrical shock, do not disassemble the product. Opening and
removing covers and/or circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other
risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently
used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Product Safety Specific safety hazards
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specific safety hazards

Overview
This topic reviews specific hazards for installation and/or maintenance.
DANGER
Lightning Strikes!
Lightning strikes are possible during stormy weather, and could result in death or severe
injury.
Do not work on the installation itself or on the power supply lines or antenna feeders of a
cell site during stormy weather.
WARNING
Energy Hazard!
Some parts of all electrical installations are energized. Failure to observe this fact and
the safety warnings may lead to bodily injury and property damage.
For this reason, only trained and qualified personnel (electrical workers as defined in
IEC 215 + A1 or EN 60215) may install or service the installation.
WARNING
Energy Hazard!
The power supply lines to the network element are energized. Short circuits can cause
burns to the face and hands.
Open the load disconnect switch in the distribution box to completely de-energize the
network element.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LTE Product Safety Specific safety hazards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Beryllium Oxide Poisoning Hazard!
The transmitter units include components which contain beryllium oxide (BeO). In this
form, BeO ceramics do not constitute a hazardous material as long as this material is not
destroyed by external mechanical forces.
In the event that repair work is carried out by the customer or by third parties, the
following regulations must be observed:
• Applicable version of the Regulation on Hazardous Materials in the Workplace
• Appropriate accident prevention regulations.
The following must be specifically observed:
• Do not eat, drink, or smoke in areas where work is taking place on BeO ceramic
components.
• Wash your hands carefully under running water after working with BeO ceramic
components.
If the following symptoms occur, contact a physician:
• Irritation of the respiratory organs
• Difficulty breathing or skin irritation.
WARNING
Laser hazard
This equipment operates with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation can cause
considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector when the
optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions.
WARNING
Laser hazard
The light from laser and high-radiance LED's may cause eye damage if absorbed by the
retina.
In the US consult ANSI Z136.2, in Europe consult IEC-60825 Safety of laser products, for
guidance on the safe use of optical fiber communication systems in the workplace.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Product Safety Specific safety hazards
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Condensation may cause a short circuit!
Sudden changes in the weather may lead to the formation of condensation on
components. Operating the unit when condensation moisture is present can destroy the
unit.
Units which show signs of condensation must be dried before installation.
NOTICE
Electrostatically Sensitive Components!
Semiconductor elements can be damaged by static discharges.
The following rules must be complied with when handling any module containing
semiconductor components:
• Wear conductive or antistatic work clothes (for example, a coat made of 100%
cotton).
• Wear grounded ESD wrist strap.
• Wear shoes with conductive soles.
• Leave the modules in their original packaging until ready for use.
• Make sure there is no difference in potential between yourself, the workplace, and the
package before removing, unpacking, or packing a module.
• Hold the module only by the grip without touching the connection pins, tracks, or
components.
• Place modules removed from the equipment on a conductive surface.
• Test or handle the module only with grounded tools on grounded equipment.
• Handle defective modules exactly like new ones to avoid causing further damage.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LTE Product Safety Specific safety hazards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Grounding caution!
This equipment has a connection between the grounding conductor of the DC supply
circuit and the grounding conductor.
This equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode
conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC
supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.
This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent cabinets)
as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded conductor of the
same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also the point of grounding of
the DC system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere.
The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as the equipment.
There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor
between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
2 2926 BBU Preventive
9
Maintenance
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU preventive maintenance
requirements, schedule, and procedures.
Contents
9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements 2-2

9926 BBU preventive maintenance schedule 2-2
Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake 2-3
Procedure 2-2: Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans 2-7
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance 9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements

Component requirements
The following table lists the preventive maintenance requirements for the 9926 BBU
components.
Table 2-1 9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements
Component PM requirement
9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake Yes
RUC/Fan Tray fans Yes
enhanced Core Controller Module (eCCM-U) No
enhanced Core Controller Module-2 (eCCM2) No
enhanced Core Controller Module-2 High Rate No
(eCCM2-HR)
broadband Channel Element Module (bCEM) No
9926 BBU preventive maintenance schedule

Component schedule
The following table lists the preventive maintenance schedule for the 9926 BBU
components. Preventive maintenance must be done during scheduled maintenance cycles.
Table 2-2 9926 BBU preventive maintenance schedule
Procedure Interval Maintenance Tools required

duration (approx.)
Procedure 2-1: Every 6 months or 30 minutes Flashlight, inspection
“Inspect/clean 9926 alarm occurs mirror, lint-free
BBU Sub-Rack air cleaning cloth,
intake” (p. 2-3) soft-bristle brush,
screwdriver, shop
vacuum
Procedure 2-2: Every 6 months or 20-40 minutes Flashlight, inspection
“Inspect/clean alarm occurs mirror, lint-free
PRELIMINARY
RUC/Fan Tray fans” cleaning cloth,

(p. 2-7) soft-bristle brush,
screwdriver, shop
vacuum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake

Purpose
The following procedure is used to inspect and clean the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake.
This must be done during normal maintenance cycles or low traffic periods.
Intervention time
30 minutes
Tools required
Cleaning cloth
Soft-bristle brush
Vacuum cleaner
Inspection mirror
Flashlight
Screwdriver
Key for door, if required
Steps
Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If necessary, open cabinet door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the inspection mirror and flashlight to inspect the sub-rack intake for dust and dirt.
• If the sub-rack intake is clean, procedure is completed. Update maintenance log and if
necessary close the cabinet door.
• If the sub-rack intake is dirty, continue with the following step.
Attention: To clean the air intake, the 9926 BBU must be shutdown and turned back
on as described in the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 From eNodeB, open cabinet and connect the NEM PC to the eCCM PORT1 with a RJ45
NEM Test Cable. Open NEM and login as follows:
• NEM Build (status only, indicates current release of this software)
• Host: 192.168.10.1 (netmask 255.255.255.0, eCCM IP address)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• User Name: initial_nem
• Password: Vq,A=V8o;#
Result: NEM main window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From eNodeB, use NEM to either lock or Soft Shutdown the eNodeB as follows:
• To lock eNodeB, perform the following steps:
1. Select Tree View and click HW Modules tab (right pane).
2. Click + next to HW Modules (left pane).
3. Right click eNB (right pane) and click Lock Module in context-sensitive menu.
4. When a managed object is locked, the supported objects are temporarily disabled.
If this action affects traffic, the following warning is displayed:
“Warning: This operation may lead to Telecom outage. Do you want to continue?”
Click Yes or Yes, don't ask again to Lock NE, or click No to cancel Lock.
5. When complete, go to following step.
• To Soft Shutdown eNodeB, refer to Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells”
(p. 4-3) for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Attention: Power must be turned OFF as described before continuing with this
procedure! If power is not removed, the procedure will not work properly.
Turn power OFF at the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:
• With a power switch:
1. Turn power OFF at RUC/Fan Tray (press O).
2. Turn power OFF at the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
• Without a power switch, turn power OFF at the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Clean the sub-rack intake with the cleaning cloth, vacuum, or small brush. When
completed, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Notify OMC that service is being restored and prepare to place 9926 BBU back in-service
(unlock network element).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Turn power ON at the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Turn power ON at the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
2. Turn power ON at the RUC/Fan Tray with power switch (press 1).
• Without a power switch, turn power ON at the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Check for alarms with NEM and LED status on the CCM and bCEMs. If ok, go to the
next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Note: Unlocking a network element (eNodeB) enables its radio resources.

Unlock network element (eNodeB) from either OMC or NEM as follows:
• From OMC, perform the following steps to unlock the 9412 eNodeB:
1. Open an ENB Equipment properties form and configure the contained parameters.
See 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, eNodeB online configuration,
Section, ENB Equipment and eNodeB NE instance objects, Procedure, To open an
ENBEquipment properties form.
2. Click States tab.
3. Choose Unlocked from the Administrative State drop-down menu.
4. Click Apply. A message is displayed.
5. Click Yes to confirm changes and close dialog box.
6. Close ENB Equipment form.
Note: If necessary, Cell Configuration must be unlocked from SAM.
• From eNodeB, use NEM to perform the following steps to unlock the 9412 eNodeB:
3. Right-click eNB and click Unlock Module in context-sensitive menu. The NE is
unlocked.
4. If necessary, right-click the following elements, in order, and click Unlock
Module in contextual menu to unlock them:
TMA
PRELIMINARY
RRH/TRDU
BB (CEM)
CB (CCM)
RET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance Procedure 2-1: Inspect/clean 9926 BBU Sub-Rack air intake
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D2U (RUC)
5. Select eNB and check Administrative States column for any elements still locked
and unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 When operational, exit NEM, disconnect the NEM PC from BBU, or close NEM at
OMC, and close and lock door to cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 When completed, update maintenance log, and if necessary close the cabinet door.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance Procedure 2-2: Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-2: Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans

Purpose
The following procedure is used to inspect and clean the RUC/Fan Tray fans. This must
be done during normal maintenance cycles or low traffic periods.
Intervention time
30 minutes
Tools required
Cleaning cloth
Soft-bristle brush
Vacuum cleaner
Inspection mirror
Flashlight
Screwdriver
Key for door, if required
Steps
Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean the RUC/Fan Tray fans.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If necessary, open cabinet door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the inspection mirror and flashlight to inspect the fans through the sub-rack air intake
for dust and dirt.
• If the fans are clean, procedure is completed. Update maintenance log and if
necessary close the cabinet door.
• If the fans are dirty, continue with the following step.
Attention: To clean the fans, the 9926 BBU must be shutdown and turned back on as
described in the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance Procedure 2-2: Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Disconnect the power cable from the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Pull back protective boot from over the terminal lugs.
2. Remove the nuts and washers.
3. Pull the cable off the terminal lugs and move aside.
4. When completed, go to the next step.
PRELIMINARY
Refer to Figure 4-3, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 4-12) for +24 VDC and -48 VDC
RUC/Fan Tray power connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Disconnect the ground wire from the GND lug between the power terminals.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Disconnect the Alarm cable (from eAMi/o) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from
eCCM-U).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Press down on the locking tab on the RUC/Fan Tray and pull on the pull ring to remove
the RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Clean the sub-rack intake with the cleaning cloth, vacuum, or small brush. When
completed, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Slide RUC/Fan Tray into the RUC/Fan Tray slot until the latching tab locks into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Connect the ground wire to the GND lug between the power terminals with washer and
nut. Torque 7 mm nut to 1.1 N-m (10 in-lb) or 8 mm nut to 1.6 N-m (14 in-lb). Do not
over-torque the nut.
Refer to Figure 4-3, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 4-12) and Table 4-2, “RUC/Fan
Tray terminal lug specifications” (p. 4-12) for +24 VDC and -48 VDC RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
power connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Reversing polarity-sensitive direct-current power cables when terminating them can
damage/destory sensitive components.
Verify direct-current power cables are terminated properly, positive (+) to positive (+)
and negative (–) to negative (–).
Connect the power cable to the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Push the cable onto the RUC/Fan Tray terminal lugs, positive-to-positive (+) and
negative-to-negative (―).
2. Secure cable with the nuts and washers previously removed. Torque 7 mm nut to 1.1
N-m (10 in-lb) or 8 mm nut to 1.6 N-m (14 in-lb). Do not over-torque the nut.
3. Push the protective boot back over the terminal lugs.
power connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAMi/o) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from
eCCM-U). Refer to Figure 4-3, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 4-12) for connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Check for alarms with NEM and LED status on the CCM and bCEMs. If ok, go to the
next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

unlocked.
TMA
PRELIMINARY
RRH/TRDU
BB (CEM)
CB (CCM)
RET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D2U (RUC)
and unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 When completed, update maintenance log, and if necessary close the cabinet door.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 3 orrective maintenance
C
process
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the corrective maintenance process, and safety, tools, and torque
requirements for the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact or Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Contents
Replacement/repair process 3-2

Safety requirements 3-5
Required tools 3-5
Torque requirements for mechanical connections 3-7
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance process Replacement/repair process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacement/repair process
Overview
The replacement/repair process follows the identification of a failed Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU). Depending on the FRU, the process may require a simple swap of the unit, or
it may require resetting and/or re-calibrating cell operating parameters.
Replacement process
The process for replacing a failed FRU is as follows:
1. Verify that the FRU is out-of-service.
2. If required, change cell configuration.
3. Replace FRU. Service technicians use this document to replace the failed
components.
4. Return FRU back to service.
5. Test, and if necessary, configure or calibrate FRU.
Hot swap FRUs

FRUs have the capability of being inserted or removed while power is applied. That is,
the circuit breaker for the cell or FRU can be left on while replacing the FRU.
One pin (or two, depending on FRU) on each backplane connector is designed for last
contact (ground is first contact) on the FRU. These pins are connected to an on-board hot
swap controller which senses the presence of applied power and ramps up the on-board
voltages to their required levels, preventing any potential damage to FRUs during an
insertion or extraction when power is applied.
The following table shows whether a cabinet needs to be powered down during
replacement of the various modules.
Table 3-1 Hot-swapped components
Component Hot swapped (Yes/No)

enhanced Core Controller Module (eCCM-U) No 1
enhanced Core Controller Module-2 (eCCM2) No 1
enhanced Core Controller Module-2 High Rate No 1
(eCCM2-HR)
PRELIMINARY
broadband Channel Element Module (bCEM) Yes

RUC/High-Capacity Fan Tray No
enhanced Alarm Module (eAM) 2 Yes
9926 BBU Sub-Rack No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance process Replacement/repair process
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. eCCM can be hot swapped, but is not recommended.
2. Provides user and frame alarm services for both rack-mount and cabinet configurations.
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU configurations

The following table lists the current Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU configurations for
LR14.1.L.
Table 3-2 Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU configurations
CCM 1 CEM 2 BBU Sub-rack RUC/Fan Tray (Fan rack) 4

(RBP) 3
Cfg. Name SLI Name SLI

Name SLI
Name SLI Release
5 eCCM-U_ 3JR20 bCEM (wide 3BK28

BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AD LA6.0.0
(enhanc 073CB range) 676AC 526AA
Tray
synch)_GE (-48V/no sw)
BBU V2 3JR37
(enhanc 073CA range) 676AC 526AA
Tray
BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AA LA6.0.0
(enhanc 073CA range) 676AC 526AA
Tray (+24V)
synch)_GE
BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)
synch)_GE

BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AC LA6.0.0
Tray (-48V)
synch)_GE
29 eCCM-U_ 3JR20 2xbCEM 3BK28
BBU V2 3JR37
(enhanc 073CB (wide range) 961CA 526AA
Tray
BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)
synch)_GE

BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AC LA6.0.0
Tray (-48V)
synch)_GE

BBU V2 3JR37
(enhanc 073CA (wide range) 961CA 526AA
Tray
PRELIMINARY

BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)
synch)_GE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance process Replacement/repair process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2 Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU configurations (continued)
CCM 1 CEM 2 BBU Sub-rack RUC/Fan Tray (Fan rack) 4

(RBP) 3
Cfg. Name SLI Name SLI

Name SLI
Name SLI Release

BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AD LR13.1
Tray

BBU V2 3JR37
Tray
36 eCCM2 3JR20 bCEM (wide 3BK28
BBU V2 3JR37
120AA range) 961CA 526AA
Tray
(-48V/no sw)
37 eCCM2 3JR20 2xbCEM 3BK28
BBU V2 3JR37
120AA (wide range) 961CA 526AA
Tray
(-48V/no sw)

BBU V2 3JR37
Tray
(-48V/no sw)

BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AA LR13.1
Tray (+24V)

BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)
synch)_GE
BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)
synch)_GE

BBU V2 3JR37
RUC/HC Fan 3JR37 517AC LR13.1
Tray (-48V)
BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (-48V)
BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (-48V)

BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)

BBU V2 3JR37
Tray (+24V)
Notes:
1. eCCM-U = eCCM-U_(enhanc synch)_GE and eCCM-U (HC) = eCCM-U_(high CPRI rate)_GE, eCCM2 =
PRELIMINARY
eCCM2
2. bCEM = bCEM (wide range), bCEM(48) = bCEM (-48V) , and 2xbCEM = 2xbCEM P1.1
3. BBU V2 = RBP V5 (d2Uv5)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance process Replacement/repair process
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. RUC/Fan Tray (+24) = Fan rack (+24V) and RUC/HS Fan Tray (-48) = High speed Fan rack (-48V),
RUC/HC Fan Tray(-48V) = High Capacity -48V fan rack, and RUC/HC Fan Tray(+24V) = High Capacity
+24V fan rack
5. No power switch.
Safety requirements
General personnel safety instructions
The personnel must follow the safety instructions specific to the installed site:
• Rules concerning the premises (see instructions posted on site or in the building)
• Rules linked to general personnel safety instructions
The personnel working on the cabinet must be authorized to work according to security
standards.
Equipment safety instructions

Adhere to the following safety guidelines:
• Follow Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) protection procedures.
• Use only recommended tools, especially when using a torque wrench.
• Do not mishandle cables and connections.
Required tools
The following tools are required before indoor and/or outdoor corrective maintenance can
be performed on the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB or Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Table 3-3 Required tools
Item Description
1 NEM PC (LMT), see 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element
Manager (NEM) User Guide, for hardware and software
requirements
2 RJ45 NEM Test Cable, PN 849145479, see 9400 LTE RAN
eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide, for
details.
PRELIMINARY
Note: Only Pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 are connected through the cable

(Do not use standard Ethernet cable during replacement
procedures).
3 Flush-cut wire cutter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance process Required tools
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-3 Required tools (continued)
Item Description
4 Screwdrivers:
• 1/4 in. flathead
• #1 Phillips-head
• #2 Phillips-head
5 Sockets for 1/4 in. drive torque wrench:
• 5 mm deep socket
• 3/4 in. deep socket
• 1-1/4 in. deep socket or open-end wrench
6 6 in. driver extension for 1/4 in. drive
7 Calibrated 1/4 in. torque wrench/screwdriver, range: 1.1 N-m (10
in-lb) to 27 N-m (240 in-lb)
8 Secure Torx 1/4 in. drive bits
• T-8
• T-25
• T-27
9 1/4 in. socket wrench
10 T-Handle (extractor for circuit packs)
11 7/16 in. Door Tool (unless keys are required)
12 ESD wrist strap
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance process Torque requirements for mechanical connections
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Torque requirements for mechanical connections

The following table lists torque requirements for mechanical connections on the
Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB or Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Table 3-4 Torque requirements for mechanical connections
Fastener Torque1
N-m (in-lb)
M6 machine thread fastener (nuts, hex head bolts, etc.) 2.8 (25)
M5 x 16 mm thread rolling screw 2.8 (25)
M3 screw 1.1 (10)
SMA coaxial connectors 1.1 (10)
N-type coaxial connectors 2.2 20()
Filter Nut 27 (240)
GPS Hatchplate connector nut 4.5 (40)
RUC/Fan Tray power terminal nuts 1.1 (10)
Antenna cable nut 27 (240)
Lifting detail (supplied with cabinet from cabinet 122 (1080)
manufacturer)
RUC Fan Tray 1.7 (10)
GPS connector nut 27 (240)
Notes:
1. Torque tolerance is ±10%. Torque values are common to minimize torque wrench
proliferation at assembly.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance process Torque requirements for mechanical connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
C
procedures for 9926 BBU
in 9412 eNodeB
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to replace failing/failed components applicable to the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU in the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Indoor and Outdoor
cabinets. Given the modularity of the base stations, repairs are essentially accomplished
through replacement of the faulty component, software upgrades, and/or provisioning.
Contents
9926 BBU replacement procedures in 9412 eNodeB 4-2

Procedure 4-1: Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells 4-3
Procedure 4-2: Replace RUC/Fan Tray 4-10
Procedure 4-3: Replace CCM using NEM 4-24
Procedure 4-4: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM 4-49
Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM 4-86
Procedure 4-6: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet 4-96
Procedure 4-7: Replace SFP transceivers 4-115
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 9926 BBU replacement procedures in 9412 eNodeB
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU replacement procedures in 9412 eNodeB

The following table lists the procedures that apply to replacing the Alcatel-Lucent 9926
Base Band Unit in the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
Table 4-1 BBU replacement procedures
Replace component Procedure

Soft Shutdown for Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells” (p. 4-3)
eNodeB or Cells
RUC/Fan Tray Procedure 4-2: “Replace RUC/Fan Tray ” (p. 4-10)
eCCM-U/eCCM2/ Procedure 4-3: “Replace CCM using NEM” (p. 4-24)
eCCM2-HR Procedure 4-4: “Replace CCM using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-49)
bCEM Procedure 4-5: “Replace bCEM” (p. 4-86)
9926 BBU Sub-Rack Procedure 4-6: “Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor BB
cabinet” (p. 4-96)
SFP transceivers Procedure 4-7: “Replace SFP transceivers” (p. 4-115)
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit front view

The following figure illustrates the circuit packs that make up the Alcatel-Lucent 9926
Base Band Unit.
Figure 4-1 Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit front view

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-1: Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-1: Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells

Overview
This procedure describes how to perform a Soft Shutdown on an eNodeB or Cells from
the EMS (SAM) or NEM.
Functional description
This feature allows the customer to send a Soft Shutdown command from the EMS
(SAM)/NEM to the eNodeB. Upon receipt of a Soft Shutdown command, the eNodeB
bars the establishment of incoming calls, gradually reduces transmit power on the affected
Cells, waits for currently established calls to complete or handoff the call, and then
transitions the Managed Objects (MOs) to the Administrative State (AST) Locked. Soft
shutdown is available for eNodeB and Cell MOs.
A configurable shutdownTimer parameter allows the Operator to set the amount of time to
wait for calls to drain before transitioning to the Locked state.
A configurable CellShrinkForCallsDraining parameter allows the Operator to set 1, 2, or
3 power reduction steps, including a configurable reduction amount at each step and a
configurable pause time between each step.
A configurable protectEmergencyAndHpaCallsDuringCallDraining parameter allows the
Operator the option of protecting emergency and High Priority Access (HPA) calls during
Soft Shutdown. If that option is set, the eNodeB does not reduce transmit power to
affected Cells or transition the MO to the Locked state if there are active emergency or
HPA calls. Instead, the Operator is notified and the eNodeB waits for emergency and HPA
calls to drain before transitioning to the Locked state.
The Operator may:
• wait for the emergency and HPA calls to terminate and the MO to transition to
Locked.
• Force the termination of emergency and HPA calls by sending a Lock request for the
MO.
• Cancel the shutdown by sending an Unlock request for the MO.
Soft shutdown is a way to allow calls to drain before Locking an MO. This avoids call
drops which occur if a MO transitions directly to Locked without shutting down first.
Shutting down instead of Locking active MOs should improve call drop KPIs. Soft
shutdown gradually reduces the transmit power in affected Cells which causes gradual
PRELIMINARY
handovers to neighbor Cells instead of the sharp spike in call originations that occurs in
neighbor Cells when a Cell is Locked and calls are dropped.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-1: Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Soft shutdown scenarios
The following Soft Shutdown scenarios are described:
• Soft shutdown of an eNodeB or Cell
• Cancel a Soft Shutdown and transition the eNodeB or Cell back to Unlocked
• Override a Soft Shutdown and immediately transition the eNodeB or Cell to Locked
Soft shutdown of an eNodeB or Cell

Note: The following preconditions must be met before shutting down an eNodeB or
Cell:
• shutdownTimer is set to a value between 0 and 1800 seconds
• CellShrinkForCallsDraining is set for 1, 2, or 3 steps down in transmit power
with pauses in between
• protectEmergencyAndHpaCallsDuringCallDraining is set to True or False
• AST of shuttingDown eNodeB or Cell is Unlocked
The following steps describe the process of performing a Soft Shutdown of an eNodeB or
Cell.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Request Soft Shutdown of eNodeB or Cell by setting the AST of the eNB or Cell to
shuttingDown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 EMS (SAM)/NEM displays warning.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Confirm Soft Shutdown request.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 EMS (SAM)/NEM sends request to eNodeB with MO AST set to shuttingDown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 eNodeB validates Soft Shutdown request; valid MO and valid AST. If invalid, eNodeB
rejects the Soft Shutdown request.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 eNodeB sets MO AST to shuttingDown

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 eNodeB sends AVCN to report MO AST changed to shuttingDown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 eNodeB determines affected Cell(s). If shutting down Cell, affected Cell = specified Cell.
If shutting down eNodeB, affected Cells = all Cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 eNodeB starts call draining timer if shutdownTimer > 0.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 eNodeB blocks call setups on the affected Cell(s), including emergency and HPA calls.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 The eNodeB determines the Cell Block Status as follows:

• eNodeB determines when Cell is Blocked as follows:
– with active emergency or HPA calls (Blocked_with_ec),
– Blocked with no active emergency or HPA calls (Blocked_no_ec)
– Blocked with no active calls (Disabled).
• eNodeB maintains current Cell block status as calls terminate as follows:
– If Blocked Cell has no active calls, eNodeB disables the Cell.
– If Cell is Blocked_no_ec, eNodeB shrinks Cell coverage by gradually reducing Tx
power as specified in CellShrinkForCallsDraining.
– If Cell is Blocked_with_ec and if protectEmergencyAndHpaCalls-
DuringCallDraining = False, eNodeB gradually reduces Tx power as specified in
CellShrinkForCallsDraining.
– If Cell is Blocked_with_ec and if protectEmergencyAndHpaCalls-
DuringCallDraining = True, eNodeB does not reduce Tx power. eNodeB sends
“Emergency/HPA Call Active on Blocked Cell” alarm for that Cell. EMS
(SAM)/NEM notifies Operator.
– If a Cell transitions from Blocked_with_ec to Blocked_no_ec, eNodeB begins or
resumes Cell shrink at that time, gradually reducing Tx power on the affected
Cell. eNodeB clears any outstanding Emergency/HPA Call alarm for that Cell.
– If a Cell transitions from Blocked_no_ec to Blocked_with_ec, the current Tx
power reduction remains in effect, if any, but eNodeB suspends any further power
reduction steps on the affected Cell. eNodeB raises the Emergency/HPA Call
alarm for that Cell.
– If a Cell transitions from Blocked_with_ec or Blocked_no_ec to
Blocked_no_calls, eNodeB disables the Cell.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 If shutdown timer expires, the following occurs:

• If Cell is Blocked_no_ec, eNodeB disables the Cell.
• If Cell is Blocked_with_ec and if protectEmergencyAndHpaCallsDuringCallDraining
= False, eNodeB disables the Cell.
• If Cell is Blocked_with_ec and if protectEmergencyAndHpaCallsDuringCallDraining
= True,
– eNodeB sends “Shutdown Timeout with Emergency/HPA Call Active” alarm.
EMS (SAM)/NEM notifies Operator.
– eNodeB waits for Cell to become Blocked_no_ec, then, eNodeB disables Cell and
eNodeB clears any outstanding Emergency/HPA Call alarm and Shutdown
Timeout alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 When all affected Cells are disabled, eNodeB Locks the MO, stops the shutdown timer if
running and clears any outstanding Emergency/HPA Call and Shutdown Timeout alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 eNodeB sends AVCN to report MO AST changed to Locked and sends State Change
Notification (SCN) to report OST/AVS changes of affected Cells to disabled/dependency.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 EMS (SAM)/NEM displays MO AST and OST/AVS of Cells.

Result: The following post-conditions occur:
• For Cell Soft Shutdown: Administrative State = Locked, Operational State =
Disabled, and Availability Status = None.
• For eNodeB Soft Shutdown: Administrative State = Locked, Operational State =
Disabled, and Availability Status = None. For Cells, Operational State = Disabled,
and Availability Status = Dependency. Administrative State of affected Cells is not
changed by Soft Shutdown of eNodeB.
Note: If, at any time during the shutting down process, the Operator does not want to
wait any longer for calls to drain, the Operator may Override the Soft Shutdown and
transition the eNodeB or Cell immediately to locked.
If, at any time during the shutting down process, the Operator wishes to stop the
shutting down process and return the eNodeB or Cell to an unlocked and enabled
state, the Operator may Cancel the Soft Shutdown.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cancel Soft Shutdown of an eNodeB or Cell
Note: The following precondition must be met before canceling an eNodeB or Cell:
AST of eNodeB or Cell is shuttingDown
This procedure is used when an eNodeB is shutting down and the Operator wishes to
stop the shutdown and return the eNodeB to the AST Unlocked.
The following steps describe the process of canceling a Soft Shutdown of an eNodeB or
Cell.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Operator requests Unlock eNodeB or Cell.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 EMS (SAM)/NEM sends SNMP Set Request to eNodeB with MO AST set to Unlocked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 eNodeB validates Unlock request; valid MO and valid AST. If invalid, eNodeB rejects the
Unlock request.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB sets MO AST to Unlocked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 eNodeB sends AVCN to report MO AST changed to Unlocked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 eNodeB stops the shutdown timer if running.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 eNodeB executes Unlock Scenario for MO.

• If Unlock Cell, enable/unblock specific Cell.
• If Unlock eNodeB, enable/unblock all Cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 eNodeB enables/unblocks affected Cell(s).

• eNodeB enables Cell if disabled, restores transmit power if reduced, unblocks Cell
and allows call setups again if Blocked.
• eNodeB clears any outstanding Emergency/HPA Call and Shutdown Timeout alarms
for that Cell.
PRELIMINARY
• eNodeB sends SCN to report Cell operational state (OST) and availability status
(AVS) changes; e.g. enabled/none.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 When all affected Cells are enabled/none, eNodeB Unlocks the MO.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 eNodeB sends AVCN to report MO AST changed to Unlocked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• For Cell Unlock: Administrative State = Unlocked, Operational State = Enabled,
and Availability Status = None.
• For eNodeB Unlock: Administrative State = Unlocked, Operational State =
Enabled, and Availability Status = None. For Cells, Operational State = Enabled,
and Availability Status = None. Administrative State of affected Cells is not
changed by Unlock of eNodeB.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Override Soft Shutdown of an eNodeB of Cell

Note: The following precondition must be met before overriding a Soft Shutdown of
an eNodeB or Cell: Administrative State of eNodeB or Cell is shuttingDown
This procedure is used when the eNodeB is in the process of shutting down and the
Operator does not want to wait for the completion of the shutdown, but instead wants
the eNodeB to transition immediately to the AST Locked.
The following steps describe the process of overriding a Soft Shutdown of an eNodeB or
Cell.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Operator requests a Lock of a eNodeB or Cell.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 EMS (SAM)/NEM displays a warning to the Operator.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Operator confirms the Lock request.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 EMS (SAM)/NEM sends SNMP Set Request to eNodeB with MO AST set to Locked.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 eNodeB validates Lock request; valid MO and valid AST. If invalid, eNodeB rejects the
Lock request.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 eNodeB sets MO AST to Locked

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 eNodeB sends AVCN to report MO AST changed to Locked

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 eNodeB stops the shutdown timer if running.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 eNodeB executes Lock Scenario for MO.

• If Lock Cell, disable specific Cell.
• If Lock eNodeB, disable all Cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 eNodeB disables affected Cell(s).

• eNodeB blocks all call setups and immediately terminates all active calls including
emergency and HPA calls.
• eNodeB clears any outstanding Emergency/HPA Call and Shutdown Timeout alarms
for that Cell.
• eNodeB sends SCN to report Cell operational state (OST) and availability status
(AVS) changes; e.g. disabled/dependency
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 When all affected Cells are disabled, eNodeB Locks the MO.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 eNodeB sends AVCN to report MO AST changed to Locked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• For Cell Lock: Administrative State = Locked, Operational State = Disabled, and
Availability Status = None
• For eNodeB Lock: for eNodeB, Administrative State = Locked, Operational State
= Disabled, and Availability Status = None. For affected Cells, Operational State =
Disabled, and Availability Status = Dependency. Administrative State of affected
Cells is not changed by Lock of eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2: Replace RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2: Replace RUC/Fan Tray

Purpose
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
To avoid possible deletion of the 9926 BBU database, when replacing a RUC/Fan Tray in
an LTE 9926 BBU, ONLY USE FACTORY NEW RUC/Fan Trays.
When replacing a +24V or -48V RUC/Fan Tray or performing the ECP CN CL2002CB
for the -48V RUC/Fan Tray replacement, never insert a RUC/Fan Tray into a different
eNodeB after its initial use. A new RUC/Fan Tray is programmed with factory default
values that are detected by the eCCM and then reprogrammed for the given site. If a
reprogrammed RUC/Fan Tray spare is removed and installed into another eNodeB, the
controller will remove the site database, rendering the eNodeB inoperable (thus factory
mode).
Contact Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support with any questions.
This procedure describes how to replace the RUC/Fan Tray located in the Alcatel-Lucent
9926 BBU of a 9412 eNodeB.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, RUC/Fan Tray refers to both the RUC/Fan Tray
and RUC/High-Capacity Fan Tray (RUC/HC Fan Tray).
Important! The RUC/Fan Tray includes the network entity identifier (NE ID) for the
eNodeB. The NE ID is used to identify the 9412 eNodeB to the network and is used to
obtain the OAM IP address through an optional Dynamic Host Control Protocol
(DHCP) server or manually. If the DHCP server is activated, the eNodeB sends a
request to a DHCP server using an “eNodeB unique identifier” and the DHCP server
answers with the IP address that had been provisioned associated with this “eNodeB
unique identifier”. This IP address is used by the 9412 eNodeB for the OAM flow. If
the DHCP server feature is deactivated, a technician must enter the OAM IP address
at commissioning time on the 9412 eNodeB.
The RUC/Fan Tray is programmed at the factory with the relevant serialization
number (NodeB unique identifier). If the DHCP server is used, the serialization
number has been declared as the NE ID for the eNodeB. When replacing the
RUC/Fan Tray, the cabinet serialization number must be programmed into the new
PRELIMINARY
RUC/Fan Tray so that there is no impact on the DHCP server. This is done
automatically.
Hot-swap FRU
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2: Replace RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intervention time
Perform replacement during low traffic period or maintenance window (1-2 hour
duration).
Safety
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Circuit packs must therefore always be kept in antistatic covers. Use the original
antistatic packaging if possible.
Always observe the general ESD safety instructions.
NOTICE
Service interruption
Notify OMC in case of service interruption or reduction.
Figures
The following figure shows the RUC/Fan Tray module.
Figure 4-2 RUC/Fan Tray module
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the power, ground, control and alarm connections for +24/-48
VDC RUC/Fan Tray.
Figure 4-3 RUC/Fan Tray connections
Depending on RUC/Fan Tray version, the terminal lugs vary in thread size, nut size, and
torque as described in the following table.
Table 4-2 RUC/Fan Tray terminal lug specifications
RUC/Fan Tray SLI Thread size Nut size Torque

BBU V1 +24 3JR08022AA M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
BBU V2 +24 3JR37517AA M5 8 mm 1.6 N-m
VDC (14 in-lb)
BBU V1 -48 3JR08021AC M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
BBU V2 -48 3JR08021AC M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
Notes:
1. Some +24 VDC RUC/Fan Trays come with copper terminal lugs. Take care not to
over-torque them.
Check RUC/Fan Tray status

PRELIMINARY
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, Chapter, State Management, to check the D2U operational state of the 9926
BBU. The RUC/Fan Tray is part of the D2U Managed Object.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The RUC/HC Fan Tray includes a status LED that indicates whether power is applied.
The RUC/Fan Tray does not include a status LED.
Required documentation
The following manuals must be available for this procedure:
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
Guide
Technical support
For technical support, software upgrades, and documentation, go to the Online Customer
Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com) (login required). Phone numbers and
email contacts can be selected by country under Product Technical Support. Indicate you
are replacing the RUC/Fan Tray in a 9412 eNodeB.
Required tools
The following tools are required for this procedure:
• NEM PC (LMT) with current NEM software installed
• RJ45 NEM Test Cable, PN 849145479, see 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element
Manager (NEM) User Guide, for details, only Pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 are connected (do
not use standard Ethernet cable, can cause unpredictable reboots)
• 7 mm and 8 mm sockets or nutdrivers
• Socket wrench
• Torque wrench (1.1 N-m (10 in-lb) to 1.6 N-m (14 in-lb))
• No. 1 Phillips screwdriver
• T-Handle (extractor for circuit packs)
• T-8 Torx screwdriver
• ESD Strap
• Key for door, if required
Replacement process
The RUC/Fan Tray and CCM include the eNodeB serial number and eNodeB OAM IP
address in non-volatile memory. The serial number and OAM IP address are used to
identify the eNodeB in the EMS. This redundancy allows either device to be replaced
PRELIMINARY
without losing this information and maintaining communications with EMS.

The RUC/Fan Tray can be found in two basic versions, factory default RUC or
configured RUC. The factory default RUC includes a default serial number that the CCM
recognizes during the RUC replacement process and allows the CCM to reprogram the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
stored eNodeB serial number into the RUC. The configured RUC is not recognized
during the RUC replacement process by the CCM or EMS and cannot be reprogrammed
automatically. The eNodeB must then go through a complete reconfiguration.
During the replacement process, the RUC is checked. If the RUC is a factory default
RUC, the RUC serial number is automatically updated from the CCM and the eNodeB is
unlocked and operational. If the RUC is a configured RUC, the EMS receives appropriate
error messages requiring a complete reconfiguration.
Replacement procedure overview

This procedure requires a coordinated effort between OMC and the on-site technician to
replace the RUC/Fan Tray. The following table illustrates the replacement procedures
involved and where the given step takes place, either from OMC or on-site at 9412
eNodeB (eNB).
Table 4-3 RUC/Fan Tray replacement procedure overview
Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
1. eNB: open door, connect and login to NEM 1. eNB: verify power off
2. OMC/eNB: check and clear alarms 2. eNB: insert new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
3. OMC/eNB: lock 9926 BBU 3. eNB: connect ground wire
4. eNB: turn power off at RUC/PDP 4. eNB: connect power cables
5. eNB: disconnect power cables 5. eNB: connect alarm/ commissioning cables

6. eNB: disconnect ground wire 6. eNB: notify OMC
7. eNB: disconnect alarm/ commissioning cables 7. eNB: turn power on (RUC, PDP, and/or equipment CB)
8. eNB: pull RUC/Fan Tray out 8. eNB/OMC: observe the following:
• if factory default RUC and EMS recognizes eNodeB, go to
next step.
• if configured RUC and EMS does not recognize eNodeB,
contact technical support.
9. eNB: package RUC/Fan Tray 9. OMC: unlock 9412 eNodeB

10. eNB: go to Install new RUC/Fan Tray 10. eNB/OMC: check/compare/ resolve alarms
11. eNB: disconnect NEM, close door
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the RUC/Fan Tray and restore
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 4-2.1: “Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray” (p. 4-16)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 4-2.2: “Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray” (p. 4-20)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed RUC/Fan Tray from the 9926 BBU
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From eNodeB, Open Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB cabinet and
locate 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Note: Before connecting the NEM PC to the CCM, disable/close all firewalls (see
9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide).
From eNodeB, connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable.
Open NEM and login as follows:
• NEM Build (status only, indicates current release of this software, update if
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From eNodeB, use NEM to check and if possible, clear alarms reported on the selected
9412 eNodeB. From Tree View, click Alarms (the word not +) to check for alarms in right
panel.
Refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide, Chapter,
Tree View, Section, Alarms . Make a note of any uncleared alarms. The alarm status is
checked again after installing the new circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note: Use either lock or Soft Shutdown to lock the eNodeB as follows:
To lock eNodeB:
If possible, lock network element (eNodeB) from either OMC or NEM as follows:
• From OMC, perform the following steps to lock the 9412 eNodeB:
PRELIMINARY
1. Open an ENBEquipment properties form and configure the contained parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Online configuration, Section,
ENB Equipment and eNodeB NE instance objects, Procedure, To open the
Network Element properties form of an eNodeB for details.
3. Choose Locked from the Administrative State drop-down menu.
Refer to Chapter, Online configuration, Section, Locking and unlocking eNodeB
NEs and objects, Procedure, To lock or unlock an eNodeB NE for details.
• To lock eNodeB, perform the following steps with NEM:
Refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide,
Chapter, Tree View, Section, Hardware Modules , Sub-Section, Modify Module or
Status for details.
To Soft Shutdown eNodeB, refer to Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
•
PRELIMINARY
Without a power switch, turn power OFF at the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Disconnect the Alarm cable (from eAMi/o) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from
eCCM-U).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
10 Package the circuit pack in an ESD safe bag or original shipping container and ship to
appropriate repair facility.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 When completed, perform the following procedure to install the new circuit pack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the new factory default RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
procedure! If power was not removed, the procedure will not work properly.
Verify power is turned OFF at the RUC/Fan Tray power cables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Slide new factory default RUC/Fan Tray into the RUC/Fan Tray slot until the latching tab
locks into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
power connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 WARNING

PRELIMINARY

power connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAMi/o) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from
eCCM-U).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
8 Observe for one of the following:

• If factory default RUC and EMS recognizes eNodeB, go to next step.
• If configured RUC and EMS do not recognize eNodeB, contact technical support.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

unlocked.
TMA
RRH/TRDU
BB (CEM)
CB (CCM)
RET
D2U (RUC)
and unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check for alarms and clear per local practice from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:
PRELIMINARY
• From OMC, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412
eNodeB (network element).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-2.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Troubleshooting and 5620 SAM
Troubleshooting Guide. Make a note of any uncleared alarms.
• From eNodeB, use NEM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412
eNodeB. From Tree View, click Alarms (the word not +) to check for alarms in right
panel.
Chapter, Tree View, Section, Alarms . Make a note of any uncleared alarms.
Note: The customer must determine if remaining alarms have any significances to the
operational state of the eNodeB. Some alarms may not matter. Clear alarms per local
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3: Replace CCM using NEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3: Replace CCM using NEM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the eCCM-U, or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR in the LTE
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB indoor/outdoor BB cabinet
using NEM.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, “CCM” indicates the referenced information
applies to the “eCCM-U”, “eCCM2”, and “eCCM2-HR”.
Attention: For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR: If replacing a CCM with a spare eCCM2, SAM
SNMP passwords, must be reset to default (initial_snm).
This step must be executed by a Class 1 user.
Hot-swap FRU
No
Attention: The CCM hardware is designed to be electronically hot-swappable.
However, the CCM replacement procedure will not work correctly if the CCM is hot
swapped.
This procedure is written requiring the eNodeB must be Locked and power turned
OFF before removing the CCM from the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
Intervention time
Perform replacement during low traffic period or maintenance window. If not done
previously, this procedure requires additional preparation time for collecting software
updates for the eNodeB and NEM, MIB and MIM database files, and Customer
Information Sheet (CIS), Customer Information Questionnaire (CIQ), or equivalent
transport, and commissioning data from customer network design and engineering
department.
Replacement duration for the CCM using NEM is indicated for the following
arrangements:
• From failed eCCM-U to working eCCM-U spare - 25 minutes (actual not provided)
• From failed eCCM2 to working eCCM2 spare - 25 minutes (actual, 15 min)
• From failed/working eCCM-U to eCCM2 upgrade - 25 minutes (actual, 13 min 40 s)
• From failed/working eCCM2 to eCCM-U downgrade/fallback - 45 minutes (actual
PRELIMINARY
not provided)
• From failed/working eCCM-U (FDD/TDD) to eCCM2-HR (FDD) upgrade
• From failed/working eCCM2 (FDD) to eCCM2-HR (FDD) upgrade
• From failed eCCM2-HR (FDD) to working eCCM2-HR (FDD) spare
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3: Replace CCM using NEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From failed/working eCCM2-HR (FDD) to eCCM2 (FDD) downgrade/fallback
• From failed/working eCCM2-HR (FDD) to eCCM-U (FDD) downgrade/fallback
The durations are approximate and include full database backup, shutdown, CCM
replacement, power on, software download, activation, acceptance, and full database
restore.
Safety
CAUTION
Laser Class 1 hazards - laser emission
Laser emissions can damage the eyes.
Never look into the end of the fiber-optic cable or SFP transceiver to prevent eye damage.
Apply an appropriate cover/cap over the cable or SFP transceiver to prevent eye damage.
NOTICE
Service lost during maintenance window.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
FRUs/circuit packs can be damaged if field repairs are attempted.
FRUs/circuit packs are not field serviceable devices. Do not attempt to repair/replace
PRELIMINARY
ANY FRU/circuit pack components outside of a qualified Alcatel-Lucent repair center.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
The following figure shows the eCCM-U faceplate.
Figure 4-4 eCCM-U faceplate
The following figure shows the eCCM2/eCCM2-HR faceplate.
Figure 4-5 eCCM2/eCCM2-HR faceplate

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCM connector changes
The following table describes the differences/similarities between the eCCM-U and
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR connectors.
Table 4-4 CCM connector changes
Faceplate GPS-RF Ref- GPS Alarm Port 1 Port 2 BH1, BH2 BH3, BH4
connec- In/Ref-
tor (see Out
table
notes)
eCCM-U SMB Dual 10-pin 10-pin RJ45 RJ45 MDA- MDA-

(3JR20 SMP RJ45 RJ45 (RS-232 (GbE) depen- depen-
073DB) + 100bT) dent dent
eCCM2 SMB DIN 10-pin 10-pin Same as Same as 2 SFPs 2 RJ-45

P3 1.0/2.3 RJ45 RJ45 eCCM-U eCCM-U (GbE)
(3JR20
120ABAD)
Notes:
1. SFP connectors: the eCCM2 supports the same set of SFPs as the eCCM-U.
2. Alarm connector: if the eCCM2 is to be connected to the RUC faceplate in the same
manner as the eCCM-U, the same cable can be used (3JR22028AC). The eCCM2 connector
replaces some eCCM-U connections (Evolium BCB link for future use) with User Alarms. If
access to User Alarms is required, contact Alcatel-Lucent technical support.
3. BH1, BH2, BH3, BH4 connectors: BH1 (OPT1) and BH3 (GE1) are supported. BH2 and
BH4 are not supported (for future enhancements). BH1 is default connection and BH3 is
backup. If BH1 is connected first, a reset is required to enable BH3, even when BH1 is
unplugged.
Check CCM status

Refer to “eCCM-U LED status” (p. D-1) to determine the status of the CCM using the
status LED matrix and CPRI LEDs.
Before you begin

The CCM can be replaced in one of the following arrangements:
• From failed eCCM-U to working eCCM-U spare
PRELIMINARY
• From failed eCCM2 to working eCCM2 spare

• From failed/working eCCM-U to eCCM2 upgrade
• From failed/working eCCM2 to eCCM-U downgrade/fallback
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! If a downgrade from the eCCM2 (new hardware) to the eCCM-U (old
hardware) is done, ensure the database is operationally compatible with the eCCM-U
capabilities (activated functions, capacity, number of cells, etc.) before installing the
eCCM-U. If database support is needed, contact Alcatel-Lucent technical support.
Replacement procedure overview using NEM
Attention: Before field personnel can go to the cell site, a number of prerequisite
tasks need to be performed as described in Procedure 4-3.1: “Things to do before
going out to the cell site using NEM” (p. 4-31).
This procedure requires a coordinated effort between OMC and the on-site field personnel
to replace the CCM.
The following table illustrates the replacement procedures involved and where the given
step takes place, either at OMC and/or at the cell site (9412 eNodeB (eNB)) using NEM.
Table 4-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using NEM
Things to do before going to Remove CCM and bCEM(s) Install CCM using NEM Install bCEM(s) and restore
cell site using NEM using NEM 9412 eNodeB using NEM
1. eNB: required personnel (2) 1. eNB: open door, disconnect 1. eNB: verify power at 1. eNB: connect and login
backhaul cable (SAM) RUC/Fan Tray is OFF NEM to CCM, watch for
“Factory Mode” or
“Connection Error”
2. OMC/eNB: required 2. eNB: connect NEM PC and 2. eNB: Install CCM: 2. eNB: if required, update and
documentation login to NEM 1. Insert CCM, secure with activate 9926 BBU software
screws. using NEM.
2. secure EMI bracket

3. connect CCM cables:
• for eCCM-U, go to
Step 3
• for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to Step 4
3. eNB: required NEM 3. eNB: if possible, check and 3. eNB: connect eCCM-U 3. eNB: Install bCEM.
software. Save on NEM PC. clear alarms cables (no BH). Go to Step 5
PRELIMINARY
4. eNB: required eNodeB 4. eNB: if possible, lock 9926 4. eNB: connect 4. eNB: restore full DB.
software. Save on NEM PC. BBU eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables The eNodeB reboots and
(+BH). Go to Step 5 comes up in required load with
valid configuration data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using NEM (continued)
5. If eNodeB IP Security 5. eNB: if possible, backup full 5. eNB: turn power on at 5. eNB: Set expectedControl-
enabled, check/update database (DB) using NEM RUC/PDP lerType parameter to either
replacement CCM eCCM-U, eCCM2, or
eCCM2-HR to match installed
CCM using NEM
6. eNB: required full DB 6. eNB: close NEM and 6. eNB: observe CCM LEDs, 6. eNB: unlock 9412 eNodeB
backup available. Save on disconnect NEM PC • If the eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using NEM
NEM PC. functional, go to Step 7.
• If eCCM-U functional, go
to Step 8.
• if not successful, reset
eNodeB or contact
technical support.
• For self-commissioning,
– if pre-LR14 load,
go to Install
bCEM(s) and
restore 9412
eNodeB using
NEM
– If LR14 load, PnP
configures CCM.
7. OMC/eNB: required 7. eNB: turn power off at 7. eNB: reset SAM SNMP 7. eNB: check locked
eNodeB VLAN 0 transport RUC/PDP password. component status, unlock
properties using NEM
8. eNB: required tools 8. eNB: disconnect CCM 8. eNB: 8. eNB: check/compare/
cables: go to Install bCEM(s) and resolve alarms using NEM.
1. eCCM-U, go to Step 9 restore 9412 eNodeB using
2. eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, go NEM
to Step 10
9. eNB: go to cell site and 9. eNB: disconnect eCCM-U 9. eNB: Close NEM and
Remove CCM and bCEM(s) cables. Go to Step 11 disconnect NEM PC.
When completed, do one of
following:
• For eCCM-U, go to Step
10 to connect Backhaul
cable.
• For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
PRELIMINARY
go to Step 11 to check for

alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10. eNB: disconnect 10. eNB: for eCCM-U,

eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables. reconnect Backhaul cable to
Go to Step 11 9926 BBU as follows:
1. notify OMC
2. Connect Backhaul cable
to 9926 BBU
3. If SAM detects the eNB,
go to Step 11.
4. If SAM cannot detect
eNB, contact technical
support.
11. eNB: Remove CCM 11. OMC: check/compare/

resolve alarms using SAM
12. eNB: Remove bCEM(s) 12. OMC: if necessary, update
CCM MAC address on 7750
backhaul network or other
network
13. eNB: go to Install CCM 13. eNB: when operational,
using NEM close door (technician leaves
site)
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the eCCM-U, or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR
(CCM) and restore 9412 eNodeB and RFM operation using NEM and OMC support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 4-3.1: “Things to do before going out to the cell site using NEM” (p. 4-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 4-3.2: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM” (p. 4-36)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 4-3.3: “Install new CCM using NEM” (p. 4-40)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 4-3.4: “Install bCEM(s) and restore 9412 eNodeB using NEM” (p. 4-43)
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.1: Things to do before going out to the cell
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB site using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3.1: Things to do before going out to the cell site

using NEM
Overview
The following steps outline information that should be available for the replacement of
the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR (CCM). OMC should have this information
maintained in maintenance records to enable efficient repair of the 9926 BBU using
NEM.
Steps
Perform the following action items before going out to the cell site:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Personnel
The procedure requires field and OMC (SAM) personnel. The field personnel (technician)
goes out to the cell site to perform the CCM replacement. The OMC (SAM) personnel
provides operational support for the field personnel during the procedure. The field and
OMC (SAM) personnel should review the replacement procedure together and the role of
each person. The personnel must have direct contact with one another during the
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Documentation
• For field personnel, must have a copy of the following documents:
– Copy of this replacement procedure
– Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide
– Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD Release
– Copies of any Alcatel-Lucent Alerts that impact CCM replacement. Remember to
load any tools associated with the alerts. Alerts and tools are available at
Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/
portal/olcsHome.do), select 9412 eNodeB (Evolved NodeB) under Technical
Content for My Favorite Products, then Product Alerts and Alerts for 9412
eNodeB (Evolved Node B) is displayed.
• For OMC (SAM) personnel, must have a copy of the following documents:
PRELIMINARY

Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.1: Things to do before going out to the cell
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Customer Information Sheet (CIS), Customer Information Questionnaire (CIQ) or
equivalent transport and commissioning data from the customer network and
design engineering department
– Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
– Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE Parameter Reference
– Access to the 5620 SAM documentation suite
Note: Before attempting this replacement procedure, read and understand the NEM
operation and maintenance functions described in the 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB
Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide and THIS procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NEM software
For field personnel, check NEM release on the NEM PC. If necessary, check LTE
release notes for the current NEM release. If NEM PC NEM software is not current,
download and install new release from either Alcatel-Lucent ALED or customer software
repository. See details in 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide for NEM software installation. This procedure allows the field technician the
ability to replace the CCM using NEM only, with minimal support from OMC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB software
For field personnel, have current running eNodeB software.
Check the current running eNodeB software release assigned to the eNodeB from either
software repositories or release notes. If the running eNodeB software is not present on
the NEM PC, download the current release(s) from either Alcatel-Lucent ALED or
customer internal software repository.
See Appendix E, “Update 9926 BBU software loads” to download running eNodeB
software and release notes from ALED. If the customer has an internal software
PRELIMINARY
repository, refer to customer instructions to download the software and release notes to
the NEM PC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attention: The following table defines the software replacement paths supporting a
nominal software upgrade path with database migration.
Source Target Comment

LR13.3 FL (FDD) LR14.1 (FDD) For controller replacement
or eNodeB installation
LR14.1 (FDD) LR13.3 (FDD) For controller replacement
in LR13.3 eNodeB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 eNodeB IP Security
If IPsec is enabled using digital certificates and the eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR does
not have a factory installed certificate, then convert the eNodeB to either a non-IPsec
configuration or PreSharedKeys (PSK) configuration.
Reference: Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network IP Security
Integration Procedure, 9YZ-04152-0012-USZZA, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 eNodeB full database (DB) backup file

For field personnel, check that the full database (DB) backup of the affected eNodeB is
present and current on the NEM PC.
Before the eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR field swap, a full database (DB) backup file
must be created. The DB backup includes SNMP data and NETCONF data. This is only
done from a NEM PC connected to the 9926 BBU.
Whenever possible, it is best practice to create a full database (DB) backup for the site
during installation and periodic updates to ensure any changes made to the site since the
last scheduled backup is saved. If the backup cannot be retrieved at the eNodeB, check
with OMC (SAM) personnel for the latest backup from cell site records (collected during
initial installation). If necessary, consult the SAM administrator for the location of the
backup files and copy them to the NEM PC. If the full database (DB) backup is not
PRELIMINARY
available at all, the 9926 BBU will need to be recommissioned during installation of the
new CCM (see Appendix F, “Recommission 9926 BBU” for details).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: One of the following conditions occurs to the database when the software is
installed:
• If a different SW load (release/FDD/TDD) from the eNodeB is detected on the
CCM, the database is replaced with an unconfigured database (minimal DB load).
A full DB restore is required that matches the current software load requirements.
• If the same SW load on the CCM matches the eNodeB SW load, the configured
database is not replaced. A full DB restore is not required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 eNodeB VLAN 0 transport properties

For field and OMC personnel, provide the eNodeB VLAN 0 transport properties from
cell site records (collected during initial installation) in case the information is lost on the
eNodeB during the replacement procedure.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the VLAN 0 transport properties from NEM is a
backup to the 5620 SAM procedure, if it becomes necessary to complete the CCM
replacement.
From eNodeB, if operational, copy the VLAN 0 Transport Properties as follows:
1. From NEM, select Root View > Vlan 0 Properties > VLAN 0 Transport Properties
tab.
2. Do a Print Screen of the VLAN 0 Transport Properties and save the screen capture.
Important! If the OAM communications between 5620 SAM and 9926 BBU has
failed or must be updated because of a software upgrade (update before resetting
OAM addresses), refer to Procedure F-5: “Set OAM Routing” (p. F-27), to reset the
OAM addresses. This has to be done at the local cell site using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tools
For field personnel, collect the following tools for this procedure:
PRELIMINARY
• Protective caps for fiber-optic cables and dust caps for SFP slots
• ESD Strap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 When ready, the field personnel can go to the cell site and continue with the following
procedure. The OMC personnel should be backup during the replacement procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM

Overview
When upgrading to or downgrading from the eCCM2-HR, the bCEM must be removed
during shutdown and installed after the eCCM2-HR is install and activated or removed.
When upgrading to or downgrading from the eCCM2 does not require removal of the
bCEM.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR
(CCM) in the 9926 BBU using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From eNodeB, open cabinet, locate the 9926 BBU, and disconnect the backhaul cable
from CCM as follows:
• On eCCM-U disconnect from eCCM-U GE MDA port.
• On eCCM2/eCCM2-HR disconnect from ports BH1 (default) and/or BH3 as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note: The full database (DB) backup cannot be performed during the following
conditions:
• eNodeB software download or activation process started or already in progress.
• Full DB backup (or restore) request started or already in progress.
• Configuration changes started or already in progress.
From eNodeB, if a full DB backup was not obtained before going to the cell site, perform
full DB backup using NEM as follows:
1. From the main menu, select Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > Full eNodeB DB Backup.
3. Navigate to the folder that stores the backup file.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CHANGE the automatically named backup file, after the
backup is completed. The filename of a backup file is incorporated in the file itself
and a consistency check is performed before restoring it.
4. Click on OK when the download is complete.
5. From the main menu, select Configuration > Release Configuration Rights.
6. Continue with the following step to remove NEM from the CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Logout from NEM and disconnect NEM PC from CCM PORT1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Turn power OFF at the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Disconnect CCM cables as follows:

• For eCCM-U, go to Step 9
• For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, go to Step 10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 For eCCM-U, if necessary, label the cables, then disconnect cables as follows:
1. GPS cable from GPS-RF connector, if connected.
2. PPS Input cable from GPS connector, if connected.
3. RUC/Fan Tray ALARM cable from ALARM connector.
4. External Sync cable from REF IN/OUT connector, if connected.
5. T1/E1 cable from PCM E1/T1 connector, if connected.
6. TRDU CPRI fiber-optic cables (with SFP transceivers), from eCCM-U ports, OPTIC
1 to OPTIC 6, as required.
Note: The CPRI cables must be re-connected, in the following procedure, to the same
eCCM-U ports they were initially connected to.
7. Remove the termination cover and mounting screws from the eCCM-U PCM E1/T1
connector. When complete, go to Step 11 to remove CCM from 9926 BBU.
Attention: Cover connector ends of the fiber-optic cables with protective caps and
dust covers for SFPs on CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, if necessary, label the cables, then disconnect cables as

follows:
1. TRDU CPRI fiber-optic cables (with SFP transceivers), from eCCM2 ports, OPTIC 1
to OPTIC 9, as required.
PRELIMINARY
eCCM2 ports they were initially connected to.

2. Reference Input cable from REF IN connector, if connected.
3. Reference Output cable from REF OUT connector, if connected.
4. GPS cable from GPS connector, if connected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6. When complete, go to Step 11 to remove CCM from 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Remove CCM from 9926 BBU as follows:

1. Remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the faceplate.
2. Loosen the two mounting screws on the faceplate. Mounting screws should not be
removed from faceplate.
3. Insert the T-Handle extraction tool in the extracting hole in the middle of the
faceplate, rotate handle 90°, and pull the CCM out of the slot.
4. Package the circuit pack in an ESD safe bag or original shipping container and ship to
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 NOTICE
Removing bCEM improperly from the sub-rack can damage it.
Carefully slide bCEM out of sub-rack with both hands without binding it.
Remove bCEM(s) as follows:

1. On far right bCEM, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of
the faceplate.
Skip this step for the other bCEMs.
2. Loosen two mounting screws on the faceplate. Do not remove screws from faceplate.
3. Insert the T-Handle extraction tool in the bCEM extractor hole in the middle of the
circuit pack, rotate handle 90°, and pull out of the slot.
4. Set aside on an ESD protected area or slide into ESD bag.
5. Repeat steps for the remaining bCEMs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.3: Install new CCM using NEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3.3: Install new CCM using NEM

Overview
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement eCCM-U, or
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) in the 9926 BBU using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Install CCM into 9926 BBU as follows:

1. Insert CCM into slot and secure with faceplate screws.
2. Attach EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw to the center of the faceplate.
3. Connect the CCM cables as follows:
Note: If swapping between the eCCM-U and eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, refer to “CCM
connector changes” (p. 4-27) for changes in faceplate connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Important! For eCCM-U, Do not re-connect Backhaul cable(s) to eCCM-U GE

MDA port and the NEM PC to PORT1 until instructed to do so in the following
procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.3: Install new CCM using NEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For eCCM-U, connect the cables as follows:
1. GPS cable to GPS-RF connector, if required.
2. PPS Input cable to GPS connector, if required.
3. RUC/Fan Tray ALARM cable to ALARM connector.
4. External Sync cable to REF IN/OUT connector, if required.
5. TRDU CPRI fiber-optic cables (with SFP transceivers), to eCCM-U ports, OPTIC 1
Note: The CPRI cables must be re-connected as they were on the failed eCCM-U.
6. Attach PCM E1/T1 termination cover and mounting screws to the eCCM-U PCM
E1/T1 connector.
7. When complete, go to Step 5 to turn power on.
Attention: Remove protective covers/caps from fiber-optic cables and SFPs before
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Important! For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, Do not re-connect NEM PC to PORT1

until instructed in the following procedure (connect BH here).
For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, connect the cables as follows:
1. TRDU CPRI fiber-optic cables (with SFP transceivers), to eCCM2/eCCM2-HR ports,
OPTIC 1 to OPTIC 9, as required.
Note: The CPRI cables must be re-connected as they were on the failed CCM.
2. Reference Input cable to REF IN connector, if required.
3. Reference Output cable to REF OUT connector, if required.
4. GPS cable to GPS connector, if required.
6. Backhaul cable(s) to ports BH1 (default) and/or BH3, as required.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Turn power ON at RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

• With power switch, turn power switch ON and PDP circuit breaker ON.
PRELIMINARY
• Without power switch, turn power ON at PDP circuit breaker.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Observe the CCM status LED matrix and CPRI LEDs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.3: Install new CCM using NEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to “eCCM-U LED status” (p. D-1), for the following:
• If the eCCM2/eCCM2-HR status appears to be functional, go to Step 7.
• If the eCCM-U status appears to be functional, go to Step 8.
• If the CCM status does not appear to be functional, check the following:
– Verify power is applied to the RUC/Fan Tray, if not, check power coming into the
PDP.
– If the CCM does not show a positive sign of operation, replace CCM with this
procedure, Procedure 4-3: “Replace CCM using NEM” (p. 4-24) or contact
technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Note: For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR: If replacing a CCM with a spare eCCM2, SAM

Perform the following steps to reset the SAM SNMP password:
1. Log in to the eNodeB as Class 1 user.
2. Execute the command, cd /NETCONF/ncagentd.
3. Execute the command, resetSamSnmpPwd.
4. When completed, log out and go to the next step.
Reference: For additional information, refer to 9400 LTE Radio Access Network
eNodeB Security Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 When completed, continue with the following procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.4: Install bCEM(s) and restore 9412 eNodeB
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3.4: Install bCEM(s) and restore 9412 eNodeB

using NEM
Steps
Perform the following procedure to restore the eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
to an operational state using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Wait for at least 5 minutes before logging in with NEM. This allows time
for the 9926 BBU to accept the replacement CCM.
From eNodeB, Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable.
• Host: 192.168.10.1 (netmask 255.255.255.0, CCM IP address)
Watch for one of the following messages:
• Watch for the following “Connection Error” message and continue as follows:
– If “Connection Error” message is not displayed, continue with the following
step.
– If “Connection Error” message is displayed, NEM connection has failed.
Contact technical support.
– If “Unsupported MIB version #R_LA3#V_0.03.61 detected. NEM will try to
find BASIC MIB.” is displayed, click OK.
Starting SFTP Server ... is displayed. When done. is displayed, continue with the
following step.
• Watch for the “eNB is in factory mode” message and continue as follows:
– Whether the “eNB is in factory mode” message is displayed or not, continue with
the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From eNodeB, using NEM, update or install with the current LTE RAN load that was
PRELIMINARY
installed on the failed CCM on the replacement CCM (factory or spared) for proper
operation.
Note: The replacement CCM must have at least a base load of LR13.1 or later so
NEM can manage it. Loads before LR13.1 will cause the process to fail.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-3.4: Install bCEM(s) and restore 9412 eNodeB
eNodeB using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Appendix E, “Update 9926 BBU software loads” for the software load
installation procedure. As previously mentioned, the software loads should be
downloaded onto the NEM PC before going to the cell site.
From OMC, For eCCM2, at SAM wait for the following to occur before going to the
next step: ReachabilityProblem/ReachabilityTestFailed alarm clears after
SW update and eNodeB resets.
When completed, go to the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE
For bCEM, inserting bCEM improperly from the sub-rack can damage it.
Carefully slide bCEM into sub-rack with both hands without binding it.
Install bCEM(s) as follows:

1. Slide bCEM into the slot and secure with two mounting screws. Verify LED status on
the bCEMs. For LED status, refer to Appendix D, “LED status” for details.
2. On far right bCEM, insert EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw into the center of the
faceplate.
Skip this step for the other bCEM slots.
3. Allow bCEM to stabilize before going to the next step or inserting the next bCEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note: This step restores the full eNodeB database backup file after the CCM has been
replaced. The database includes SNMP data and NETCONF data. This is only done
from a locally connected NEM.
From eNodeB, Perform the following steps to restore the full eNodeB database backup
file to the 9926 BBU as follows:
1. Select Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights.
PRELIMINARY
2. Select Configuration > Full eNodeB DB Restore.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Click on the folder icon to display the directories and files available on the system. If
necessary, filter the files with one of the following Files of Type:
• *_full_DB_backup.sdb: Only the full DB backup files for the currently connected
eNodeB (default).
• All files: All files from the selected directory are displayed.
4. Select the file created during the full DB backup.
5. Click Open.
6. Click OK to restore the selected eNodeB full DB from the code server via file transfer,
or click Cancel to abort the operation.
An eNodeB reset occurs automatically after the full DB restoration to activate the
restored full DB.
7. When completed, go to one of the following steps:
• Step 5, check for downloaded RRH software.
• Step 6, set “ENBEquipment parameters” when upgrading/downgrading CCM.
•
Step 7, unlock eNodeB.
database restored, eNodeB resets, and the end state is NodeDatabaseCorruption.
Then, perform a NE Reconfig to get back to Managed.
Note: If the full database could not be backed up, the eNodeB must be
recommissioned. See Appendix F, “Recommission 9926 BBU” for details. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support for assistance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note: Skip this step if TRDUs are used. Perform this step if the eNodeB is configured
with RRHs.
From eNodeB, check for RRH software on eNodeB as follows:
1. From NEM PC, select the Root View window and click SW Properties tab.
2. Check “Running SW File Descriptor” column for RRH software load.
The RRH software has a filename like: #BI_070E#FT_OMsw#FI_RH2XALB39#FV_
00000006.
3. Continue as follows:
PRELIMINARY
• If correct RRH software is downloaded, go to the next step.

• If RRH software is not downloaded, go to next sub-step.
4. From main menu, Select Configuration > Set Code Server and click Yes on question
message. The Set Code Server is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. In the pop-up menu, navigate to the NEM PC folder containing the software load
currently running on the eNodeB.
6. Once the correct folder is displayed in the File Name field, click Open to complete the
Set Code Server function.
7. If the RRH does not return to the Enabled state, right click the RRH in NEM and
select Reset Equipment. RRH should reboot and download the active software
automatically.
8. Verify the RRH restores to the enabled/unlocked state. If it does not, contact technical
support
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Note: This step is only required when the CCM is being replaced with a different
CCM, for example:
• eCCM-U > eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (upgrade)
• eCCM2/eCCM2-HR > eCCM-U (downgrade)
Important! Configuring the parameters contained in the ENB Equipment properties
can cause a full or partial reset, which is service-affecting.
The following “ENBEquipment parameters” must be set when upgrading/downgrading
the CCM as follows:
• For eCCM-U > eCCM2/eCCM2-HR upgrade, set the following parameters:
– expectedControllerType, Specifies the controller type installed in BBU, in
this case, use eCCM2 to match the installed eCCM2/eCCM2-HR.
– For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, maxNbOfDataBearersPerEnodeB,
maxNbrOfRRCConnectedUsersPerEnb, and maxNumberOfCallPerEnodeB
are set to customer specified values.
• For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR > eCCM-U downgrade, set the following parameters:
this case, use eCCM-U to match the installed eCCM-U
– For eCCM-U, maxNbOfDataBearersPerEnodeB,
From eNodeB, Set the parameters to match the installed CCM by configuring eNodeB
from NEM:
1. Select Root View > eNB Properties tab.
2. Click Edit.
PRELIMINARY
3. Set expectedControllerType field to the correct value, eCCM-U or eCCM2 (for

either eCCM2/eCCM2-HR), to match the installed CCM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. Set maxNbOfDataBearersPerEnodeB, maxNbrOfRRCConnectedUsersPerEnb,
and maxNumberOfCallPerEnodeB to customer specified values, to match the
installed CCM.
5. Click OK. Reconfiguring parameters resets the eNodeB. After the reset stabilizes, go
to the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From eNodeB, use NEM to perform the following steps to unlock the 9412 eNodeB:
1. Select Tree View and click HW Modules tab (left pane).
2. Right-click eNB (right pane) and click Unlock Module in context-sensitive menu.
The NE is unlocked.
3. If necessary, right-click the following elements, in order, and click Unlock Module in
contextual menu to unlock them:
• TMA
• RRH/TRDU
• BB (bCEM)
• CB (eCCM-U/eCCM2/eCCM2-HR)
• RET
• D2U (RUC)
4. Select eNB and check Administrative States column for any elements still locked and
unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From eNodeB, use NEM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412
eNodeB.
Tree View, Section, Alarms . Make a note of any uncleared alarms.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 From eNodeB, close NEM and disconnect NEM PC from CCM as follows:
1. Select Configuration > Release Configuration Rights.
2. Close NEM.
PRELIMINARY
3. Disconnect NEM PC from 9926 BBU.

4. When completed, do one of the following:
• For eCCM-U, go to Step 10 to connect Backhaul cable.
• For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, go to Step 11 to check for alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From eNodeB, for eCCM-U only, reconnect Backhaul cable to 9926 BBU as follows:
1. Notify OMC that service is being restored and prepare to place 9926 BBU back
in-service (unlock network element).
2. Connect Backhaul cable (fiber or wire), to eCCM-U GE MDA port
3. Determine if SAM detects the 9926 BBU as follows:
a. If SAM detects the 9926 BBU, go to the following step to check for alarms at
OMC.
b. If SAM has not detected the 9926 BBU, contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 From OMC, for eCCM2 only, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the
selected 9412 eNodeB (network element).
Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Troubleshooting, and 5620 SAM
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 From OMC, if necessary, continue with one of the following:

• If the network has a Alcatel-Lucent 7750 backhaul network with dynamic routing,
update the new CCM MAC address on the 7750 router as described in Appendix G,
“Change CCM static MAC address in 7750 SR”, then go to next step.
• If the network has another backhaul network, update as required, then go to next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 If the eNodeB was using IPsec with digital certificate and IkeAuth Method was
certificates (prior to card replacement) set the IkeAuth Method to certificates. This
restores the environment as it was prior to the eCCM-U/eCCM2 replacement.
Integration Procedure, 9YZ-04152-0012-USZZA, IP Security feature using
PreShared Keys and using Certificates, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 When operational, secure location (technician leaves site).

PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR in the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB indoor/outdoor BB cabinet
using the OMC SAM client.
Hot-swap FRU
No
swapped.
Intervention time
department.
Replacement duration for the CCM using 5620 SAM is indicated for the following
arrangements:
• From failed eCCM-U to working eCCM-U spare - 45 minutes (actual, 35 min 30 s)
• From failed/working eCCM2 to eCCM-U downgrade/fallback - 45 minutes (actual,
PRELIMINARY
36 min)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The durations are approximate and include MIB backup, shutdown, CCM replacement,
power on, software download, activation, acceptance, and MIB restore.
Safety
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connec- In/Ref-
tor (see Out
table
notes)


(3JR20
120ABAD)
Notes:
unplugged.
Check CCM status

Before you begin

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM
going out to the cell site using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-59).
to replace the CCM.
steps take place, either at OMC or at the cell site (9412 eNodeB (eNB)) using 5620 SAM.
Table 4-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM
Things to do Prepare 5620 Remove CCM and Install CCM using Restore 9412 Restore 9412
before going SAM/9926 BBU for bCEM(s) using 5620 5620 SAM eNodeB with eNodeB with
to cell site CCM replacement SAM aligned software mis-aligned
using 5620 using 5620 SAM using 5620 SAM software using
SAM 5620 SAM
1. OMC/eNB: 1. OMC: View 1. eNB: when 1. eNB: verify power 1. OMC: Perform 1. OMC: download
required alarms raised against technician reaches off at RUC/Fan Tray an NE the required
personnel (2) eNodeB cell site, contact reconfiguration to software image to
OMC to verify restore the eNodeB align eNodeB and
eNodeB is locked, MIM SAM.
open cabinet, and configuration.
indicate ready to
remove CCM.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM (continued)
SAM 5620 SAM
2. OMC/eNB: 2. OMC: Import a 2. eNB: turn power 2. eNB: Install CCM: 2. OMC: if 2. OMC: Monitor
required replacement off at RUC/PDP 1. Insert CCM, necessary, software upgrade
documentation software image into secure with download the status.
5620 SAM screws. required aligned
software image to
2. secure EMI the eNodeB
bracket
3. connect CCM
cables:
a. for
eCCM-U,
go to
Step 3
b. for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to
Step 4
3. OMC/eNB: 3. OMC: Perform an 3. eNB: disconnect 3. eNB: connect 3. eNB: Install 3. eNB: Install
required NEM immediate backup CCM cables: eCCM-U cables. Go bCEM(s) bCEM(s)
software operation on affected 1. for eCCM-U, to Step 5
(backup to eNodeB go to Step 4
SAM
procedure) 2. for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to Step 5
4. OMC/eNB: 4. OMC: Lock 4. eNB: disconnect 4. eNB: connect 4. OMC: Perform 4. OMC: Perform
required eNodeB eCCM-U cables. Go eCCM2/eCCM2-HR immediate restore an NE
eNodeB to Step 6 cables. Go to Step 5. operation on reconfiguration to
software eNodeB to restore restore the eNodeB
SNMP MIB MIM
parameters. configuration.
5. OMC/eNB: 5. OMC: Contact 5. eNB: disconnect 5. eNB: notify OMC 5. OMC: Set 5. OMC: Perform
required MIB on-site technician eCCM2/eCCM2-HR that CCM is installed “ENBEquipment immediate restore
backup file that eNodeB is ready cables. Go to Step 6. and power is being parameters” to operation on
for CCM removal. applied. match installed eNodeB to restore
CCM by SNMP MIB
configuring parameters.
eNodeB from SAM
with either online
PRELIMINARY
or offline
configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM 5620 SAM
6. OMC/eNB: 6. eNB: go to 6. eNB: Remove 6. eNB: turn power on 6. OMC: Unlock 6. OMC: Set
eNodeB MIM Remove CCM using CCM at RUC/PDP eNodeB “ENBEquipment
backup file. 5620 SAM parameters” to
match installed
CCM by
configuring
eNodeB from
SAM with either
online or offline
configuration.
7. OMC/eNB: 7. eNB: Remove 7. eNB: observe CCM 7. OMC: View 7. OMC: Unlock
required bCEM(s) LEDs, remaining alarms eNodeB
eNodeB • if successful go raised against the
VLAN 0 to next step. eNodeB to verify
transport the NE operational
properties • if not successful, state.
reset eNodeB or
contact technical If the eNodeB is
support. operational, the
CCM replacement
is complete. If not,
contact technical
support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM 5620 SAM
8. eNB: 8. eNB: go to Install 8. eNB: Contact the 8. OMC: if 8. OMC: View

required tools CCM using 5620 OMC, check SAM necessary, continue remaining alarms
SAM OAM Link Status with one of the raised against the
field: following: eNodeB to verify
• If OAM Link • If the network the NE operational
Status field has a state.
displays Up, Alcatel- If the eNodeB is
10-15 minutes Lucent 7750 operational, the
after power-up, backhaul CCM replacement
go to next step. network with is complete. If not,
• If OAM Link dynamic contact technical
Status field routing, support.
displays Down, update the
10-15 minutes new CCM
after power-up, MAC address
do one of on the 7750
following: router, then go
to next step.
– restore
OAM • If network has
link at another
cell site backhaul
(NEM). network,
update as
– If OAM required, then
link go to next
cannot step.
be
restored,
contact
technical
support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM 5620 SAM
9. OMC: go to 9. OMC: Update/align 9. OMC: If the 9. OMC: if

Prepare 5620 5620 SAM and eNodeB was using necessary, continue
SAM/9926 eNodeB software and IPsec with digital with one of the
BBU for CCM configuration as certificate and following:
replacement follows: IkeAuth Method • If the network
using 5620 • For aligned was certificates has a
SAM software: if 5620 (prior to card Alcatel-
SAM detects an replacement) set Lucent 7750
aligned software the IkeAuth backhaul
image and Method to network with
SNMP IDs certificates. dynamic
between SAM routing,
and eNodeB, update the
alarm is raised, new CCM
go to Restore MAC address
9412 eNodeB on the 7750
with aligned router, then go
software using to next step.
5620 SAM • If network has
• For mis-aligned another
software: if 5620 backhaul
SAM detects a network,
mis-aligned update as
software image required, then
between the go to next
expected (in step.
SAM) and actual
eNodeB and
SNMP IDs,
alarms are raised:
Go to Restore
9412 eNodeB
with mis-aligned
software using
5620 SAM.
10. eNB: when 10. OMC: If the
operational secure eNodeB was using
location (technician IPsec with digital
leaves site) certificate and
IkeAuth Method
was certificates
PRELIMINARY
(prior to card
replacement) set
the IkeAuth
Method to
certificates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM 5620 SAM
11. eNB: when

operational secure
location
(technician leaves
site)
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR
(CCM) and restore 9412 eNodeB operation using 5620 SAM and an on-site technician.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 4-4.1: “Things to do before going out to the cell site using 5620 SAM”
(p. 4-59)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 4-4.2: “Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement, using 5620
SAM” (p. 4-64)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 4-4.3: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-66)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 4-4.4: “Install new CCM using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-69)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 4-4.5: “Restore CCM with aligned software using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-73)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 4-4.6: “Restore CCM with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-80)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB site using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

using 5620 SAM
Overview
maintained in maintenance records to enable efficient repair of the 9926 BBU using 5620
SAM.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Personnel
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Documentation
Guide
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Before attempting this replacement procedure, read and understand the 5620
SAM operation and maintenance functions described in the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM
LTE RAN User Guide and THIS procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NEM software (for backup)

For field and OMC personnel, check NEM release on the NEM PC and SAM client. If
necessary, check LTE release notes for the current NEM release. If NEM PC NEM
software is not current, download and install new release from either Alcatel-Lucent
ALED or customer software repository. See details in 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network
Element Manager (NEM) User Guide for NEM software installation.
Note: In this procedure, NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM procedure. NEM
software must be current with the eNodeB software, e.g., LR14.1.L, if it becomes
necessary to complete the CCM replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB software
For field and OMC personnel, have current running eNodeB software.
the NEM PC and SAM client, download the current release(s) from either Alcatel-Lucent
ALED or customer internal software repository.
the NEM PC and SAM client.
Note: In this procedure, loading software from NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM
procedure, if it becomes necessary to complete the CCM replacement.

PRELIMINARY
in LR13.3 eNodeB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If IPsec is enabled using digital certificates and the eCCM/eCCM2 does not have a
factory installed certificate, then convert the eNodeB to either a non-IPsec configuration
or PreSharedKeys (PSK) configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 eNodeB SNMP MIB backup file

For field and OMC personnel, check that the SNMP MIB backup file of the affected
eNodeB is present and current on the NEM PC and SAM client.
Whenever possible, it is best practice to create a SNMP MIB backup for the site during
installation and periodic updates to ensure any changes made to the site since the last
scheduled backup is saved. If the backup cannot be retrieved at the eNodeB, check with
the OMC (SAM) personnel for the latest backup from cell site records (collected during
backup files and copy them to the NEM PC and SAM client. If the SNMP MIB is not
available at all, the 9412 eNodeB will need to be recommissioned during installation of
the new CCM (see Appendix F, “Recommission 9926 BBU” for details).
Note: In this procedure, restoring the MIB from NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM
If the eNodeB is operational; an SNMP MIB backup can be created from either OMC or
eNodeB as follows:
• From OMC, perform an immediate backup of the SNMP MIB. Refer to 5620 SAM
LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, NE maintenance, Section, eNodeB backup and
restore, Procedure, To perform an immediate eNodeB backup or restore, for details.
• From eNodeB, backup as follows:
1. Open NEM and login.
2. From the main menu, select Configuration > MIB Backup.
3. Click Yes to accept internal SFTP server.
4. Navigate to the folder where backup file is going to be stored.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CHANGE the automatically named backup file (*.sdb),
after the backup is completed. The filename of a backup file is incorporated in the
file itself and a consistency check is performed before restoring it.
5. Click Download.
PRELIMINARY
6. Click OK when the download is complete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 eNodeB MIM backup file
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For field and OMC personnel, provide a MIM backup of the eNodeB from either the
SAM database or a configuration snapshot (refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide,
Chapter, Offline configuration, Section, Configuration snapshots, Procedure, To take a
configuration snapshot ). The MIM backup is required to restore the eNodeB if the
current active eNodeB MIM data is unavailable.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the MIM from NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

replacement.
tab.
OAM addresses. This has to be done at the local cell site with NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Tools
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ESD Strap
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
procedure. The OMC personnel should be available to complete the replacement
procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM
eNodeB replacement, using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM

replacement, using 5620 SAM
Referenced procedures
Refer to the following chapters in the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide for
details to the referenced procedures:
• Chapter, Troubleshooting
• Chapter, NE maintenance
• Chapter, Online configuration
Lost OAM communication

OAM addresses), e.g., LA3.0 to LR13.3, refer to Procedure F-5: “Set OAM Routing”
(p. F-27), to reset the OAM addresses first. This has to be done at the local cell site
with NEM.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From OMC: View alarms raised against the eNodeB to verify the NE operational state
before the CCM replacement.
Reference: Refer to the following for more details:
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Troubleshooting,
Section, Alarm and fault management
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM User Guide
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC: Import a replacement software image into the 5620 SAM, if required.
Reference: Refer to, Section, NE maintenance preparation, Procedure, To import an
eNodeB software image into the 5620 SAM, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 From OMC: If an eNodeB SNMP MIB backup file was not obtained before going to the
cell site, perform an immediate backup (eNodeB SNMP MIB) operation on the affected
eNodeB, if possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB replacement, using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: A backup operation may not be possible if the eCCM has failed. If the backup fails,
do not perform a restore in Procedure 4-4.6: “Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-80) or Procedure 4-4.5: “Restore CCM with aligned software
using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-73).
Reference: Refer to, Chapter, NE maintenance, Procedure, To perform an immediate
eNodeB backup or restore, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From OMC, use SAM to either lock or Soft Shutdown the 9412 eNodeB as follows:
Lock eNodeB: Lock the eNodeB.
Reference: Refer to, Chapter, Online configuration, Procedure, To lock or unlock an
eNodeB NE (not, Procedure, To lock or unlock an eNodeB object), for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From OMC: Contact on-site technician that eNodeB is ready for CCM removal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the CCM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM

Overview
When upgrading to or downgrading from the eCCM2 does not require bCEM removal.
Steps
(CCM) and the bCEM in the 9926 BBU at the cell site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From eNodeB: when technician reaches cell site, contact OMC to verify the eNodeB is
locked, open cabinet, and indicate ready to remove CCM.
Note: Unless otherwise stated, the following steps are performed at the cell site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• For eCCM-U, go to Step 4.
• For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6. Backhaul cable from eCCM-U GE MDA port.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The CPRI cables must be re-connected in the same order as they were on the
failed CCM.
SFPs with dust caps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

follows:
failed CCM.
6. Backhaul cables from ports BH1 (default) and/or BH3 as required.
SFPs with dust caps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 NOTICE
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM

Overview
• From failed eCCM2/eCCM2-HR to working eCCM2/eCCM2-HR spare
• From failed/working eCCM-U to eCCM2/eCCM2-HR upgrade
• From failed/working eCCM2/eCCM2-HR to eCCM-U downgrade/fallback
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement eCCM-U, eCCM2, or
eCCM2-HR (CCM) in the 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3. Connect the eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For eCCM-U, connect the cables as follows:

PRELIMINARY
5. Backhaul cable to GE MDA port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failed CCM.
E1/T1 connector.
8. When complete, go to Step 5, to notify OMC that CCM is installed.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, connect the cables as follows:

failed CCM.
6. Backhaul cable(s) to ports BH1 (default) and/or BH3 as required.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Notify OMC that CCM is installed and power is being applied.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• With power switch, turn power switch ON and PDP circuit breaker ON.
• Without power switch, turn power ON at PDP circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDP.
procedure, Procedure 4-4: “Replace CCM using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-49), or contact
technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Contact OMC, check the SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link Status
field, and proceed as follows:
• If the OAM Link Status field displays Up, 10-15 minutes after power-up, go to the
following step.
• If the OAM Link Status field displays Down, 10-15 minutes after power-up, do one of
the following:
– Perform Procedure F-5: “Set OAM Routing” (p. F-27) to restore the OAM link at
the cell site (NEM).
– If the OAM link cannot be restored, contact technical support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From OMC: Update/align 5620 SAM and eNodeB software and configuration as
follows:
• For aligned software: if 5620 SAM detects an aligned software image and SNMP
IDs between SAM and eNodeB, the following alarm is raised: NodeDatabaseCor-
ruptionDetected, go to Procedure 4-4.5: “Restore CCM with aligned software
using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-73) to align the configuration and then the SW if it is
required.
• For mis-aligned software: if 5620 SAM detects a mis-aligned software image
between the expected (in SAM) and actual eNodeB and SNMP IDs, the following
alarms are raised:
– NodeSoftwareMisalignmentDetected for factory loads from LA2 to LA6.
– NodeSoftwareMisalignmentDetected and
NodeDatabaseCorruptionDetected starting with LR13.x factory loads.
Go to Procedure 4-4.6: “Restore CCM with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM”
(p. 4-80) to align the software and configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using

5620 SAM
Steps
Perform the following procedure to restore the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR (CCM)
with aligned software to an operational state using 5620 SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Important! If a downgrade from the eCCM2 (new hardware) to the eCCM-U (old
From OMC: Perform an NE reconfiguration to replace the eNodeB MIM with the most
recently synchronized version from the 5620 SAM database as follows:
1. Trigger an NE reconfiguration by right-clicking on an eNodeB in the Equipment tree
or Topology map and choosing Actions > Reconfigure NE from the contextual menu.
A warning dialog box appears.
2. Select the check box in the warning to indicate that you acknowledge the implications
of the action and click on the Yes button. Wait for the reconfigure action to complete.
This may take several minutes.
3. Verify that the NodeDatabaseCorruptionDetected alarm is cleared and the
eNodeB returns to a managed state.
The eNodeB reboots. SAM General tab, Site, State field displays “Managed” after
reboot. SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link Status field displays
“Down” until reboot is completed.
Note: Reconfiguring the eNodeB database configuration replaces the entire eNodeB
MIM, regardless of the existing configuration on the NE. The procedure can trigger a
PRELIMINARY
full or partial eNodeB reset, which is service-affecting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference: Refer to, Chapter, Troubleshooting, Procedure, To reconfigure an eNodeB
database configuration, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC: if necessary, download the required aligned software image to the eNodeB
as follows:
1. Choose Administration > NE Maintenance > Software Upgrade from the 5620 SAM
main menu. The Software Upgrade form opens with the Software Upgrade Policy tab
displayed.
2. Click on the Software Images tab. The form displays additional tabs.
3. Click on the eNodeB Software Images tab.
4. Manually download image from the 5620 SAM to the selected eNodeB as follows:
a. Select an image from the list and click on the Download Image button. The Select
Sites form opens.
b. Choose one or more eNodeBs from the list and click on the OK button. The form
closes and a dialog box appears.
c. Click on the Yes button. The file transfer begins. Activating software resets
eNodeB.
5. Manually activate software image as follows:
a. Click on the Activate Image button. The Select Sites list form opens.
b. Choose one or more eNodeBs from the list and click on the OK button. A dialog
box appears.
c. Click on the Yes button to close the dialog box and activate the software image.
Activating software resets eNodeB.
6. Monitor software upgrade status, as required. The software activation is finished
when the Upgrade State changes to Activate Complete.
Refer to, Chapter, NE maintenance, Section, eNodeB software upgrades, Procedure,
To monitor software upgrade status, to monitor the software upgrade/update.
7. Perform validation testing to verify the functionality and stability of the software
image. See the appropriate Alcatel-Lucent LTE Macro and Metro eNodeB Software
Upgrade Procedure, for more information.
8. Accept the software image to finalize the software upgrade as follows:
a. Click on the Accept Image button. The Select Sites form opens.
b. Choose the eNodeB from the list and click on the OK button to accept the image
and close the form.
PRELIMINARY
9. When completed, go to the following step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Attention: Do not perform a restore operation if the backup operation in Procedure

4-4.3: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-66), could not be
completed.
From OMC: Restore the SNMP MIB configuration on the selected eNodeB as follows:
1. Choose Administration > NE Maintenance > Backup/Restore from the 5620 SAM
main menu. The Backup/Restore form opens with the Backup/Restore Policy tab
displayed.
2. Click on the Backup/Restore Status tab. The managed devices are listed.
Depending on the operation type, the Backup State or Restore State column displays
the current state of the operation. The possible values are:
• Not Attempted - operation is not yet attempted
• Saving Config - device configuration is being saved on the device
• Transferring files - file transfer is in progress
• Success - operation is complete and successful
• Failure - operation is complete but unsuccessful
3. Select an eNodeB from the list and perform one of the following steps, depending on
the operation that you want to perform. Click on the Restore button.
PRELIMINARY
4. Click on the Yes button. The restore operation starts, and the current restore state for
the device is indicated in the Restore State column.
5. Resynchronize an NE with the 5620 SAM database, if required, by clicking on the
Resync button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6. Close the Backup/Restore form.
Note: The eNodeB reboots. SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link
Status field displays “Down” until reboot is completed. The Administrative State of an
eNodeB is set to Locked after a successful restore operation.
recommissioned. See Appendix F, “Recommission 9926 BBU” for details.
Contact Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support for assistance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCM, for example:
form may or may not cause a full or partial reset, which is service-affecting.
as follows:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From OMC: Set the “ENBEquipment parameters” to match the installed CCM by
configuring eNodeB from SAM with either online configuration or offline
configuration as follows:
• For online configuration: Set the parameters by configuring eNodeB as follows:
1. Choose Manage > Equipment > Equipment from the 5620 SAM main menu. The
Manage Equipment list form opens.
2. Choose ENB Equipment (LTE) from the Select Object Type drop-down list.
3. Configure the filter criteria, if required, and click on the Search button. A list of
ENB Equipment objects is displayed.
4. Select the appropriate “ENBEquipment parameters” from the list and click on the
Properties button. The ENB Equipment (Edit) form opens with the General tab
displayed.
5. On the General tab, change the parameter attributes to match the installed CCM.
6. Click on the Apply button in the ENB Equipment (Edit) form and the Network
Element (Edit) form, if required, in order to save the configuration changes.
• For offline configuration: Set the parameter by configuring eNodeB as follows:
1. Use the 9952 WPS to create/change a delta WO file containing “ENBEquipment
parameters” for the eNodeB, and transfer the files to the 5620 SAM, as required.
2. Use the 5620 SAM activation manager function to validate and deploy the WO to
the eNodeB.
3. Use the 5620 SAM configuration snapshot function to export the eNodeB
configuration data in the form of a snapshot file.
4. Automatically or manually transfer the snapshot file to 9952 WPS and 9959 NPO
application servers.
5. Perform file management tasks for the CM XML file and activation log file.
Reference: Refer to the following guides to set the parameters:
• 9952 WPS Version 3.0 User Guide for LTE to create the WO and transfer it to the
5620 SAM.
• 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide:
– For online, Chapter, Online configuration, Section, Workflow to manage online
configuration
– For offline, Chapter, Offline configuration, Section, Workflow to manage offline
PRELIMINARY
configuration, validate and deploy WOs to eNodeBs

• 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Macro and Metro Products Parameters Reference Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If the eNodeB does not reset after more than 15 minutes, a full
resynchronization may be required. Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide,
Chapter, Troubleshooting, Section, eNodeB configuration troubleshooting,
Procedure, To resynchronize an eNodeB database configuration, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From OMC: Unlock eNodeB as follows:

1. Choose Equipment from the navigation tree view selector. The navigation tree
displays the Equipment view.
2. Select one or more eNodeBs in the navigation tree, right-click, and choose Actions >
State Unlock from the contextual menu. A dialog box appears.
3. Click on the Yes button. The unlock request is sent to the NE.
4. Verify the lock and operational status of an eNodeB as follows:
a. Navigate to the ENB Equipment properties view for the eNodeB.
b. Click on the States tab.
c. Verify that the displayed value of the Administrative State parameter is
“Unlocked”.
d. Verify that the Current Operational State parameter displays the expected
transmission status (“Enabled”).
e. Close the ENB Equipment form.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From OMC: View remaining alarms raised against the eNodeB to verify the NE
operational state following the CCM replacement.
If the eNodeB is operational, the CCM replacement is complete. If not, contact technical
support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
restores the environment as it was prior to the eCCM/eCCM2 replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From eNodeB: When operational, secure location (technician leaves site).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
eNodeB using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software using

5620 SAM
Steps
with mis-aligned software to an operational state using 5620 SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From OMC: download the required software image to align eNodeB and SAM as
follows:
displayed.
Sites form opens.
c. Click on the Yes button. The file transfer begins.
Note: If the software image download to an eNodeB that is in a state of software
misalignment, such as immediately following an eCCM board replacement, the 5620
SAM automatically performs the “activate” and “accept” stages of the software
upgrade.
PRELIMINARY
software upgrade on an eNodeB, Steps 1-4, for details.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC: Monitor software upgrade status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-4.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the Upgrade State in the Global Status tab displays “Accept Complete”.
Following the successful software replacement, the 5620 SAM clears the
NodeSoftwareMisalignmentDetected alarm and raises the
NodeDatabaseCorruptionDetected alarm to remind operators to reconfigure the
NE.
Go to the following step.
Reference: Refer to, Chapter, NE maintenance, Procedure, To monitor software
upgrade status, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From OMC: Perform an NE reconfiguration replace the eNodeB MIM with the most
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

completed.
displayed.
Resync button.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB backup or restore
recommissioned. See Appendix F, “Recommission 9926 BBU” for details.
Contact Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support for assistance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCM, for example:
as follows:
PRELIMINARY
displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the eNodeB.
5620 SAM.
configuration
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
“Unlocked”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
restores the environment as it was prior to the eCCM/eCCM2 replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the broadband Channel Element Module
(bCEM), bCEMP1.0 or bCEMP1.1, in an Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
30 minutes
Safety
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Static discharge can damage circuit pack components.
Wear a properly grounded anti-static bracelet before handling circuit packs to prevent
static discharge and damage to the circuit pack components.
Figures
The following figure shows the bCEM faceplate.
Figure 4-8 bCEM faceplate

Extractor
4 LED Status Hole
PRELIMINARY
TEST BBU TEST SW RST TEST ICE

Connector Connector (Reset) Connector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check bCEM status
Refer to “bCEM LED status” (p. D-11), to determine the status of the bCEM using the
status LEDs.
Before you begin

The following information must be available at OMC and at the cell site to replace the
bCEM.
replace the bCEM. The following table illustrates the replacement procedures involved
and where the given step takes place, either at OMC or on-site at 9412 eNodeB (eNB).
Table 4-8 bCEM replacement procedure overview
Remove bCEM Install bCEM

1. eNB: open door and check for failed bCEM LED 1. eNB: insert new bCEM
status
2. OMC/eNB: connect NEM PC/open NEM 2. eNB: observe bCEM LEDs
OMC/eNB: if required reset bCEM
3. OMC/eNB: check and clear alarms 3. eNB: attach EMI bracket (right bCEM slot)
4. OMC/eNB: lock cells 4. eNB: notify OMC
5. OMC/eNB: lock bCEM (BB) 5. OMC/eNB: unlock cells
6. eNB: remove EMI bracket 6. OMC/eNB: check/compare/ resolve alarms
7. eNB: loosen faceplate screws 7. OMC/eNB: close NEM, disconnect NEM PC, and
close door
8. eNB: pull bCEM
9. eNB: pack bCEM
10. eNB: go to Install bCEM
• 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
• 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide
PRELIMINARY
Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required tools
• NEM PC with NEM installed
• ESD Strap
• Blank filler pack for bCEM slot if left unused for more than an hour
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the bCEM and restore 9926 BBU operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 4-5.1: “Remove bCEM” (p. 4-89)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 4-5.2: “Install bCEM” (p. 4-93)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.1: Remove bCEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-5.1: Remove bCEM

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed bCEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If necessary, unlock and open door to cabinet and locate the failed bCEM. Check status
LEDs of each bCEM to determine which one has failed.
Refer to “bCEM LED status” (p. D-11) to determine the status of the bCEM using the
status LEDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note: Use either lock or Soft Shutdown the Cell(s) as follows:

To lock Cell(s):
Lock all Cells from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:
PRELIMINARY
• From OMC, perform the following steps to lock Cells, as required:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.1: Remove bCEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Online configuration, Section,
9400 NEM support, for more details.
2. Click on the plus sign to expand the view to locate the desired eNodeB.
3. Right-click on desired eNodeB and choose Launch NEM from the contextual
menu. The NEM launches and attempts to connect to the eNodeB.
Note: NEM can also be launched from the Network Element form of an eNodeB
by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM is not visible, click on
the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
4. Select Tree View.
5. Select HW Modules. Hardware modules are displayed inside the Details Pane
(right side of window).
6. Under HW Modules, select Cell Configuration.
7. Right-click BB and select Lock Cell. Repeat step for each Cell.
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to lock the Cells, using NEM:
4. Right-click BB and select Lock Cell. Repeat step for all Cells.
Note: If the lock request is sent to the eNodeB and a deployment failure occurs, the
5620 SAM raises a deployment failure alarm and the Administrative State parameter
displays Locking in Progress. The eNodeB transmission status is unaffected by
user action at this time.
To Soft Shutdown Cell(s), refer to Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Lock all bCEMs from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:

• From OMC, perform the following steps to lock all bCEMs:
PRELIMINARY
9400 NEM support for more details.

menu. The 9400 NEM launches and attempts to connect to the eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.1: Remove bCEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: 9400 NEM can also be launched from the Network Element form of an
eNodeB by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM button is not
visible, click on the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
6. Under HW Modules, select BB (CEM) of interest.
7. Right-click BB and select Lock Module. Repeat step for each bCEM as required.
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to lock all bCEMs, using NEM:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 On far right bCEM, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the
faceplate.
Skip this step for the other bCEM circuit packs.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Loosen two mounting screws on the faceplate. Do not remove screws from faceplate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.1: Remove bCEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 NOTICE
For bCEM, removing bCEM improperly from the sub-rack can damage it.
Insert the T-Handle extraction tool in the bCEM extractor hole in the middle of the circuit
pack, rotate handle 90°, and pull out of the slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 NOTICE
Do not leave slot open for more than one hour. Damage to the 9926 BBU circuit packs
will occur due to inadequate cooling airflow.
Insert replacement bCEM or blank filler pack to maintain proper air flow through the
9926 BBU.
When completed, continue with the following procedure to install the new bCEM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.2: Install bCEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-5.2: Install bCEM

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
Slide bCEM into the slot and secure with two mounting screws. Verify LED status on the
CEMs, CCM, and RFMs (TRDU or RRH). For LED status, refer to Appendix D, “LED
status” for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From eNodeB, perform one of the following to check bCEM status:

• Check that the bCEM LEDs show normal operation (Green LED on, Red LED off).
The bCEM should reset automatically when power is applied. Continue with the
following step.
• If at initial power up, the bCEM LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED on) do not change
after 15 minutes and the bCEM does not reset, perform the following steps to
manually reset the bCEM from either OMC or eNodeB:
1. To reset the bCEM at eNodeB, start with Sub-Step 2.
To reset the bCEM at OMC, start with Sub-Step 3.
2. Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable and
factory configured IP address (192.168.10.1, for local NEM access only).
3. Open NEM and select the Tree view.
4. Click HW Modules.
5. Select the BB that is equivalent to the bCEM being replaced.
6. Right click the BB and select Reset Equipment. The bCEM should reboot and
download active software automatically.
7. If the bCEM restores to the enabled state, installation is complete, continue with
the following step.
PRELIMINARY
If the bCEM does not restore to enabled state, repeat steps or replace failed
bCEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.2: Install bCEM
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 On far right bCEM, insert EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw into the center of the
faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Unlock all Cells from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:

• From OMC, perform the following steps to unlock all Cells:
by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM button is not visible,
click on the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-5.2: Install bCEM
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7. Right-click BB and select Unlock Cell. Repeat step for each Cell.
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to unlock all Cells, using NEM:
4. Right-click BB and select Unlock Cell. Repeat step for all Cells.
Note: If the unlock request is sent to the eNodeB and a deployment failure occurs, the
displays Unlocking in Progress. The eNodeB transmission status is unaffected
by user action at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in
eNodeB indoor/outdoor BB cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor

BB cabinet
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack located to the right of
the TRDU shelf in the indoor/outdoor BB cabinet.
The 9926 BBU Sub-Rack provides the following functions:
• Power and control between circuit packs.
• Houses eCCM-U/eCCM2 (CCM)
• Houses bCEM
• Houses RUC/Fan Tray or RUC/HC Fan Tray (RUC/Fan Tray)
Hot-swap FRU
No
Intervention time
duration).
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB indoor/outdoor BB cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety
NOTICE
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 4-6.1: “Shutdown 9412 eNodeB” (p. 4-98)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 4-6.2: “Remove bCEM(s)” (p. 4-100)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 4-6.3: “Remove eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM)” (p. 4-101)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 4-6.4: “Remove RUC/Fan Tray” (p. 4-103)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 4-6.5: “Remove failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack” (p. 4-105)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 4-6.6: “Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack” (p. 4-106)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 4-6.7: “Install RUC/Fan Tray” (p. 4-107)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 4-6.8: “Install bCEM(s)” (p. 4-109)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 4-6.9: “Install eCCM-U or eCCM2 (CCM)” (p. 4-110)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 4-6.10: “Restore 9412 eNodeB operation (sub-rack, indoor/outdoor)”

(p. 4-112)
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.1: Shutdown 9412 eNodeB
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.1: Shutdown 9412 eNodeB

Steps
Perform the following procedure to shutdown the failed 9412 eNodeB in the
indoor/outdoor BB cabinet and replace the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Notify OMC of service interruption and take 9412 eNodeB out of service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.1: Shutdown 9412 eNodeB
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Close NEM and disconnect NEM PC from CCM PORT1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the bCEM(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.2: Remove bCEM(s)
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.2: Remove bCEM(s)

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the bCEM(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On right bCEM, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the
faceplate. Skip this step for the other bCEMs, if installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Package the bCEM in an ESD safe bag or container. If failed, ship to appropriate repair
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.3: Remove eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM)
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.3: Remove eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM)

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disconnect eCCM-U or eCCM2 cables as follows:

• For eCCM2, go to Step 3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connector. When complete, go to Step 4 to remove CCM.
Attention: Cover connector ends of the fiber-optic cables with protective caps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For eCCM2, if necessary, label the cables, then disconnect cables as follows:
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.3: Remove eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM)
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1. If necessary, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the
faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Disconnect the ground wire from the lug between the power terminals.
RUC Ground Lug
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Disconnect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from
eCCM-U).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Cable
(from eAM)
Alarm/
Commissioning
Cable
(from eCCM)
-48 VDC RUC/Fan Tray
Switched
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Press on the locking tab on the RUC/Fan Tray and pull on the pull ring to remove the
RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Package the RUC/Fan Tray in an ESD safe bag or container. If failed, ship to appropriate
repair facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the 9926 BBU
Sub-Rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.5: Remove failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.5: Remove failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove four M5x16 mounting screws with an 8 mm deep socket from the corners of the
sub-rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Slide the sub-rack out of the equipment rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Package the sub-rack in an ESD safe bag or container. If failed, ship to appropriate repair
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install new 9926 BBU
Sub-Rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.6: Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.6: Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Slide sub-rack into cabinet with the RUC/Fan Tray slot at the bottom.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Secure sub-rack with four M5x16 mounting screws with an 8 mm deep socket in the
corners of the rack. Torque to 2.8.N-m (25 in-lb).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install new RUC/Fan Tray.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect the ground wire to the lug between the power terminals with washer and nut.
Torque nut to 1.1 N-m (10 in-lb) with 7 mm deep socket.
Refer to Figure 4-3, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 4-12) for +24/-48 VDC RUC/Fan
Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Connect the power cable to the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Push the cable onto the RUC/Fan Tray terminal lugs, positive-to-positive and
negative-to-negative.
2. Secure cable with the nuts and washers previously removed. Torque nuts to 1.1 N-m
(10 in-lb) with 7 mm deep socket.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
5 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAMi/o) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from CCM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install new bCEM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.8: Install bCEM(s)
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.8: Install bCEM(s)

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
Slide bCEM into the slot and secure with two mounting screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 On the right bCEM, insert EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw into the center of the
faceplate. Skip this step for the other bCEM circuit packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install new CCM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.9: Install eCCM-U or eCCM2 (CCM)
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.9: Install eCCM-U or eCCM2 (CCM)

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3. Connect the eCCM-U or eCCM2 cables as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Important! For eCCM-U, do not re-connect Backhaul cable(s) to eCCM-U GE

procedure.
E1/T1 connector.
Attention: Remove protective covers/caps from fiber-optic cables before connecting
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Important! For eCCM2, do not re-connect NEM PC to PORT1 until instructed

in the following procedure.
PRELIMINARY
For eCCM2, connect the cables as follows:

1. TRDU CPRI fiber-optic cables (with SFP transceivers), to eCCM2 ports, OPTIC 1 to
OPTIC 9, as required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.9: Install eCCM-U or eCCM2 (CCM)
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6. Backhaul cable to ports, BH1 (default), BH2, BH3, and/or BH4.
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When completed, continue with the following procedure to restore 9926 BBU.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.10: Restore 9412 eNodeB operation
eNodeB (sub-rack, indoor/outdoor)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6.10: Restore 9412 eNodeB operation (sub-rack,

indoor/outdoor)
Overview
This procedure assumes the same circuit packs removed from the failed sub-rack are
operational and are being re-installed in the new sub-rack.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to restore the 9412 eNodeB to an operational state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable. Open NEM and
login as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Note: Read Step 3 before continuing with this step.

Turn power ON to the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:
• Without power switch, turn power ON with the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
• With power switch:
1. Turn power ON with the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
2. Turn power ON with power switch (press 1) on the RUC/Fan Tray
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.10: Restore 9412 eNodeB operation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• If the CCM status appears to be functional, continue with the following step.
– Verify power (and voltage) is applied to the RUC/Fan Tray, if not, check power
coming into the RUC/Fan Tray.
– If power is applied, follow the LED status on each circuit pack and if necessary
recycle power to reboot system.
– If the 9926 BBU reboot appears to be progressing as indicated in the LEDs,
continue with the following steps to attempt to complete the restoration and note
the LED status on each circuit pack as the steps are performed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE is unlocked.
• eNB
• D2U
• FAN
• RET and RET Aid Table
• BB (bCEM)
• CB (eCCM-U/eCCM2)
• RRH/TRDU
• TMA
• Sectors
• Cell Configuration
unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
practice.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-6.10: Restore 9412 eNodeB operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1. Close NEM.
• For eCCM2, go to Step 8 to check for alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
a. If SAM detects the 9926 BBU, go to the following step to check for alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From OMC, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412 eNodeB
(network element).
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 When operational, exit NEM and disconnect the NEM PC.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-7: Replace SFP transceivers
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-7: Replace SFP transceivers

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the SFP transceivers on the eCCM.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
5 minutes
Tools required
None
Safety
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 Procedure 4-7: Replace SFP transceivers
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
Up to six SFP transceivers are located in the eCCM-U front panel as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4-9 eCCM-U front panel
Remove SFP transceiver

Perform the following procedure to remove the failed SFP transceiver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Notify OMC of service interruption and take the RRH associated with the failed SFP
transceiver out-of-service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the failed SFP transceiver by noting the status of the LEDs (green LEDs are OFF).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the SFP transceiver.

Attention: Cover optic connector ends of the fiber-optic cables with protective caps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Push in or pull down (depending on SFP type) on the locking handle and pull the SFP
transceiver out of the port.
PRELIMINARY
Attention: Cover optic connector ends of the SFP transceivers with protective cap.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Store or set aside SFP transceiver until needed.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Insert SFP transceiver

Perform the following procedure to install the SFP transceiver in the eCCM-U.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve SFP transceiver. Verify the SFP is correct for the CCM connections (see the
following tables).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the unused SFP transceiver port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Slide the SFP transceiver into the port and pull up on the locking handle.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove protective caps from SFP transceiver and fiber-optic cable and insert the cable
into the SFP transceiver. Verify the status LEDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Have OMC test 9926 BBU and RRH.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CPRI interface SFP optical module provisioning

The following table describes the available CCM CPRI interface Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) optical modules for cabling between the 9926 BBU and the RRH.
Table 4-9 CPRI interface SFP optical modules
SLI Code Description Provisioning Rule

1AB187280063 CPRI SFP transceiver CPRI I-III, 850 nm,
Multi-Mode Dual-Fiber Multi-Mode Dual Fiber (0.3
km)
PRELIMINARY
(MMDF)
Rule: 1*(nb of RRH)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-9 CPRI interface SFP optical modules (continued)

1AB194670018 CPRI SFP transceiver CPRI I-III, 1550 nm,
Single-Mode Single-Fiber Single-Mode Single Fiber, (15
(SMSF) km) – Downlink
Rule: 1*(nb of RRH) on d2U
side (CPRI optical output)
1AB187280065 CPRI SFP transceiver - 1310 nm, 15 km, LC
Single_Mode Dual-Fiber Connector
(SMDF) Rule: 1*(nb of RRH) on d2U
side (CPRI optical output)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU to RRH SFP selection diagram
The following figure depicts the 9926 BBU to RRH SFP selection, based on the fiber
selection.
Figure 4-10 9926 BBU to RRH SFP selection diagram
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backhaul interface SFP optical module provisioning
The following table describes the available CCM backhaul interface Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) optical modules for cabling between the 9926 BBU and backhaul
services.
Table 4-10 Backhaul interface SFP optical modules

3HE00027CA Backhaul SFP – GIGE SX 1-port 1000BASE-SX SFP,
850 nm LC optical module 850 nm, 500 m, LC
Multi-Mode Dual-Fiber Connector
(MMDF) Rule, mutually exclusive with
3HE00028CA
3HE00028CA Backhaul SFP – GIGE LX LC 1-port 1000BASE-LX SFP,
optical module 1310 nm, 10 km, LC
Single-Mode Dual-Fiber Connector
(SMDF) Rule, mutually exclusive with
3HE00027CA
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
C
procedures for
rack-mounted 9926 BBU
Overview
Purpose
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU in a rack-mounted (or standalone) configuration. Given the
modularity of the base stations, repairs are essentially accomplished through replacement
of the faulty component, software upgrades, and/or provisioning.
Contents
9926 BBU replacement procedures 5-2

Procedure 5-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU 5-4
Procedure 5-2: Replace CCM using NEM 5-17
Procedure 5-3: Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM 5-42
Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM 5-77
Procedure 5-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU 5-88
Procedure 5-6: Replace eAM 5-108
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 9926 BBU replacement procedures
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU replacement procedures

BBU configuration.
Table 5-1 9926 BBU component replacement procedures
Replace Procedure
component
Soft Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells” (p. 4-3)
Shutdown
for eNodeB
or Cells
RUC/Fan Procedure 5-1: “Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU” (p. 5-4)
Tray
eCCM-U/ Procedure 5-2: “Replace CCM using NEM” (p. 5-17)
eCCM2 Procedure 5-3: “Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM” (p. 5-42)
bCEM Procedure 5-4: “Replace bCEM” (p. 5-77)
9926 BBU Procedure 5-5: “Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU” (p. 5-88)
Sub-Rack
SFP Procedure 4-7: “Replace SFP transceivers” (p. 4-115)
transceivers
eAM Procedure 5-6: “Replace eAM” (p. 5-108)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 9926 BBU replacement procedures
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Base Band Unit.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU

Purpose
NOTICE
mode).
This procedure describes how to replace the RUC/Fan Tray of a 9926 BBU.
eNodeB. The NE ID is used to identify the 9926 BBU to the network and is used to
(DHCP) server or manually. If the DHCP server is activated, the eNodeB sends a
unique identifier”. This IP address is used by the 9926 BBU for the OAM flow. If the
DHCP server feature is deactivated, a technician must enter the OAM IP address at
commissioning time on the 9926 BBU.
number has been declared as the NE ID for the 9926 BBU. When replacing the
PRELIMINARY
automatically.
Hot-swap FRU
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intervention time
duration).
Safety
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VDC RUC/Fan Tray.

BBU V1 +24 3JR08022AA M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
BBU V2 +24 3JR37517AA M5 8 mm 1.6 N-m
VDC (14 in-lb)
BBU V1 -48 3JR08021AC M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
BBU V2 -48 3JR08021AC M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
Notes:
over-torque them.

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Guide
Technical support
are replacing the RUC/Fan Tray in a 9926 BBU.
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
Replacement process
identify the eNodeB in the EMS. This redundancy allows either device to be replaced
without losing this information and maintaining communications with EMS.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
during the RUC replacement process by the CCM or EMS and cannot be reprogrammed
unlocked and operational. If the RUC is a configured RUC, the EMS receives appropriate

involved and where the given step takes place, either from OMC or on-site at 9926 BBU
(eNB).
Table 5-3 RUC/Fan Tray replacement procedure overview
1. eNB: connect and login to NEM 1. eNB: verify power off

2. OMC/eNB: check and clear alarms 2. eNB: insert new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
3. OMC/eNB: lock 9926 BBU 3. eNB: connect ground wire
4. eNB: turn power off at RUC/CB 4. eNB: connect power cables
5. eNB: disconnect power cables 5. eNB: connect alarm/ commissioning cables

6. eNB: disconnect ground wire 6. eNB: notify OMC
7. eNB: disconnect alarm/ commissioning cables 7. eNB: turn power on (RUC/equipment CB)
8. eNB: pull RUC/Fan Tray out 8. eNB/OMC: observe the following:
• if factory default RUC and EMS recognizes eNodeB, go to
next step.
• if configured RUC and EMS does not recognize eNodeB,
9. eNB: package RUC/Fan Tray 9. OMC: unlock 9926 BBU

10. eNB: go to Install new RUC/Fan Tray 10. eNB/OMC: check/compare/ resolve alarms
11. eNB: logout NEM and disconnect NEM PC
Steps
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 5-1.1: “Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from LTE 9926 BBU” (p. 5-10)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 5-1.2: “Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU” (p. 5-13)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from LTE
BBU 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from LTE 9926

BBU
Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed RUC/Fan Tray from the LTE 9926
BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If possible, check for alarms from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:

• From OMC, use SAM to check and if possible, clear alarms reported on the selected
9926 BBU (network element).
Troubleshooting Guide. Make a note of any uncleared alarms. The alarm status is
• From eNodeB, use NEM to check and if possible, clear alarms reported on the
selected 9926 BBU. From Tree View, click Alarms (the word not +) to check for
alarms in right panel.
Chapter, Tree View, Section, Alarms . Make a note of any uncleared alarms. The alarm
status is checked again after installing the new circuit pack.
PRELIMINARY
practice.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from LTE
PRELIMINARY
BBU 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE is locked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Turn power OFF at the BBU circuit breaker.
• Without a power switch, turn power OFF at the BBU circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refer to for +24 VDC and -48 VDC RUC/Fan Tray power connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Disconnect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the RUC/Fan Tray.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from LTE
BBU 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
BBU in LTE 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray in

LTE 9926 BBU
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the new factory default RUC/Fan Tray in the
LTE 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
locks into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 5-3, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 5-6) and Table 5-2, “RUC/Fan Tray
terminal lug specifications” (p. 5-6) for +24 VDC and -48 VDC RUC/Fan Tray power
connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 WARNING

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
BBU in LTE 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
• Without a power switch, turn power ON at the equipment circuit breaker.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
BBU in LTE 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• If factory default RUC and OMC recognizes eNodeB, go to next step.
• If configured RUC and OMC do not recognize eNodeB, contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

unlocked.
TMA
RRH/TRDU
BB (CEM)
CB (CCM)
RET
D2U (RUC)
PRELIMINARY
and unlock them.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
BBU in LTE 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 When operational, exit NEM, disconnect the NEM PC.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2: Replace CCM using NEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2: Replace CCM using NEM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the eCCM-U, or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR in the LTE
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU using NEM.
Hot-swap FRU
No
swapped.
Intervention time
department.
Replacement duration for the CCM using NEM is indicated for the following
arrangements:
not provided)
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2: Replace CCM using NEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
restore.
Safety
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connec- In/Ref-
tor (see Out
table
notes)


(3JR20
120ABAD)
Notes:
unplugged.
Check CCM status

Before you begin

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacement procedure overview using NEM
going out to the cell site using NEM” (p. 5-24).
to replace the CCM.
step takes place, either at OMC and/or at the cell site (9926 BBU) (eNB)) using NEM.
Table 5-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using NEM
cell site using NEM using NEM 9926 BBU using NEM
1. eNB: required personnel (2) 1. eNB: disconnect backhaul 1. eNB: verify power at 1. eNB: connect and login
cable (SAM) RUC/Fan Tray is OFF NEM to CCM, watch for
“Factory Mode” or
2. OMC/eNB: required 2. eNB: connect NEM PC and 2. eNB: Install CCM: 2. eNB: if required, update and
documentation login to NEM 1. Insert CCM, secure with activate 9926 BBU software
screws. using NEM

Step 3
• for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to Step 4
3. eNB: required NEM 3. eNB: if possible, check and 3. eNB: connect eCCM-U 3. eNB: Install bCEM.
software. Save on NEM PC. clear alarms cables (no BH). Go to Step 5
PRELIMINARY
4. eNB: required eNodeB 4. eNB: if possible, lock 9926 4. eNB: connect 4. eNB: restore full DB.
software. Save on NEM PC. BBU eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables The eNodeB reboots and
(+BH). Go to Step 5 comes up in required load with
valid configuration data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. If eNodeB IP Security 5. eNB: if possible, backup full 5. eNB: turn power on at 5. eNB: Set expectedControl-
enabled, check/update database (DB) using NEM RUC/PDP lerType parameter to either
replacement CCM eCCM-U, eCCM2, or
CCM using NEM
6. eNB: required full DB 6. eNB: close NEM and 6. eNB: observe CCM LEDs, 6. eNB: unlock 9926 BBU
backup available. Save on disconnect NEM PC • If the eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using NEM
NEM PC. functional, go to Step 7.
• If eCCM-U functional, go
to Step 8.
eNodeB or contact
technical support.
– if pre-LR14 load,
go to Install
bCEM(s) and
restore 9926 BBU
using NEM
configures CCM.
7. OMC/eNB: required 7. eNB: turn power off at 7. eNB: reset SAM SNMP 7. eNB: check locked
eNodeB VLAN 0 transport RUC/PDP password. component status, unlock
properties using NEM
8. eNB: required tools 8. eNB: disconnect CCM 8. eNB: 8. eNB: check/compare/
cables: go to Install bCEM(s) and resolve alarms using NEM.
1. eCCM-U, go to Step 9 restore 9926 BBU using NEM
2. eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, go
to Step 10
9. eNB: go to cell site and 9. eNB: disconnect eCCM-U 9. eNB: Close NEM and
Remove CCM and bCEM(s) cables. Go to Step 11 disconnect NEM PC.
When completed, do one of
the following:
cable.
PRELIMINARY
alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10. eNB: disconnect 10. eNB: for eCCM-U,

eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables. reconnect Backhaul cable to
Go to Step 11 9926 BBU as follows:
1. notify OMC
2. Connect Backhaul cable
to 9926 BBU
3. If SAM detects the eNB,
go to Step 11.
4. If SAM cannot detect
eNB, contact technical
support.
11. eNB: Remove CCM 11. OMC: check/compare/

12. eNB: Remove bCEM(s) 12. OMC: if necessary, update
network
13. eNB: go to Install CCM 13. eNB: when operational,
using NEM close door (technician leaves
site)
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the eCCM-U, or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR
(CCM) and restore 9926 BBU and RFM operation using NEM and OMC support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 5-2.1: “Things to do before going out to the cell site using NEM” (p. 5-24)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 5-2.2: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM” (p. 5-29)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 5-2.3: “Install new CCM using NEM” (p. 5-33)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 5-2.4: “Install bCEM(s) and restore 9926 BBU using NEM” (p. 5-36)
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.1: Things to do before going out to the cell
BBU site using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

using NEM
Overview
NEM.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Personnel
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Documentation
Guide
PRELIMINARY

Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.1: Things to do before going out to the cell
PRELIMINARY
BBU site using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide and THIS procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NEM software
For field personnel, check NEM release on the NEM PC. If necessary, check LTE
release notes for the current NEM release. If NEM PC NEM software is not current,
download and install new release from either Alcatel-Lucent ALED or customer software
repository. See details in 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide for NEM software installation. This procedure allows the field technician the
ability to replace the CCM using NEM only, with minimal support from OMC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB software
the NEM PC, download the current release(s) from either Alcatel-Lucent ALED or
customer internal software repository.
PRELIMINARY
the NEM PC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU site using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

in LR13.3 eNodeB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field personnel, check that the full database (DB) backup of the affected eNodeB is
present and current on the NEM PC.
done from a NEM PC connected to the 9926 BBU.
last scheduled backup is saved. If the backup cannot be retrieved at the eNodeB, check
with OMC (SAM) personnel for the latest backup from cell site records (collected during
backup files and copy them to the NEM PC. If the full database (DB) backup is not
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU site using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: One of the following conditions occurs to the database when the software is
installed:
CCM, the database is replaced with an unconfigured database (minimal DB load).
A full DB restore is required that matches the current software load requirements.
database is not replaced. A full DB restore is not required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

replacement.
tab.
OAM addresses. This has to be done at the local cell site using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tools
PRELIMINARY
• ESD Strap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU site using NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
procedure. The OMC personnel should be backup during the replacement procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM

Overview
bCEM.
Steps
(CCM) in the 9926 BBU using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From eNodeB, locate the 9926 BBU, and disconnect the backhaul cable from CCM as
follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
conditions:
From eNodeB, if a full DB backup was not obtained before going to the cell site, perform
full DB backup using NEM as follows:
6. Continue with the following step to remove NEM from the CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Logout from NEM and disconnect NEM PC from CCM PORT1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

follows:
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using NEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 NOTICE

the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.3: Install new CCM using NEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.3: Install new CCM using NEM

Overview
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement eCCM-U or
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) in the 9926 BBU using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.3: Install new CCM using NEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E1/T1 connector.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Important! For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, Do not re-connect NEM PC to PORT1

until instructed in the following procedure (connect BH here).
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• With power switch, turn power switch ON and BBU circuit breaker ON.
PRELIMINARY
• Without power switch, turn power ON at BBU circuit breaker.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.3: Install new CCM using NEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC.
procedure, Procedure 5-2: “Replace CCM using NEM” (p. 5-17) or contact
technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.4: Install bCEM(s) and restore 9926 BBU using
BBU NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.4: Install bCEM(s) and restore 9926 BBU using

NEM
Steps
to an operational state using NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
for the 9926 BBU to accept the replacement CCM.
From eNodeB, Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable.
step.
following step.
the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From eNodeB, using NEM, update or install with the current LTE RAN load that was
PRELIMINARY
operation.
Note: The replacement CCM must have at least a base load of LR13.1 or later so
NEM can manage it. Loads before LR13.1 will cause the process to fail.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-2.4: Install bCEM(s) and restore 9926 BBU using
PRELIMINARY
BBU NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
downloaded onto the NEM PC before going to the cell site.
SW update and eNodeB resets.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
from a locally connected NEM.
From eNodeB, Perform the following steps to restore the full eNodeB database backup
file to the 9926 BBU as follows:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• *_full_DB_backup.sdb: Only the full DB backup files for the currently connected
eNodeB (default).
5. Click Open.
An eNodeB reset occurs automatically after the full DB restoration to activate the
restored full DB.
7. When completed, go to one of the following steps:
• Step 5, check for downloaded RRH software.
• Step 6, set “ENBEquipment parameters” when upgrading/downgrading CCM.
•
Step 7, unlock eNodeB.
database restored, eNodeB resets, and the end state is NodeDatabaseCorruption.
Then, perform a NE Reconfig to get back to Managed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note: Skip this step if TRDUs are used. Perform this step if the eNodeB is configured
with RRHs.
From eNodeB, check for RRH software on eNodeB as follows:
1. From NEM PC, select the Root View window and click SW Properties tab.
2. Check “Running SW File Descriptor” column for RRH software load.
The RRH software has a filename like: #BI_070E#FT_OMsw#FI_RH2XALB39#FV_
00000006.
PRELIMINARY
• If correct RRH software is downloaded, go to the next step.

• If RRH software is not downloaded, go to next sub-step.
4. From main menu, Select Configuration > Set Code Server and click Yes on question
message. The Set Code Server is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7. If the RRH does not return to the Enabled state, right click the RRH in NEM and
select Reset Equipment. RRH should reboot and download the active software
automatically.
8. Verify the RRH restores to the enabled/unlocked state. If it does not, contact technical
support
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCM, for example:
the CCM as follows:
From eNodeB, Set the parameters to match the installed CCM by configuring eNodeB
from NEM:
2. Click Edit.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
installed CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From eNodeB, use NEM to perform the following steps to unlock the 9926 BBU:
The NE is unlocked.
• TMA
• RRH/TRDU
• BB (bCEM)
• RET
• D2U (RUC)
unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From eNodeB, use NEM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9926 BBU.
operational state of the 9926 BBU. Some alarms may not matter. Clear alarms per
local practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Close NEM.
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 From OMC, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9926 BBU
(network element).
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3: Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-3: Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM

Purpose
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU using the OMC SAM client.
Hot-swap FRU
No
Note: The CCM hardware is designed to be hot-swappable. However, in this
configuration it is not recommended. The procedure is written requiring power to be
removed before removing the CCM.
Intervention time
department.
arrangements:
36 min)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3: Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connec- In/Ref-
tor (see Out
table
notes)


(3JR20
120ABAD)
Notes:
unplugged.
Check CCM status

Before you begin

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM
going out to the cell site using 5620 SAM” (p. 5-52).
to replace the CCM.
steps take place, either at OMC or at the cell site (9926 BBU (eNB)) using 5620 SAM.
Table 5-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM
Things to do Prepare 5620 Remove CCM and Install CCM using Restore 9926 BBU Restore 9926 BBU
before going SAM/9926 BBU for bCEM(s) using 5620 5620 SAM with aligned with mis-aligned
to cell site CCM replacement SAM software using software using
using 5620 using 5620 SAM 5620 SAM 5620 SAM
SAM
1. OMC/eNB: 1. OMC: View 1. eNB: when 1. eNB: verify power 1. OMC: Perform 1. OMC: download
personnel (2) eNodeB cell site, contact reconfiguration to software image to
OMC to verify restore the eNodeB align eNodeB and
eNodeB is locked, MIM SAM.
and indicate ready to configuration.
remove CCM.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM
2. OMC/eNB: 2. OMC: Import a 2. eNB: turn power 2. eNB: Install CCM: 2. OMC: if 2. OMC: Monitor
software image to
2. secure EMI the eNodeB
bracket
3. connect CCM
cables:
a. for
eCCM-U,
go to
Step 3
b. for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to
Step 4
3. OMC/eNB: 3. OMC: Perform an 3. eNB: disconnect 3. eNB: connect 3. eNB: Install 3. eNB: Install
required NEM immediate backup CCM cables: eCCM-U cables. Go bCEM(s) bCEM(s)
software operation on affected 1. for eCCM-U, to Step 5
(backup to eNodeB go to Step 4
SAM
procedure) 2. for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to Step 5
4. OMC/eNB: 4. OMC: Lock 4. eNB: disconnect 4. eNB: connect 4. OMC: Perform 4. OMC: Perform
required eNodeB eCCM-U cables. Go eCCM2/eCCM2-HR immediate restore an NE
eNodeB to Step 6 cables. Go to Step 5. operation on reconfiguration to
software eNodeB to restore restore the eNodeB
SNMP MIB MIM
5. OMC/eNB: 5. OMC: Contact 5. eNB: disconnect 5. eNB: notify OMC 5. OMC: Set 5. OMC: Perform
backup file that eNodeB is ready cables. Go to Step 6. and power is being parameters” to operation on
for CCM removal. applied. match installed eNodeB to restore
CCM by SNMP MIB
eNodeB from SAM
with either online
PRELIMINARY
or offline
configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM
6. OMC/eNB: 6. eNB: go to 6. eNB: Remove 6. eNB: turn power on 6. OMC: Unlock 6. OMC: Set
eNodeB MIM Remove CCM and CCM at RUC/PDP eNodeB “ENBEquipment
backup file. bCEM(s) using 5620 parameters” to
SAM match installed
CCM by
configuring
eNodeB from
SAM with either
online or offline
configuration.
7. OMC/eNB: 7. eNB: Remove 7. eNB: observe CCM 7. OMC: View 7. OMC: Unlock
required bCEM(s) LEDs, remaining alarms eNodeB
VLAN 0 to next step. eNodeB to verify
transport the NE operational
properties • if not successful, state.
reset eNodeB or
contact technical If the eNodeB is
CCM replacement
contact technical
support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM
8. eNB: 8. eNB: go to Install 8. eNB: Contact the 8. OMC: if 8. OMC: View

required tools CCM using 5620 OMC, check SAM necessary, continue remaining alarms
SAM OAM Link Status with one of the raised against the
field: following: eNodeB to verify
• If OAM Link • If the network the NE operational
Status field has a state.
displays Up, Alcatel- If the eNodeB is
10-15 minutes Lucent 7750 operational, the
after power-up, backhaul CCM replacement
go to next step. network with is complete. If not,
• If OAM Link dynamic contact technical
Status field routing, support.
displays Down, update the
to next step.
– restore
link at another
cell site backhaul
(NEM). network,
update as
– If OAM required, then
link go to next
cannot step.
be
restored,
contact
technical
support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM
9. OMC: go to 9. OMC: Update/align 9. eNB: when 9. OMC: if

Prepare 5620 5620 SAM and operational secure necessary, continue
SAM/9926 eNodeB software and location (technician with one of the
BBU for CCM configuration as leaves site) following:
replacement follows: • If the network
using 5620 • For aligned has a
SAM software: if 5620 Alcatel-
SAM detects an Lucent 7750
aligned software backhaul
image and network with
SNMP IDs dynamic
between SAM routing,
and eNodeB, update the
alarm is raised, new CCM
go to Restore MAC address
9926 BBU with on the 7750
aligned software router, then go
using 5620 SAM to next step.
• For mis-aligned • If network has
software: if 5620 another
SAM detects a backhaul
mis-aligned network,
software image update as
between the required, then
expected (in go to next
SAM) and actual step.
eNodeB and
SNMP IDs,
alarms are raised:
Go to Restore
9926 BBU with
mis-aligned
software using
5620 SAM.
10. eNB: when
operational secure
location
(technician leaves
site)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Steps
(CCM) and restore 9926 BBU operation using 5620 SAM and an on-site technician.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 5-3.1: “Things to do before going out to the cell site using 5620 SAM”
(p. 5-52)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM” (p. 5-56)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 5-3.3: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM” (p. 5-58)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 5-3.4: “Install new CCM using 5620 SAM” (p. 5-61)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU site using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

using 5620 SAM
Overview
SAM.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Personnel
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Documentation
Guide
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NEM software (for backup)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For field and OMC personnel, check NEM release on the NEM PC and SAM client. If
necessary, check LTE release notes for the current NEM release. If NEM PC NEM
software is not current, download and install new release from either Alcatel-Lucent
ALED or customer software repository. See details in 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network
Element Manager (NEM) User Guide for NEM software installation.
Note: In this procedure, NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM procedure. NEM
software must be current with the eNodeB software, e.g., LR14.1.L, if it becomes
necessary to complete the CCM replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB software
For field and OMC personnel, have current running eNodeB software.
the NEM PC and SAM client, download the current release(s) from either Alcatel-Lucent
ALED or customer internal software repository.
the NEM PC and SAM client.
Note: In this procedure, loading software from NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM

in LR13.3 eNodeB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field and OMC personnel, check that the SNMP MIB backup file of the affected
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB is present and current on the NEM PC and SAM client.

scheduled backup is saved. If the backup cannot be retrieved at the eNodeB, check with
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the OMC (SAM) personnel for the latest backup from cell site records (collected during
backup files and copy them to the NEM PC and SAM client. If the SNMP MIB is not
new CCM.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the MIB from NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM
If the eNodeB is operational; an SNMP MIB backup can be created from either OMC or
eNodeB as follows:
• From OMC, perform an immediate backup of the SNMP MIB. Refer to 5620 SAM
• From eNodeB, backup as follows:
1. Open NEM and login.
5. Click Download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field and OMC personnel, provide a MIM backup of the eNodeB from either the
configuration snapshot ). The MIM backup is required to restore the eNodeB if the
current active eNodeB MIM data is unavailable.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the MIM from NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replacement.
tab.
OAM addresses. This has to be done at the local cell site with NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tools
• ESD Strap
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
procedure. The OMC personnel should be available to complete the replacement
procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM
BBU replacement, using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

replacement, using 5620 SAM

with NEM.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From OMC: View alarms raised against the eNodeB to verify the NE operational state
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC: Import a replacement software image into the 5620 SAM, if required.
Reference: Refer to, Chapter, NE maintenance, Procedure, To import an eNodeB
software image into the 5620 SAM, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 From OMC: If an eNodeB SNMP MIB backup file was not obtained before going to the
eNodeB, if possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM
PRELIMINARY
BBU replacement, using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
do not perform a restore in Procedure 5-3.5: “Restore CCM with aligned software using
5620 SAM” (p. 5-65) or Procedure 5-3.6: “Restore CCM with mis-aligned software using
5620 SAM” (p. 5-71).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From OMC, use SAM to either lock or Soft Shutdown the 9926 BBU as follows:
Lock eNodeB: Lock the eNodeB.
eNodeB NE, (not, Procedure, To lock or unlock an eNodeB object), for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From OMC: Contact on-site technician that eNodeB is ready for CCM removal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM

Overview
Steps
(CCM) and the bCEM in the 9926 BBU at the cell site using 5620 SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From eNodeB: when technician reaches cell site, contact OMC to verify the eNodeB is
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failed CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

follows:
failed CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 NOTICE
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM

Overview
Steps
eCCM2-HR (CCM) in the 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failed CCM.
E1/T1 connector.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

failed CCM.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Notify OMC that CCM is installed and power is being applied.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDP.
procedure, Procedure 5-3: “Replace CCM in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM”
(p. 5-42), or contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Contact OMC, check the SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link Status
following step.
the following:
the cell site (NEM).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From OMC: Update/align 5620 SAM and eNodeB software and configuration as
follows:
IDs between SAM and eNodeB, the following alarm is raised: NodeDatabaseCor-
ruptionDetected, go to Procedure 5-3.5: “Restore CCM with aligned software
using 5620 SAM” (p. 5-65) to align the configuration and then the SW if it is
required.
alarms are raised:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using
PRELIMINARY
BBU 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5620 SAM
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From OMC: Perform an NE reconfiguration to replace the eNodeB MIM with the most
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using
BBU 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC: if necessary, download the required aligned software image to the eNodeB
as follows:
displayed.
Sites form opens.
eNodeB.
b. Choose one or more eNodeBs from the list and click on the OK button. A dialog
box appears.
Activating software resets eNodeB.
b. Choose the eNodeB from the list and click on the OK button to accept the image
and close the form.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

completed.
displayed.
PRELIMINARY
Resync button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCM, for example, eCCM-U > eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (upgrade) or
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR > eCCM-U (downgrade).
as follows:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
displayed.
the eNodeB.
5620 SAM.
configuration
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
“Unlocked”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
PRELIMINARY
BBU using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5620 SAM
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From OMC: download the required software image to align eNodeB and SAM as
follows:
displayed.
Sites form opens.
Note: If the software image download to an eNodeB that is in a state of software
misalignment, such as immediately following an eCCM board replacement, the 5620
SAM automatically performs the “activate” and “accept” stages of the software
upgrade.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC: Monitor software upgrade status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-3.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
BBU using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From OMC: Perform an NE reconfiguration replace the eNodeB MIM with the most
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

completed.
displayed.
Resync button.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
as follows:
displayed.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
BBU using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the eNodeB.
5620 SAM.
configuration
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
“Unlocked”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM

Purpose
(bCEM), bCEMP1.0 or bCEMP1.1, in a in rack-mounted Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
30 minutes
Safety
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
The following figure shows the location of the bCEM in the rack-mounted 9926 BBU.
Figure 5-8 Replace bCEM in rack-mounted 9926 BBU

Extractor
4 LED Status Hole

Check bCEM status

status LEDs.
Before you begin

The following information must be available at OMC and at the cell site to replace the
PRELIMINARY
bCEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and where the given step takes place, either at OMC or on-site at rack-mounted 9926
BBU (eNB).
Table 5-8 bCEM replacement procedure (rack-mounted)

1. eNB: check for failed bCEM LED status 1. eNB: insert new bCEM
2. OMC/eNB: connect NEM PC/open NEM 2. eNB: observe bCEM LEDs.
OMC/eNB: if required reset bCEM
3. OMC/eNB: check and clear alarms 3. eNB: attach EMI bracket (top slot)
4. OMC/eNB: lock cells 4. eNB: notify OMC
5. OMC/eNB: lock bCEM (BB) 5. OMC/eNB: unlock cells
6. eNB: remove EMI bracket 6. OMC/eNB: check/compare/ resolve alarms
7. eNB: loosen faceplate screws 7. OMC/eNB: close NEM/disconnect NEM PC
8. eNB: pull bCEM
9. eNB: pack bCEM
10. eNB: go to Install bCEM
Required tools
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ESD Strap
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the bCEM and restore 9926 BBU operation
(from eNodeB).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.1: Remove bCEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed bCEM from rack-mounted 9926
BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check status LEDs of each bCEM to determine which one has failed.
status LEDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To lock Cell(s):
Lock all Cells from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:
PRELIMINARY
• From OMC, perform the following steps to lock Cells, as required:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.1: Remove bCEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM is not visible, click on
the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to lock the Cells, using NEM:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• From OMC, perform the following steps to lock all bCEMs:
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.1: Remove bCEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: 9400 NEM can also be launched from the Network Element form of an
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to lock all bCEMs, using NEM:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 On top bCEM, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the
faceplate.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.1: Remove bCEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 NOTICE
9926 BBU.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.2: Install bCEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEM in rack-mounted 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
CEMs, CCM, and RRH. For LED status, refer to Appendix D, “LED status” for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From eNodeB, perform one of the following to check bCEM status:

following step.
manually reset the bCEM from either OMC or eNodeB:
1. To reset the bCEM at eNodeB, start with Sub-step 2.
To reset the bCEM at OMC, start with Sub-step 3.
2. Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable and
factory configured IP address (192.168.10.1, for local NEM access only).
the following step.
PRELIMINARY
bCEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 On top slot bCEM, insert EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw into the center of the
faceplate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.2: Install bCEM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Unlock all Cells from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:

• From OMC, perform the following steps to unlock all Cells:
by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM button is not visible,
click on the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-4.2: Install bCEM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to unlock all Cells, using NEM:
Note: If the unlock request is sent to the eNodeB and a deployment failure occurs, the
displays Unlocking in Progress. The eNodeB transmission status is unaffected
by user action at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 When operational, exit NEM, and disconnect NEM PC from BBU or close NEM at
OMC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in a LTE 9926 BBU.
• Houses eCCM-U/eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
• Houses bCEM
• Houses RUC/Fan Tray or RUC/HC Fan Tray (RUC/Fan Tray)
Hot-swap FRU
No
Intervention time
duration).
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
Safety
PRELIMINARY
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
The following figure shows the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU for an equipment rack
installation.
Figure 5-10 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 5-5.1: “Shutdown LTE 9926 BBU” (p. 5-91)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 5-5.3: “Remove CCM” (p. 5-94)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 5-5.6: “Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack” (p. 5-99)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 5-5.8: “Install bCEM(s)” (p. 5-102)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 5-5.9: “Install CCM” (p. 5-103)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 5-5.10: “Restore LTE 9926 BBU operation (sub-rack)” (p. 5-105)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.1: Shutdown LTE 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5.1: Shutdown LTE 9926 BBU

Steps
Perform the following procedure to shutdown the failed LTE 9926 BBU and replace the
9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Notify OMC of service interruption and take 9926 BBU out of service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.1: Shutdown LTE 9926 BBU
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Close NEM and disconnect NEM PC from CCM PORT1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the bCEM(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.2: Remove bCEM(s)
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the bCEM(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
faceplate. Skip this step for the other bCEMs, if installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Package the bCEM in an ESD safe bag or container. If failed, ship to appropriate repair
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.3: Remove CCM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5.3: Remove CCM

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR
(CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disconnect eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connector. When complete, go to Step 4 to remove CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.3: Remove CCM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1. If necessary, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the
faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC Ground Lug
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eCCM-U).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Cable
(from eAM)
Alarm/
Commissioning
Cable
(from eCCM)
Switched
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
repair facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sub-Rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.5: Remove failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
sub-rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sub-Rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.6: Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5.6: Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement 9926 BBU Sub-Rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Slide sub-rack into cabinet with the RUC/Fan Tray slot on the right side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install RUC/Fan Tray.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the following circuit breaker and/or switch are set in the OFF position:
• RUC/Fan Tray Power switch (press O), if switch is provided.
• Equipment circuit breaker in OFF position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC Ground Lug
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

Power Connections
(from PDP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from CCM).
Alarm Cable
(from eAM)
Alarm/
Commissioning
Cable
(from eCCM)
Switched
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install bCEM(s).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.8: Install bCEM(s)
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5.8: Install bCEM(s)

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEM(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 On the top bCEM, insert EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw into the center of the
faceplate. Skip this step for the other bCEMs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install the CCM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.9: Install CCM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5.9: Install CCM

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR (CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Important! For eCCM-U, do not re-connect Backhaul cable(s) to eCCM-U GE

procedure.
Note: The CPRI cables must be re-connected in the order they were on the failed
CCM.
E1/T1 connector.
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Important! For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, do not re-connect NEM PC to PORT1 until

PRELIMINARY
instructed in the following procedure.

OPTIC 9, as required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.9: Install CCM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The CPRI cables must be re-connected in the order they were on the failed
CCM.
6. Backhaul cable to ports, BH1 (default) and BH3, as required.
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.10: Restore LTE 9926 BBU operation
PRELIMINARY
BBU (sub-rack)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-5.10: Restore LTE 9926 BBU operation (sub-rack)

Overview
This procedure assumes the same circuit packs removed from the failed sub-rack are
operational and are being re-installed in the new sub-rack.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to restore the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU to an
operational state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable. Open NEM and
login as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1. Turn power ON with the BBU circuit breaker.
• Without power switch, turn power ON with the BBU circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.10: Restore LTE 9926 BBU operation
BBU (sub-rack)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• If the CCM status appears to be functional, continue with the following step.
coming into the RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE is unlocked.
• eNB
• D2U
• FAN
• BB (bCEM)
• RRH/TRDU
• TMA
• Sectors
unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
practice.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-5.10: Restore LTE 9926 BBU operation
PRELIMINARY
BBU (sub-rack)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1. Close NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
a. If SAM detects the 9926 BBU, go to the following step to check for alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From OMC, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412 eNodeB
(network element).
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 When operational, exit NEM and disconnect the NEM PC.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-6: Replace eAM
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-6: Replace eAM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the enhanced Alarm Module (eAM) located
under the rack-mounted Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
The eAM module provides the following functions:
• Provides 8 connections (EXT ALMS 1-32, 4 alarms per connection) to monitor up to
32 external user alarms. Default logic for an alarm state is an open, logic 1 (software
selectable).
• Provides a connection (FRAME ALARMS) for 6 frame alarms with a potential for 4
more alarms. Default logic for an alarm state is an open, logic 1 (software selectable).
• Provides a connection (PWR ALM) for 4 power alarms or general purpose alarms. A
logic 0, closed loop condition, normally indicates an “alarm” state for “power”
alarms.
• Provides a connection (CTRL) for 1-wire data, power (5 VDC), 12C clock, and 12C
data lines.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
30 minutes
Tools required
Phillips screwdriver
Torque wrench
Safety
NOTICE
Notify SAM in case of service interruption or reduction.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-6: Replace eAM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
Figure 5-11 Replace eAM
bCEM 9926 BBU

eCCM-U/ RUC/Fan Tray
eCCM2
2
Frame 1-Wire/I C Power 32 User Alarms Ground
M5 or M6 Phillips
Alarms (RJ-45) Alarm (RJ-45 x 8) Stud (M4)
or Torx Screws and
(DB25) To BBU RUC (RJ-45) To Site Wiring To Site Ground
Lock Washers (2x)
To 9412 To Power Panel/NIU
Supply
enhanced Alarm Module (eAM)
Remove eAM
Note: Be prepared to remove the Alarm cables before removing the eAM.
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed eAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Notify SAM of service interruption and take 9926 BBU out of service, if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Disconnect faceplate alarm cables from the eAM as follows:

1. Equipment side alarms:
• Frame Alarm Cable (DP25), FRAME ALARMS.
• 1-Wire/I2C Alarm cable (RJ-45), ALM.
2. Network side alarms:
• Integrated Power Alarm Cable (RJ-45), PWR ALM.
• 8 User Alarm Cables (32 alarms) (RJ-45), EXT ALM 1-32.
PRELIMINARY
• Ground cable (M4 lug), GND
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove two mounting screws, one on each end of the faceplate, and slide eAM out of
equipment rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install replacement eAM by continuing with the following procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Install eAM
Perform the following procedure to install the eAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Slide eAM into the equipment rack (see previous figure). Tighten the mounting screws at
each end of the faceplate. Torque each screw to 2.8.N-m (25 in-lb).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect faceplate alarm cables to the eAM as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Notify OMC that service is being restored and prepare to place 9926 BBU back in
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note status LED (STAT) on faceplate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Have OMC test 9926 BBU. Installation is complete when testing has passed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 Procedure 5-6: Replace eAM
PRELIMINARY
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
C
procedures for 9926 BBU
in MBI cabinet
Overview
Purpose
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU in a MBI cabinet. Given the modularity of the base stations,
repairs are essentially accomplished through replacement of the faulty component,
software upgrades, and/or provisioning.
Contents
9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures 6-2

Procedure 6-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet 6-4
Procedure 6-2: Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet 6-17
Procedure 6-3: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet 6-43
Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet 6-78
Procedure 6-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet 6-90
Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM 6-111
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures

BBU in the MBI cabinet.
Table 6-1 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures
Replace Procedure
component
Soft Shutdown Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells” (p. 4-3)
for eNodeB or
Cells
RUC/Fan Tray Procedure 6-1: “Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-4)
eCCM-U/ Procedure 6-2: “Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-17)
eCCM2/ Procedure 6-3: “Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-43)
eCCM2-HR
bCEM Procedure 6-4: “Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-78)
9926 BBU Procedure 6-5: “Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-90)
Sub-Rack
SFP Procedure 4-7: “Replace SFP transceivers” (p. 4-115)
transceivers
eAM Procedure 5-6: “Replace eAM” (p. 5-108)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Base Band Unit.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet

Purpose
NOTICE
mode).
This procedure describes how to replace the RUC/Fan Tray in a Alcatel-Lucent 9926
BBU, installed in an MBI cabinet.
9926 BBU. The NE ID is used to identify the 9926 BBU to the network and is used to
(DHCP) server or manually. If the DHCP server is activated, the 9926 BBU sends a
unique identifier”. This IP address is used by the 9926 BBU for the OAM flow. If the
DHCP server feature is deactivated, a technician must enter the OAM IP address at
commissioning time on the 9926 BBU.
number has been declared as the NE ID for the 9926 BBU. When replacing the
PRELIMINARY
automatically.
Hot-swap FRU
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intervention time
duration).
Safety
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Figures
The following figure shows the location of the RUC/Fan Tray in the MBI cabinet.
Figure 6-2 Replace RUC/Fan Tray module in MBI cabinet
bCEM 9412 BBU

eCCM2

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VDC RUC/Fan Tray.

PRELIMINARY

BBU V1 +24 3JR08022AA M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-2 RUC/Fan Tray terminal lug specifications (continued)

BBU V2 +24 3JR37517AA M5 8 mm 1.6 N-m
VDC (14 in-lb)
BBU V1 -48 3JR08021AC M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
BBU V2 -48 3JR08021AC M4 7 mm 1.1 N-m
VDC (10 in-lb)
Notes:
over-torque them.

Guide
Technical support
are replacing the RUC/Fan Tray in a 9926 BBU.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
Replacement process
identify the eNodeB in the SAM. This redundancy allows either device to be replaced
without losing this information and maintaining communications with SAM.
during the RUC replacement process by the CCM or SAM and cannot be reprogrammed
unlocked and operational. If the RUC is a configured RUC, the SAM receives appropriate

This procedure requires a coordinated effort between SAM and the on-site technician to
involved and where the given step takes place, either from SAM or on-site at MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
(MBI).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-3 RUC/Fan Tray replacement procedure overview (MBI)
1. MBI: open door, connect and login to eNodeB-NEM 1. MBI: verify power off
2. SAM/MBI: check and clear alarms 2. MBI: insert new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
3. SAM/MBI: lock 9926 BBU 3. MBI: connect ground wire
4. MBI: turn power off at RUC/PDP 4. MBI: connect power cables

5. MBI: disconnect power cables 5. MBI: connect alarm/ commissioning cables
6. MBI: disconnect ground wire 6. MBI: notify SAM

7. MBI: disconnect alarm/ commissioning cables 7. MBI: turn power on (RUC/PDP/ equipment CB)
8. MBI: pull RUC/Fan Tray out 8. MBI/SAM: observe the following:

• if factory default RUC and SAM recognizes eNodeB, go to
next step.
• if configured RUC and SAM does not recognize eNodeB,
9. MBI: package RUC/Fan Tray 9. SAM: unlock 9926 BBU
10. MBI: go to Install new RUC/Fan Tray 10. MBI/SAM: check/compare/ resolve alarms
11. MBI: logout eNodeB-NEM and disconnect eNodeB-NEM,
close door
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 6-1.1: “Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from MBI cabinet” (p. 6-10)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 6-1.2: “Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-13)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from MBI

cabinet
Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed RUC/Fan Tray from the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From MBI, connect the eNodeB-NEM PC to the eCCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test
Cable. Open eNodeB-NEM and login as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If possible, check for alarms from either SAM or MBI as follows:

• From SAM, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9926 BBU
(network element).
Troubleshooting Guide. Make a note of any uncleared alarms. The alarm status will be
• From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected
9926 BBU. From Tree View, click Alarms (the word not +) to check for alarms in
right panel.
Chapter, Tree View, Section, Alarms . Make a note of any uncleared alarms. The alarm
status will be checked again after installing the new circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Note: Use either lock or Soft Shutdown the MBI as follows:

To lock eNodeB:
If possible, lock network element (eNodeB) from either SAM or eNodeB-NEM as
follows:
• From SAM, perform the following steps to lock the 9926 BBU:
PRELIMINARY

Refer 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, eNodeB online configuration,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to perform the following steps to lock the 9926 BBU:
The NE is locked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn power OFF to the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Turn power OFF with power switch (press O).
2. Turn power OFF at equipment circuit breaker.
• Without power switch, turn power OFF at equipment circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 6-4, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 6-6) for ground connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Disconnect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
the RUC/Fan Tray.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.1: Remove failed RUC/Fan Tray from MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
cabinet in MBI cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray in

MBI cabinet
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement RUC/Fan Tray in the 9926
BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify power is turned OFF at the RUC/Fan Tray power cables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
locks into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
terminal lug specifications” (p. 6-6) for RUC/Fan Tray ground connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 WARNING

1. Push the cable onto the RUC/Fan Tray terminal lug, positive-to-positive (+) and
PRELIMINARY

connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from eCCM-U).
Refer to Figure 6-4, “RUC/Fan Tray connections” (p. 6-6) for RUC/Fan Tray alarm
connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Notify SAM that service is being restored and prepare to place 9926 BBU back in-service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Turn power ON to the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Turn power ON with the equipment circuit breaker.
• Without power switch, turn power ON with the equipment circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• If factory default RUC and SAM recognizes eNodeB, go to next step.
• If configured RUC and SAM do not recognize eNodeB, contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unlock network element (eNodeB) from either SAM or eNodeB-NEM as follows:
• From SAM, perform the following steps to unlock the 9412 eNodeB:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to perform the following steps to unlock the 9412
eNodeB:
unlocked.
TMA
RRH/TRDU
BB (bCEM)
CB (CCM)
RET
D2U (RUC)
and unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check for alarms and clear per local practice as follows:

• From SAM, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412
9412 eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
practice.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-1.2: Install new factory default RUC/Fan Tray
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 When operational, exit eNodeB-NEM, disconnect the eNodeB-NEM PC at eNodeB, or

close eNodeB-NEM at SAM, and close and lock door to cabinet.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2: Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-2: Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI

cabinet
Purpose
LTE Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI (eNodeB) cabinet.
Hot-swap FRU
No
swapped.
Intervention time
updates for the MBI (eNodeB) and eNodeB-NEM, MIB and MIM database files, and
Customer Information Sheet (CIS), Customer Information Questionnaire (CIQ), or
equivalent transport, and commissioning data from customer network design and
engineering department.
Replacement duration for the CCM using eNodeB-NEM is indicated for the following
arrangements:
PRELIMINARY
not provided)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2: Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
restore.
Safety
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connec- In/Ref-
tor (see Out
table
notes)


(3JR20
120ABAD)
Notes:
unplugged.
Check CCM status

Before you begin

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacement procedure overview using eNodeB-NEM
going out to the cell site using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-25).
This procedure requires a coordinated effort between SAM and the on-site field personnel
to replace the CCM.
step takes place, either at SAM and/or at the cell site (9926 BBU) (MBI)) using
eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet.
Table 6-5 CCM replacement procedure overview using eNodeB-NEM
Things to do before going Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using Install CCM using eNodeB-NEM Install bCEM(s) and restore
to cell site using eNodeB-NEM 9926 BBU using eNodeB-NEM
eNodeB-NEM
1. MBI: required 1. MBI: open door, disconnect 1. MBI: verify power off at 1. MBI: connect and login
personnel (2) backhaul cable (SAM) RUC/Fan Tray eNodeB-NEM to CCM, watch
for “Factory Mode” or
2. SAM/MBI: required 2. MBI: connect eNodeB-NEM 2. MBI: Install CCM: 2. MBI: if required, update and
documentation PC and login to eNodeB-NEM 1. Insert CCM, secure with activate 9926 BBU software
screws. using eNodeB-NEM

Step 3
• for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to Step 4
PRELIMINARY
3. MBI: required 3. MBI: if possible, check and 3. MBI: connect eCCM-U cables 3. MBI: Install bCEM.
eNodeB-NEM software. clear alarms (no BH). Go to Step 5
Save on eNodeB-NEM
PC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
eNodeB-NEM
4. MBI: required eNodeB 4. MBI: if possible, lock 9926 4. MBI: connect 4. MBI: restore full DB.
software. Save on BBU eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables The eNodeB reboots and comes
eNodeB-NEM PC. (+BH). Go to Step 5 up in required load with valid
configuration data.
5. MBI: required full DB 5. MBI: if possible, backup full 5. MBI: turn power on at 5. MBI: Set expectedController-
backup available. Save on database (DB) using RUC/PDP Type parameter to either
eNodeB-NEM PC. eNodeB-NEM eCCM-U, eCCM2, or
CCM using eNodeB-NEM
6. SAM/MBI: required 6. MBI: close eNodeB-NEM 6. MBI: observe CCM LEDs, 6. MBI: unlock 9412 eNodeB
eNodeB VLAN 0 and disconnect eNodeB-NEM • If the eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using eNodeB-NEM
transport properties PC functional, go to Step 7.
• If eCCM-U functional, go to
Step 8.
eNodeB or contact technical
support.
– if pre-LR14 load, go
to Install bCEM(s)
and restore 9926
BBU using
eNodeB-NEM
configures CCM.
7. MBI: required tools 7. MBI: turn power off at 7. MBI: reset SAM SNMP 7. MBI: check locked
RUC/PDP password. component status, unlock using
eNodeB-NEM
8. MBI: go to cell site and 8. MBI: disconnect CCM 8. eNB: 8. MBI: check/compare/ resolve
Remove CCM using cables: go to Install bCEM(s) and restore alarms using eNodeB-NEM.
eNodeB-NEM 1. eCCM-U, go to Step 9 9926 BBU using eNodeB-NEM
2. eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, go to
Step 10
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
eNodeB-NEM
9. MBI: disconnect eCCM-U 9. MBI: Close eNodeB-NEM

cables. Go to Step 11 and disconnect eNodeB-NEM
PC.
When completed, do one of the
following:
cable.
alarms
10. MBI: disconnect 10. MBI: for eCCM-U,
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR cables. Go reconnect Backhaul cable to
to Step 11 9926 BBU as follows:
1. notify SAM
2. Connect Backhaul cable to
9926 BBU
3. If SAM detects the MBI,
go to Step 11.
4. If SAM cannot detect MBI,
11. MBI: Remove CCM 11. SAM: check/compare/
12. MBI: Remove bCEM(s) 12. SAM: if necessary, update
network
13. MBI: go to Install CCM 13. MBI: when operational,

using eNodeB-NEM close door (technician leaves
site)
Steps
(CCM) and restore 9926 BBU and RFM operation using eNodeB-NEM and SAM
support.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 6-2.1: “Things to do before going out to the cell site using eNodeB-NEM, in
MBI cabinet” (p. 6-25)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 6-2.2: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using eNodeB-NEM, from MBI cabinet”
(p. 6-30)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 6-2.3: “Install new CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-34)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 6-2.4: “Restore CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-37)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.1: Things to do before going out to the cell
PRELIMINARY
cabinet site using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet
Overview
the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR (CCM). SAM should have this information
eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Personnel
The procedure requires field and SAM personnel. The field personnel (technician) goes
out to the cell site to perform the CCM replacement. The SAM personnel provides
operational support for the field personnel during the procedure. The field and SAM
personnel should review the replacement procedure together and the role of each person.
The personnel must have direct contact with one another during the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Documentation
Guide
• For SAM personnel, must have a copy of the following documents:
PRELIMINARY

Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.1: Things to do before going out to the cell
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Before attempting this replacement procedure, read and understand the
eNodeB-NEM operation and maintenance functions described in the 9400 LTE RAN
eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide and THIS procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 eNodeB-NEM software
For field personnel, check eNodeB-NEM release on the eNodeB-NEM PC. If necessary,
check LTE release notes for the current eNodeB-NEM release. If eNodeB-NEM PC
eNodeB-NEM software is not current, download and install new release from either
Alcatel-Lucent ALED or customer software repository. See details in 9400 LTE RAN
eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide for eNodeB-NEM software
installation. This procedure allows the field technician the ability to replace the CCM
with eNodeB-NEM only, with minimal support from SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB software
the eNodeB-NEM PC, download the current release(s) from either Alcatel-Lucent ALED
or customer internal software repository.
PRELIMINARY
the eNodeB-NEM PC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

in LR13.3 eNodeB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field personnel, check that the full database (DB) backup of the affected MBI is
present and current on the eNodeB-NEM PC.
done from a eNodeB-NEM PC connected to the 9926 BBU.
last scheduled backup is saved. If the backup cannot be retrieved at the MBI, check with
SAM personnel for the latest backup from cell site records (collected during initial
installation). If necessary, consult the SAM administrator for the location of the backup
files and copy them to the eNodeB-NEM PC. If the full database (DB) backup is not
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: One of the following conditions occurs to the DB when the software is
installed:
CCM, the DB is replaced with an unconfigured DB (minimal DB load). A full DB
restore is required that matches the current software load requirements.
DB is not replaced. A full DB restore is not required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field and SAM personnel, provide the eNodeB VLAN 0 transport properties from
MBI during the replacement procedure.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the VLAN 0 transport properties from
eNodeB-NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM procedure, if it becomes necessary to
complete the CCM replacement.
From MBI, if operational, copy the VLAN 0 Transport Properties as follows:
1. From eNodeB-NEM, select
Root View > Vlan 0 Properties > VLAN 0 Transport Properties tab.
OAM addresses. This has to be done at the local cell site with eNodeB-NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tools
PRELIMINARY
• ESD Strap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
procedure. The SAM personnel should be backup during the replacement procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using
cabinet eNodeB-NEM, from MBI cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using

eNodeB-NEM, from MBI cabinet
Overview
bCEM.
Steps
(CCM) in the 9926 BBU using eNodeB-NEM, from MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From MBI, open cabinet, locate the 9926 BBU, and disconnect the backhaul cable from
CCM as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to either lock or Soft Shutdown the eNodeB as follows:
The NE is locked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
conditions:
From MBI, if a full DB backup was not obtained before going to the cell site, perform
full DB backup using eNodeB-NEM as follows:
6. Continue with the following step to remove eNodeB-NEM from the CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Logout from eNodeB-NEM and disconnect eNodeB-NEM PC from CCM PORT1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

follows:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.2: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 NOTICE

the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.3: Install new CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-2.3: Install new CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI

cabinet
Overview
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement eCCM-U, or
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) in the 9926 BBU using eNodeB-NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

MDA port and the eNodeB-NEM PC to PORT1 until instructed to do so in the
following procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.3: Install new CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E1/T1 connector.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Important! For eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, Do not re-connect eNodeB-NEM PC to

PORT1 until instructed in the following procedure (connect BH here).
6. Backhaul cable(s) to ports BH1 (default) and/or BH3, as required.
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.3: Install new CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDP.
procedure, Procedure 6-2: “Replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet”
(p. 6-17) or contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.4: Restore CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-2.4: Restore CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI

cabinet
Steps
to an operational state using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Before connecting the eNodeB-NEM PC to the CCM, disable/close all firewalls
(see 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide).
for the eNodeB to accept the replacement CCM.
step.
following step.
the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From MBI, using eNodeB-NEM, update or install with the current LTE RAN load
PRELIMINARY
operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-2.4: Restore CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
downloaded onto the eNodeB-NEM PC before going to the cell site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
from a locally connected eNodeB-NEM.
From MBI, Perform the following steps to restore the full eNodeB database backup file
to the 9926 BBU as follows:
PRELIMINARY
•
*_full_DB_backup.sdb: Only the full DB backup files for the currently connected
MBI (eNodeB) (default).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. Click Open.
An MBI (eNodeB) reset occurs automatically after the full DB restoration to activate
the restored full DB.
7. When completed, go to next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCM, for example:
as follows:
From MBI, Set the parameters to match the installed CCM by configuring eNodeB from
eNodeB-NEM:
PRELIMINARY
2. Click Edit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
installed CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to perform the following steps to unlock the MBI
(eNodeB):
The NE is unlocked.
• TMA
• RRH/TRDU
• BB (bCEM)
• RET
• D2U (RUC)
4. Select MBI and check Administrative States column for any elements still locked and
unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9926
BBU.
operational state of the 9926 BBU. Some alarms may not matter. Clear alarms per
local practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From MBI, close eNodeB-NEM and disconnect eNodeB-NEM PC from CCM as

follows:
PRELIMINARY
2. Close eNodeB-NEM.
3. Disconnect eNodeB-NEM PC from 9926 BBU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 From MBI, for eCCM-U only, reconnect Backhaul cable to 9926 BBU as follows:
1. Notify SAM that service is being restored and prepare to place 9926 BBU back
SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From SAM, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9926 BBU
(network element).
operational state of the MBI. Some alarms may not matter. Clear alarms per local
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 From SAM, if necessary, continue with one of the following:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-3: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet

Purpose
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU (eNodeB (MBI)) using SAM, in MBI cabinet.
Hot-swap FRU
No
Note: The CCM hardware is designed to be hot-swappable. However, in this
configuration it is not recommended. The procedure is written requiring power to be
removed before removing the CCM.
Intervention time
updates for the 9926 BBU and eNodeB-NEM, MIB and MIM database files, and
Customer Information Sheet (CIS), Customer Information Questionnaire (CIQ), or
equivalent transport, and commissioning data from customer network design and
engineering department.
arrangements:
36 min)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety
CAUTION
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
connec- In/Ref-
tor (see Out
table
notes)


(3JR20
120ABAD)
Notes:
unplugged.
Check CCM status

Before you begin

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
going out to the cell site using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-53).
This procedure requires a coordinated effort between SAM and the on-site field personnel
to replace the CCM.
steps take place, either at SAM and/or at the cell site (9926 BBU (MBI)) using 5620
SAM, in MBI cabinet.
Table 6-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
before going SAM/9926 BBU for bCEM(s) using 5620 5620 SAM, in MBI with aligned with mis-aligned
to cell site CCM replacement SAM, in MBI cabinet cabinet software using software using
using 5620 using 5620 SAM, in 5620 SAM, in MBI 5620 SAM, in MBI
SAM, in MBI MBI cabinet cabinet cabinet
cabinet
1. SAM/MBI: 1. SAM: View 1. MBI: when 1. MBI: verify power 1. SAM: Perform 1. SAM: download
personnel (2) eNodeB (MBI) cell site, contact reconfiguration to software image to
SAM to verify restore the eNodeB align eNodeB
eNodeB (MBI) is (MBI) MIM (MBI) and SAM.
locked, and indicate configuration.
ready to remove
CCM. PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7 CCM replacement procedure overview using 5620 SAM, in MBI
cabinet (continued)
cabinet
2. SAM/MBI: 2. SAM: Import a 2. MBI: turn power 2. MBI: Install CCM: 2. SAM: if 2. SAM: Monitor
software image to
2. secure EMI the eNodeB (MBI)
bracket
3. connect CCM
cables:
a. for
eCCM-U,
go to
Step 3
b. for
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to
Step 4
3. SAM/MBI: 3. SAM: Perform an 3. MBI: disconnect 3. MBI: connect 3. MBI: Install 3. MBI: Install
required immediate backup CCM cables: eCCM-U cables. Go bCEM(s) bCEM(s)
eNodeB-NEM operation on affected 1. for eCCM-U, to Step 5
software eNodeB (MBI) go to Step 4
(backup to
SAM 2. for
procedure) eCCM2/eCCM2-HR,
go to Step 5
4. SAM/MBI: 4. SAM: Lock 4. MBI: disconnect 4. MBI: connect 4. SAM: Perform 4. SAM: Perform
required eNodeB (MBI) eCCM-U cables. Go eCCM2/eCCM2-HR immediate restore an NE
eNodeB (MBI) to Step 6 cables. Go to Step 5. operation on reconfiguration to
software eNodeB (MBI) to restore the eNodeB
restore SNMP MIB (MBI) MIM
5. SAM/MBI: 5. SAM: Contact 5. MBI: disconnect 5. MBI: notify SAM 5. SAM: Set 5. SAM: Perform
backup file that eNodeB (MBI) cables. Go to Step 6. and power is being parameters” to operation on
is ready for CCM applied. match installed eNodeB (MBI) to
removal. CCM by restore SNMP MIB
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB (MBI)
from SAM with
either online or
offline
configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet (continued)
cabinet
6. SAM/MBI: 6. MBI: go to 6. MBI: Remove 6. MBI: turn power on 6. SAM: Unlock 6. SAM: Set
eNodeB (MBI) Remove CCM and CCM at RUC/PDP eNodeB (MBI) “ENBEquipment
MIM backup bCEM(s) using 5620 parameters” to
file. SAM, in MBI cabinet match installed
CCM by
configuring
eNodeB (MBI)
from SAM with
either online or
offline
configuration.
7. SAM/MBI: 7. MBI: Remove 7. MBI: observe CCM 7. SAM: View 7. SAM: Unlock
required bCEM(s) LEDs, remaining alarms eNodeB (MBI)
VLAN 0 to next step. eNodeB (MBI) to
transport verify the NE
properties • if not successful, operational state.
reset eNodeB
(MBI) or contact If the eNodeB
technical (MBI) is
CCM replacement
contact technical
support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet (continued)
cabinet
8. MBI: 8. MBI: go to Install 8. MBI: Contact the 8. SAM: if 8. SAM: View

required tools CCM using 5620 SAM, check SAM necessary, continue remaining alarms
SAM, in MBI cabinet OAM Link Status with one of the raised against the
field: following: eNodeB (MBI) to
• If OAM Link • If the network verify the NE
Status field has a operational state.
displays Up, Alcatel- If the eNodeB
10-15 minutes Lucent 7750 (MBI) is
after power-up, backhaul operational, the
go to next step. network with CCM replacement
• If OAM Link dynamic is complete. If not,
Status field routing, contact technical
displays Down, update the support.
to next step.
– restore
link at another
cell site backhaul
(eNo- network,
deB- update as
NEM). required, then
go to next
– If OAM step.
link
cannot
be
restored,
contact
technical
support.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet (continued)
cabinet
9. SAM: go to 9. SAM: Update/align 9. MBI: when 9. SAM: if

Prepare 5620 5620 SAM and operational secure necessary, continue
SAM/9926 eNodeB (MBI) location (technician with one of the
BBU for CCM software and leaves site) following:
replacement configuration as • If the network
using 5620 follows: has a
SAM • For aligned Alcatel-
software: if 5620 Lucent 7750
SAM detects an backhaul
aligned software network with
image and dynamic
SNMP IDs routing,
between SAM update the
and eNodeB new CCM
(MBI), alarm is MAC address
raised, go to on the 7750
Restore 9926 router, then go
BBU with to next step.
aligned software • If network has
using 5620 SAM, another
in MBI cabinet backhaul
• For mis-aligned network,
software: if 5620 update as
SAM detects a required, then
mis-aligned go to next
software image step.
between the
expected (in
SAM) and actual
eNodeB (MBI)
and SNMP IDs,
alarms are raised:
Go to Restore
9926 BBU with
mis-aligned
software using
5620 SAM, in
MBI cabinet.
PRELIMINARY
10. MBI: when

operational secure
location
(technician leaves
site)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Steps
(CCM) and restore 9926 BBU operation using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet and an on-site
technician.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 6-3.1: “Things to do before going out to the cell site using 5620 SAM, in MBI
cabinet” (p. 6-53)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-57)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 6-3.3: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet”
(p. 6-59)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 6-3.4: “Install new CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-62)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet site using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
Overview
the eCCM-U, eCCM2, or eCCM2-HR (CCM). SAM should have this information
SAM, in MBI cabinet.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Personnel
The procedure requires field and SAM personnel. The field personnel (technician) goes
out to the cell site to perform the CCM replacement. The SAM personnel provides
operational support for the field personnel during the procedure. The field and SAM
personnel should review the replacement procedure together and the role of each person.
The personnel must have direct contact with one another during the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Documentation
• For SAM personnel, must have a copy of the following documents:
Guide
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 eNodeB-NEM software (for backup)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For field and SAM personnel, check eNodeB-NEM release on the eNodeB-NEM PC
and SAM client. If necessary, check LTE release notes for the current eNodeB-NEM
release. If eNodeB-NEM PC eNodeB-NEM software is not current, download and install
new release from either Alcatel-Lucent ALED or customer software repository. See
details in 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide for
eNodeB-NEM software installation.
Note: In this procedure, eNodeB-NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM procedure.
eNodeB-NEM software must be current with the 9926 BBU software, e.g., LR14.1.L,
if it becomes necessary to complete the CCM replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 eNodeB (MBI) software

For field and SAM personnel, have current running 9926 BBU software.
Check the current running eNodeB software release assigned to the eNodeB (MBI) from
either software repositories or release notes. If the running eNodeB software is not
present on the eNodeB-NEM PC and SAM client, download the current release(s) from
either Alcatel-Lucent ALED or customer internal software repository.
the eNodeB-NEM PC and SAM client.
Note: In this procedure, loading software from eNodeB-NEM is a backup to the 5620
SAM procedure, if it becomes necessary to complete the CCM replacement.

or eNodeB (MBI)
installation
in LR13.3 eNodeB (MBI)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

For field and SAM personnel, check that the SNMP MIB backup file of the affected
9926 BBU is present and current on the eNodeB-NEM PC and SAM client.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
scheduled backup is saved. If the backup cannot be retrieved at the 9926 BBU, check
with the SAM personnel for the latest backup from cell site records (collected during
backup files and copy them to the eNodeB-NEM PC and SAM client. If the SNMP MIB
is not available at all, the 9926 BBU will need to be recommissioned during installation
of the new CCM.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the MIB from eNodeB-NEM is a backup to the
5620 SAM procedure, if it becomes necessary to complete the CCM replacement.
If the 9926 BBU is operational; an SNMP MIB backup can be created from either SAM
or MBI as follows:
• From SAM, perform an immediate backup of the SNMP MIB. Refer to 5620 SAM
• From MBI, backup as follows:
1. Open eNodeB-NEM and login.
5. Click Download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field and SAM personnel, provide a MIM backup of the 9926 BBU from either the
configuration snapshot ). The MIM backup is required to restore the 9926 BBU if the
current active 9926 BBU MIM data is unavailable.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the MIM from eNodeB-NEM is a backup to the
PRELIMINARY
5620 SAM procedure, if it becomes necessary to complete the CCM replacement.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For field and SAM personnel, provide the eNodeB VLAN 0 transport properties from
9926 BBU during the replacement procedure.
Note: In this procedure, restoring the VLAN 0 transport properties from
eNodeB-NEM is a backup to the 5620 SAM procedure, if it becomes necessary to
complete the CCM replacement.
From MBI, if operational, copy the VLAN 0 Transport Properties as follows:
1. From eNodeB-NEM, select
Root View > Vlan 0 Properties > VLAN 0 Transport Properties tab.
OAM addresses. This has to be done at the local cell site with eNodeB-NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tools
• ESD Strap
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
procedure. The SAM personnel should be available to complete the replacement
procedure.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet replacement, using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

replacement, using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet

with eNodeB-NEM.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From SAM: View alarms raised against the 9926 BBU to verify the NE operational state
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From SAM: Import a replacement software image into the 5620 SAM, if required.
Reference: Refer to, Chapter, NE maintenance, Procedure, To import an eNodeB
software image into the 5620 SAM, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 From SAM: If an eNodeB SNMP MIB backup file was not obtained before going to the
eNodeB (MBI), if possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.2: Prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM
cabinet replacement, using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
do not perform a restore in Procedure 6-3.5: “Restore CCM with aligned software using
5620 SAM” (p. 6-66) or Procedure 6-3.6: “Restore CCM with mis-aligned software using
5620 SAM” (p. 6-72).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From SAM, use SAM to either lock or Soft Shutdown the 9926 BBU as follows:
Lock eNodeB (MBI): Lock the eNodeB (MBI).
To Soft Shutdown eNodeB (MBI), refer to Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown
eNodeB/Cells” (p. 4-3) for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From SAM: Contact on-site technician that 9926 BBU is ready for CCM removal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM,
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM, in

MBI cabinet
Overview
Steps
(CCM) and the bCEM in the 9926 BBU at the cell site using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From MBI: when technician reaches cell site, contact SAM to verify the 9926 BBU is
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failed CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

follows:
failed CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 NOTICE
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.3: Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM,
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI

cabinet
Overview
Steps
eCCM2-HR (CCM) in the 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failed CCM.
E1/T1 connector.
8. When complete, go to Step 5, to notify SAM that CCM is installed.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

failed CCM.
connecting them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Notify SAM that CCM is installed and power is being applied.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDP.
procedure, Procedure 6-3: “Replace CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet”
(p. 6-43), or contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Contact SAM, check the SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link Status
following step.
the following:
the cell site (eNodeB-NEM).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.4: Install new CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From SAM: Update/align 5620 SAM and eNodeB software and configuration as
follows:
IDs between SAM and eNodeB (MBI), the following alarm is raised:
NodeDatabaseCorruptionDetected, go to Procedure 6-3.5: “Restore CCM with
aligned software using 5620 SAM” (p. 6-66) to align the configuration and then the
SW if it is required.
alarms are raised:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using
cabinet 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5620 SAM
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From SAM: Perform an NE reconfiguration to replace the eNodeB MIM with the most
1. Trigger an NE reconfiguration by right-clicking on an eNodeB (MBI) in the
Equipment tree or Topology map and choosing Actions > Reconfigure NE from the
contextual menu. A warning dialog box appears.
eNodeB (MBI) returns to a managed state.
The eNodeB (MBI) reboots. SAM General tab, Site, State field displays “Managed”
after reboot. SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link Status field
displays “Down” until reboot is completed.
PRELIMINARY
full or partial eNodeB (MBI) reset, which is service-affecting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.5: Restore CCM with aligned software using
PRELIMINARY
cabinet 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From SAM: if necessary, download the required aligned software image to the eNodeB
(MBI) as follows:
displayed.
4. Manually download image from the 5620 SAM to the selected eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
Sites form opens.
b. Choose one or more eNodeBs (MBIs) from the list and click on the OK button.
The form closes and a dialog box appears.
eNodeB (MBI).
b. Choose one or more eNodeBs (MBIs) from the list and click on the OK button. A
dialog box appears.
Activating software resets eNodeB (MBI).
b. Choose the eNodeB (MBI) from the list and click on the OK button to accept the
PRELIMINARY
image and close the form.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-3.3: “Remove CCM and bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-59),
could not be completed.
From SAM: Restore the SNMP MIB configuration on the selected eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
displayed.
3. Select an eNodeB (MBI) from the list and perform one of the following steps,
depending on the operation that you want to perform. Click on the Restore button.
PRELIMINARY
Resync button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The eNodeB (MBI) reboots. SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM
Link Status field displays “Down” until reboot is completed. The Administrative State
of an eNodeB (MBI) is set to Locked after a successful restore operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
as follows:
From SAM: Set the “ENBEquipment parameters” to match the installed CCM by
configuring eNodeB (MBI) from SAM with either online configuration or offline
• For online configuration: Set the parameters by configuring eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
displayed.
• For offline configuration: Set the parameter by configuring eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
parameters” for the eNodeB (MBI), and transfer the files to the 5620 SAM, as
required.
the eNodeB (MBI).
3. Use the 5620 SAM configuration snapshot function to export the eNodeB (MBI)
5620 SAM.
configuration
configuration, validate and deploy WOs to eNodeBs (MBIs)
Note: If the eNodeB (MBI) does not reset after more than 15 minutes, a full
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
cabinet 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From SAM: Unlock eNodeB (MBI) as follows:

2. Select one or more eNodeBs (MBIs) in the navigation tree, right-click, and choose
Actions > State Unlock from the contextual menu. A dialog box appears.
4. Verify the lock and operational status of an eNodeB (MBI) as follows:
a. Navigate to the ENB Equipment properties view for the eNodeB (MBI).
“Unlocked”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From SAM: View remaining alarms raised against the eNodeB (MBI) to verify the NE
If the eNodeB (MBI) is operational, the CCM replacement is complete. If not, contact
technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

•
PRELIMINARY
If the network has another backhaul network, update as required, then go to next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 From MBI: When operational, secure location (technician leaves site).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
cabinet using 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5620 SAM
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From SAM: download the required software image to align eNodeB (MBI) and SAM as
follows:
displayed.
4. Manually download image from the 5620 SAM to the selected eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
Sites form opens.
b. Choose one or more eNodeBs (MBIs) from the list and click on the OK button.
The form closes and a dialog box appears.
Note: If the software image download to an eNodeB (MBI) that is in a state of
software misalignment, such as immediately following an eCCM board replacement,
the 5620 SAM automatically performs the “activate” and “accept” stages of the
software upgrade.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From SAM: Monitor software upgrade status.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-3.6: Restore CCM with mis-aligned software
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE

faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From SAM: Perform an NE reconfiguration replace the eNodeB MIM with the most
1. Trigger an NE reconfiguration by right-clicking on an eNodeB (MBI) in the
Equipment tree or Topology map and choosing Actions > Reconfigure NE from the
contextual menu. A warning dialog box appears.
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB (MBI) returns to a managed state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The eNodeB (MBI) reboots. SAM General tab, Site, State field displays “Managed”
after reboot. SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM Link Status field
displays “Down” until reboot is completed.
full or partial eNodeB (MBI) reset, which is service-affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

completed.
From SAM: Restore the SNMP MIB configuration on the selected eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
displayed.
3. Select an eNodeB (MBI) from the list and perform one of the following steps,
depending on the operation that you want to perform. Click on the Restore button.
Resync button.
PRELIMINARY
Note: The eNodeB (MBI) reboots. SAM General tab, ENB Base Configuration, OAM
Link Status field displays “Down” until reboot is completed. The Administrative State
of an eNodeB (MBI) is set to Locked after a successful restore operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
as follows:
From SAM: Set the “ENBEquipment parameters” to match the installed CCM by
configuring eNodeB (MBI) from SAM with either online configuration or offline
• For online configuration: Set the parameters by configuring eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
PRELIMINARY
displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• For offline configuration: Set the parameter by configuring eNodeB (MBI) as
follows:
parameters” for the eNodeB (MBI), and transfer the files to the 5620 SAM, as
required.
the eNodeB (MBI).
3. Use the 5620 SAM configuration snapshot function to export the eNodeB (MBI)
5620 SAM.
configuration
configuration, validate and deploy WOs to eNodeBs (MBIs)
Note: If the eNodeB (MBI) does not reset after more than 15 minutes, a full
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 From SAM: Unlock eNodeB (MBI) as follows:

2. Select one or more eNodeBs (MBIs) in the navigation tree, right-click, and choose
PRELIMINARY
Actions > State Unlock from the contextual menu. A dialog box appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. Verify the lock and operational status of an eNodeB (MBI) as follows:
a. Navigate to the ENB Equipment properties view for the eNodeB (MBI).
“Unlocked”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From SAM: View remaining alarms raised against the eNodeB (MBI) to verify the NE
If the eNodeB (MBI) is operational, the CCM replacement is complete. If not, contact
technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From MBI: When operational, secure location (technician leaves site).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet

Purpose
(bCEM), bCEMP1.0 or bCEMP1.1, in an Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU, in MBI cabinet.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
30 minutes
Safety
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
The following figure shows the location of the bCEM in MBI cabinet.
Figure 6-9 Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet

Extractor
4 LED Status Hole

Check bCEM status

status LEDs.
Before you begin

The following information must be available at SAM and at the cell site to replace the
PRELIMINARY
bCEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure requires a coordinated effort between SAM and the on-site technician to
and where the given step takes place, either at SAM or on-site at rack-mounted 9926
BBU (MBI).
Table 6-8 bCEM replacement procedure (rack-mounted)

1. MBI: check for failed bCEM LED status 1. MBI: insert new bCEM
2. SAM/MBI: connect eNodeB-NEM PC/open 2. MBI: observe bCEM LEDs.
eNodeB-NEM SAM/MBI: if required reset bCEM
3. SAM/MBI: check and clear alarms 3. MBI: attach EMI bracket (top slot)
4. SAM/MBI: lock cells 4. MBI: notify SAM
5. SAM/MBI: lock bCEM (BB) 5. SAM/MBI: unlock cells
6. MBI: remove EMI bracket 6. SAM/MBI: check/compare/ resolve alarms
7. MBI: loosen faceplate screws 7. SAM/MBI: close eNodeB-NEM/disconnect
eNodeB-NEM PC
8. MBI: pull bCEM
9. MBI: pack bCEM
10. MBI: go to Install bCEM
Note: Before attempting this replacement procedure, read and understand the
eNodeB-NEM operation and maintenance functions described in the 9400 LTE RAN
eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide.
Required tools
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ESD Strap
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the bCEM and restore 9926 BBU operation
(from MBI).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4.1: Remove bCEM
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed bCEM from rack-mounted 9926
BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check status LEDs of each bCEM to determine which one has failed.
status LEDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From MBI, connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable.
necessary)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From MBI, use NEM to check and if possible, clear alarms reported on the selected
panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To lock Cell(s):
Lock all Cells from either SAM or MBI as follows:
PRELIMINARY
• From SAM, perform the following steps to lock Cells, as required:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4.1: Remove bCEM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Click on the plus sign to expand the view to locate the desired MBI (eNodeB).
3. Right-click on desired MBI (eNodeB) and choose Launch NEM from the
contextual menu. The eNodeB-NEM launches and attempts to connect to the MBI
(eNodeB).
Note: eNodeB-NEM can also be launched from the Network Element form of an
MBI (eNodeB) by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM button
is not visible, click on the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
• From MBI, perform the following steps to lock the Cells, using eNodeB-NEM:
Note: If the lock request is sent to the MBI (eNodeB) and a deployment failure
occurs, the 5620 SAM raises a deployment failure alarm and the Administrative State
parameter displays Locking in Progress. The MBI (eNodeB) transmission status
is unaffected by user action at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• From SAM, perform the following steps to lock all bCEMs:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
menu. The eNodeB-NEM launches and attempts to connect to the eNodeB.
• From MBI, perform the following steps to lock all bCEMs, using NEM:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
faceplate.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4.1: Remove bCEM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
9926 BBU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4.2: Install bCEM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEM in MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
CEMs, CCM, and RRH. For LED status, refer to Appendix D, “LED status” for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From MBI, perform one of the following to check bCEM status:

following step.
manually reset the bCEM from either SAM or MBI:
1. To reset the bCEM at MBI (eNodeB), start with Sub-step 2.
To reset the bCEM at SAM, start with Sub-step 3.
2. Connect the eNodeB-NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable
and factory configured IP address (192.168.10.1, for local eNodeB-NEM access
only).
3. Open eNodeB-NEM and select the Tree view.
the following step.
PRELIMINARY
bCEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4.2: Install bCEM
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
faceplate.
Skip this step for the other bCEM circuit pack slots.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Unlock all Cells from either SAM or MBI as follows:

• From SAM, perform the following steps to unlock all Cells:
2. Click on the plus sign to expand the view to locate the desired MBI (eNodeB).
3. Right-click on desired MBI (eNodeB) and choose Launch NEM from the
contextual menu. The eNodeB-NEM launches and attempts to connect to the MBI
(eNodeB).
MBI (eNodeB) by clicking on the Launch NEM button. If the Launch NEM button
PRELIMINARY
is not visible, click on the More Actions button and choose Launch NEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-4.2: Install bCEM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From MBI, perform the following steps to unlock all Cells, using eNodeB-NEM:
Note: If the unlock request is sent to the MBI (eNodeB) and a deployment failure
occurs, the 5620 SAM raises a deployment failure alarm and the Administrative State
parameter displays Unlocking in Progress. The MBI (eNodeB) transmission
status is unaffected by user action at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From MBI, use NEM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9412
panel.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 When operational, exit eNodeB-NEM, and disconnect eNodeB-NEM PC from BBU or

close eNodeB-NEM at SAM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the 9926 BBU Sub-Rack, installed in an MBI
cabinet.
• Houses eCCM-U or eCCM2
• Houses bCEM
• Houses RUC/Fan Tray
Hot-swap FRU
No
Intervention time
duration).
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
Safety
PRELIMINARY
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
The following figure shows the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU for an equipment rack
installation.
Figure 6-11 Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet
bCEM 9412 BBU

eCCM2
Steps
Perform the following procedures to replace the failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in an MBI
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 6-5.1: “Shutdown 9926 BBU” (p. 6-93)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 6-5.3: “Remove eCCM-U or eCCM2” (p. 6-96)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Procedure 6-5.6: “Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-101)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5: Replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 6-5.8: “Install bCEMs” (p. 6-104)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 6-5.9: “Install CCM” (p. 6-105)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 6-5.10: “Restore 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet” (p. 6-107)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.1: Shutdown 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5.1: Shutdown 9926 BBU

Steps
Perform the following procedure to shutdown the failed 9926 BBU and replace the 9926
BBU Sub-Rack in the MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From MBI, Open cabinet and connect the eNodeB-NEM PC to the eCCM-U PORT1
with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable. Open eNodeB-NEM and login as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Notify SAM of service interruption and take 9412 eNodeB out of service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If possible, check and clear alarms from either SAM or MBI cabinet as follows:
• From SAM, use SAM to check and clear alarms reported on the selected 9926 BBU
(network element). Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter,
Troubleshooting and 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide. Make a note of any uncleared
alarms. The alarm status will be checked again after installing the new CCM.
9926 BBU. Refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, Chapter, Tree View, Section, Alarms . Make a note of any uncleared alarms.
The alarm status will be checked again after installing the new CCM.
• If additional assistance is required, contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Lock network element (eNodeB) from either SAM or eNodeB-NEM as follows:

• From SAM, perform the following steps to lock the 9412 eNodeB:
Refer 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, eNodeB online configuration,
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.1: Shutdown 9926 BBU
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to perform the following steps to lock the 9412
eNodeB:
3. Right click eNB and click Lock Module in context-sensitive menu. The NE is
locked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Close eNodeB-NEM and disconnect the eNodeB-NEM PC from CCM PORT1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Turn the power OFF to the RUC/Fan Tray as follows:

1. Turn OFF the power with power switch (press O),
2. Turn the power OFF at equipment circuit breaker.
• Without power switch, turn the power OFF at equipment circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the CEM.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.2: Remove bCEM(s)
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the bCEM(s). Unless otherwise indicated,
“CEM” also refers to bCEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On top CEM, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the center of the
faceplate. Skip this step for the other CEM circuit packs, if installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE
Removing bCEM improperly out of the sub-rack can damage it.
Carefully slide bCEM out of sub-rack without binding it.
Insert the T-Handle extraction tool in the CEM extraction hole in the middle of the circuit
pack and pull out of the slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Package the CEM in an ESD safe bag or container. If failed, ship to appropriate repair
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the CEM.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.3: Remove eCCM-U or eCCM2
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5.3: Remove eCCM-U or eCCM2

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the eCCM-U or eCCM2. Unless otherwise
indicated, CCM refers to both eCCM-U and eCCM2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disconnect eCCM-U or eCCM2 cables as follows:

• For eCCM2, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 to OPTIC 6, as required. The CPRI cables must be re-connected to the same
eCCM-U ports in the same way they were initially connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6. Backhaul cables from BH1 to BH4 ports as required.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.3: Remove eCCM-U or eCCM2
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

faceplate, rotate handle 90°, and pull the eCCM-U out of the slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When completed, continue with the following procedure to remove the RUC/Fan Tray.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC Ground Lug
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
eCCM-U).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.4: Remove RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Cable
(from eAM)
Alarm/
Commissioning
Cable
(from eCCM)
Switched
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC/Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
repair facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sub-Rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.5: Remove failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed 9926 BBU Sub-Rack from the MBI
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
sub-rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sub-Rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.6: Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI
PRELIMINARY
cabinet cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5.6: Install new 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI

cabinet
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the replacement 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in the
MBI cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Slide sub-rack into cabinet with the RUC/Fan Tray slot at the bottom.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install RUC/Fan Tray.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the following circuit breaker and/or switch are set in the OFF position:
• RUC/Fan Tray Power switch (press O), if switch is provided.
• Equipment circuit breaker in OFF position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
RUC Ground Lug
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.7: Install RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect the Alarm cable (from eAM) and Alarm/Commissioning cable (from eCCM-U).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install new bCEMs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.8: Install bCEMs
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5.8: Install bCEMs

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEMs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install eCCM-U.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.9: Install CCM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5.9: Install CCM

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

to OPTIC 6, as required. The CPRI cables must be re-connected in the same order as
they were on the failed CCM.
E1/T1 connector. When complete, go to Step 4, to notify SAM that CCM is installed.
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For eCCM2, connect the cables as follows:

OPTIC 9, as required. The CPRI cables must be re-connected in the same order as
they were on the failed CCM.
PRELIMINARY

6. Backhaul cable(s) to BH1 (default connection) to BH4 ports, as required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.9: Install CCM
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.10: Restore 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5.10: Restore 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet

Overview
This procedure assumes the same circuit packs removed from the sub-rack are operational
and are being re-installed in the new sub-rack.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to restore the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU to an
operational state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the NEM PC to the eCCM-U PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable. Open NEM
and login as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Without power switch, turn power ON with the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
1. Turn power ON with the PDP BBU circuit breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe the eCCM-U status LED matrix and CPRI LEDs.

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.10: Restore 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• If the eCCM-U status appears to be functional, continue with the following step.
• If the eCCM-U status does not appear to be functional, check the following:
coming into the PDP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reconnect Backhaul cable to 9926 BBU as follows:

2. Connect Backhaul cable (fiber or wire), to eCCM-U GE MDA port.
3. Determine if SAM detected the 9926 BBU as follows (may take more than 5
minutes):
a. If SAM detects the 9926 BBU, go to the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unlock network element (eNodeB) from either SAM or eNodeB-NEM as follows:
• From SAM, perform the following steps to unlock the 9412 eNodeB:
PRELIMINARY

• From MBI, use eNodeB-NEM to perform the following steps to unlock the 9412
eNodeB:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.10: Restore 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
unlocked.
Module in context-sensitive menu to unlock them:
TMA
RRH
BB (CEM)
CB (CCM)
RET
D2U (RUC)
and unlock them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From MBI, check the eNodeB component status as follows:

1. From eNodeB-NEM, select Tree View and the HW Modules tab in the right pane.
2. Check the status of the following components:
• eNB
• D2U
• FAN
• CB (CEM)
• BB (CCM)
• RRH
• TMA
• Sectors
• If everything is unlocked, go to Step 7.
• If any of the components are locked, return to Step 5 to unlock the components.
• If the any component does not return to the Enabled/Unlocked state, right click the
component in eNodeB-NEM and select Reset Equipment. The component should
PRELIMINARY
reset to Enabled/Unlocked.
• If the components continue to remain locked, contact technical support.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-5.10: Restore 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Check and compare alarms with those found during removal of the old eCCM-U as
follows:
9412 eNodeB.
Note: The customer must determine if remaining alarms are significant. Some alarms
may not matter. Clear alarms per local practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 When operational, exit eNodeB-NEM and disconnect the eNodeB-NEM PC.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace the enhanced Alarm Module (eAM) located
under the rack-mounted Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
The eAM module provides the following functions:
• Provides 8 connections (EXT ALMS 1-32, 4 alarms per connection) to monitor up to
32 external user alarms. Default logic for an alarm state is an open, logic 1 (software
selectable).
• Provides a connection (FRAME ALARMS) for 6 frame alarms with a potential for 4
more alarms. Default logic for an alarm state is an open, logic 1 (software selectable).
• Provides a connection (PWR ALM) for 4 power alarms or general purpose alarms. A
logic 0, closed loop condition, normally indicates an “alarm” state for “power”
alarms.
• Provides a connection (CTRL) for 1-wire data, power (5 VDC), 12C clock, and 12C
data lines.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
30 minutes
Tools required
Phillips screwdriver
Torque wrench
Safety
NOTICE
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures
Figure 6-12 Replace eAM
bCEM 9926 BBU

eCCM2
2
Frame 1-Wire/I C Power 32 User Alarms Ground
M5 or M6 Phillips
Alarms (RJ-45) Alarm (RJ-45 x 8) Stud (M4)
or Torx Screws and
(DB25) To BBU RUC (RJ-45) To Site Wiring To Site Ground
Lock Washers (2x)
To 9412 To Power Panel/NIU
Supply
Remove eAM
Note: Be prepared to remove the Alarm cables before removing the eAM.
Perform the following procedure to remove the failed eAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Notify SAM of service interruption and take 9926 BBU out of service, if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Disconnect faceplate alarm cables from the eAM as follows:

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM
PRELIMINARY
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove two mounting screws, one on each end of the faceplate, and slide eAM out of
equipment rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install replacement eAM by continuing with the following procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Install eAM
Perform the following procedure to install the eAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Slide eAM into the equipment rack (see previous figure). Tighten the mounting screws at
each end of the faceplate. Torque each screw to 2.8.N-m (25 in-lb).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect faceplate alarm cables to the eAM as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Notify OMC that service is being restored and prepare to place 9926 BBU back in
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note status LED (STAT) on faceplate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Have OMC test 9926 BBU. Installation is complete when testing has passed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM
cabinet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Part II: 9926 BBU
Upgrade/Reconfiguration
Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This part describes upgrades and/or reconfiguration procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent
9926 Base Band Unit
Contents
Chapter 7, Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU 7-1

Chapter 8, Add new cell to eNodeB 8-1
Chapter 9, Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation 9-1
Chapter 10, Reconfiguring cells 10-1
Chapter 11, Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation 11-1
Chapter 12, Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation 12-1
(Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA))
Chapter 13, Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode operation 13-1
with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary II-1
PRELIMINARY 9926 BBU Upgrade/Reconfiguration Procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
7 7 dd/remove bCEM
A
to/from 9926 BBU
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to add an another bCEM (from 1 to 2 or from 2 to 3) to an
existing 9926 BBU. Mainly done locally on 9926 BBU site except for final check from
OMC/SAM: hot insertion, sector creation from NEM, updated HW view from OMC, any
impact of current telecom traffic on other bCEM, or rollback process in case of a
problem. The bCEM is also referred to as the broadband board (BB) or modem.
Contents
Hardware issues 7-1

Procedure 7-1: Install a new bCEM 7-2
Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM 7-4
Hardware issues
Hot swap
The bCEM is capable of hot swapping in a 9926 BBU. Once inserted OAM detects the
circuit pack and updates the 9926 BBU OAM as necessary
Circuit pack removal

Removing a circuit pack without correct preparation can result in OAM disabling LTE
cells unexpectedly.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU Procedure 7-1: Install a new bCEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-1: Install a new bCEM

Before you begin
Verify there is an open modem slot in the 9926 BBU. If an bCEM is being replaced, refer
to for details.
The 9926 BBU must have a minimum of one bCEM (one sector) for one sector operation.
Up to two additional bCEMs can be added to the 9926 BBU for six sector operation.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to install an bCEM in an open 9926 BBU modem slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Slide bCEM into the slot and secure with two mounting screws. Verify LED status on the
CEMs, CCM, and RFMs (TRDU or RRH). For LED status, refer to Appendix D, “LED
status” for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform one of the following:

The bCEM should reset automatically when power is applied. Installation complete.
after 5 minutes and the bCEM does not reset, perform the following steps to manually
reset the bCEM:
1. Physically connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test
Cable or contact OMC to connect to the 9926 BBU remotely.
For RJ45 NEM Test Cable details, refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network
Element Manager (NEM) User Guide, Chapter, Introduction, Section, Hardware
Requirements, Sub-Section, Cabling.
2. Open NEM.
3. Click the Tree view icon (see Chapter, Tree View, Section, Hardware Modules ).
4. Click the desired 9926 BBU, then click HW Modules.
5. Select the disabled BB in the bCEM being replaced.
6. Right click BB, a context-sensitive menu opens, and click Reset Equipment to
reset the BB (bCEM). The bCEM should reboot and download active software
automatically. When a managed object is reset, the supported objects are
PRELIMINARY
temporarily disabled.
the following step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU Procedure 7-1: Install a new bCEM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
bCEM.
Result: Once the bCEM is inserted in one of the modem slots, the 9926 BBU OAM
detects the bCEM and proceeds to verify if it has the correct software; if the bCEM
does not have the correct software, the 9926 BBU OAM proceeds to update the
bCEM software. Once the bCEM has the correct software; the bCEM is initialized
and if it passes initialization, the operational state is set to “enabled”. The bCEM is
ready to support LTE cells.
Reference: Refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, Chapter, State Management, Section, Managed Objects , Sub-Section,
Operational state transitions, Sub-heading, BB operational state for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 On far right (or top) bCEM, insert EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw into the center
of the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If necessary, add new LTE cells to the bCEM. Refer to Chapter 8, “Add new cell to
eNodeB” for details.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM

Purpose
This procedure describes how to remove a bCEM with minimum loss of service.
Carefully read the procedure and understand the interactions in the system before
proceeding.
Since it is not known which LTE cells are supported on which bCEM, all LTE cells
should be locked before removing the bCEM, or just remove the bCEM. If just removed,
the 9926 BBU OAM process detects the bCEM is no longer available; changes the
operational state of the BB MO associated with the bCEM to “disable” if it is not already
set to “disable”. When the BB MO is set to “disable”, the LTE cells supported on this BB
MO is set to “disable” as well.
Steps
NOTICE
Loss of service
Not locking the associated LTE cells can result in an unexpected loss of service.
Identify and lock the LTE cells before removing the bCEM board.
Perform the following procedure to remove the bCEM (sector/cell) from the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the bCEM is not locked, perform the following steps to manually lock the bCEM:
1. Connect the NEM PC to the CCM PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable or contact
OMC to connect to the 9926 BBU remotely.
For RJ45 NEM Test Cable details, refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element
Manager (NEM) User Guide, Chapter, Introduction, Section, Hardware
Requirements, Sub-Section, Cabling.
2. Open NEM.
3. Click the Tree view icon (see Chapter, Tree View, Section, Hardware Modules ,
Sub-Section, Display Hardware Module Status).
4. Click the desired 9926 BBU, then click HW Modules.
5. Select the BB (bCEM) to be locked.
PRELIMINARY
6. Right click BB, a context-sensitive menu opens, and click Lock Module to lock the
BB (bCEM).
7. When completed, continue with the following step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 On far right (or top slot) bCEM, remove EMI bracket and small flat Torx screw from the
center of the faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Loosen two mounting screws from the faceplate. Do not remove screws from faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Insert the T-Handle extraction tool in the bCEM extraction hole in the middle of the
circuit pack and pull bCEM out of the slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 NOTICE
Do not leave slot open. Damage to the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU circuit packs will occur
due to inadequate cooling airflow.
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Insert replacement bCEM or blank filler pack to maintain proper air flow.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to add a new cell to an eNodeB.
Contents
LTE cell creation 8-1

Procedure 8-1: Add new cell to eNodeB 8-3
LTE cell creation

Purpose
This section describes how a cell is created for the eNodeB.
Overview
The LTE cell represents the cell supported by the local eNodeB. The eNodeB OAM
consists of the Call Processing XML domain that allows the operator to configure cells,
S1 and X2 communication links, Radio Trace sessions and other related parameters. For
this task the operator can use the wizard featured in the Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS. With
the cell creation a new set of channels is proposed for UL and DL.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Add new cell to eNodeB LTE cell creation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definitions
The following terms are used in this procedure:
• Cell MO represents one LTE carrier on a sector in the eNodeB. A cell is supported by
a BB and a Sector. The BB generates a digital signal based on the configuration
parameters associated with the Cell. The digital signal generated by the BB is fed to
the RFM that supports the Sector associated with the Cell.
• X2 MO represents the X2-C control plane connection to an adjacent eNodeB in the
LTE network. An eNodeB can have X2-C connections to multiple adjacent eNodeBs.
The X2-U user plane connections to adjacent eNodeBs are not monitored by this MO.
• S1 MO represents the S1-C control plane connection to a peer MME in the LTE
network. An eNodeB can have S1-C connections to multiple MMEs. The S1-U user
plane connections to MMEs or SGWs are not monitored by this MO.
• Baseband Board (BB or bCEM) represents the hardware unit that supports the
baseband processing function. In this release, each bCEM can be mapped up to three
sectors. A second or third bCEM can be added for multi-band and/or multi-carrier
configurations.
• Carrier (or Controller) Board (CB, eCCM-U or eCCM2) represents the
motherboard on the D2U. CB is a container object that represents all the components
housed on the motherboard such as the CPU that runs the OAM and Call Processing
control software, the Network Processing Unit, CPRI switch, GigE switch, SRIO
switch, compact flash, optional oscillator, optional GPS receiver and various other
devices.
• Radio Frequency Module (RFM) represents the RRH, TRDU, or R-OCM. The
RFM uses the CPRI interface to communicate with the BBU via the CPRI ports on
the eCCM-U.
LTE cell creation process

During LTE cell creation, the operator has to use the algorithm of centralized PCI
implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS in order to allocate the PCI to the cell.
Centralized automatic allocation of PCI is one of the SON features. It consists of
generating, from the OAM system, a PCI value for each cell and ensuring its uniqueness
with respect to the neighbor cells and the neighbor's neighbor cells.
During creation at the cell level, the concerned eNodeB equipment can require a reset
operation. Creation only requires a reset if Class A objects or parameters were created,
deleted, or modified.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add new cell to eNodeB Procedure 8-1: Add new cell to eNodeB
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-1: Add new cell to eNodeB

Purpose
This procedure provides instructions to add new cell to eNodeB.
Note: Unless indicated otherwise, the references cited in this procedure are from the
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager LTE RAN User Guide.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to add new cell to eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Configure the eNodeB offline using the 5620 SAM offline configuration procedure as
follows:
1. From 5620 SAM client, create a configuration snapshot instance of the eNodeB being
updated. Refer to Chapter, Offline configuration, Section, Configuration snapshots,
Procedure, To create a snapshot instance, for details.
Result: Configuration snapshot is stored in the /opt/5620sam/server/nms/
activation/snapshot_export directory.
2. From the 9952 WPS, prepare the new configuration, run checks, and export the delta
workorder (WO) as follows (refer to 9952 WPS Version 3.0 User Guide for LTE for
details):
a. Refer to Chapter, General Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS operating procedures,
Section, Checks management, Procedure, Check network objects, to check the
delta workorder.
b. Refer to Chapter, General Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS operating procedures,
Section, Data sharing management, Procedure, Deliver a workorder for
activation, to export the delta workorder back to 5620 SAM client.
3. From 5620 SAM client, activate and deploy the delta workorder to the eNodeBs as
follows:
a. Refer to Chapter, Offline configuration, Section, Activation manager, Procedure,
To create an activation session to activate the workorder.
b. Refer to Chapter, Offline configuration, Section, Activation manager, Procedure,
To deploy a WO using the activation manager to deploy the workorder to an
eNodeB.
Note: The eNodeB is unlocked and the cells are locked after the workorder is
PRELIMINARY
deployed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Add new cell to eNodeB Procedure 8-1: Add new cell to eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From OMC, perform the following steps to unlock cells from SAM client:
1. Right-click affected eNodeB and select Logical view. Equipment view is displayed.
2. Click (+)Cells, then right-click Cell element and select Properties.
3. Change administrative state from locked to unlocked and click OK and Yes to confirm
change.
4. Repeat steps for other locked cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the performance data to ensure the Telecom traffic is available for the updated
eNodeBs.
Refer to Chapter, Statistics, Section, PM statistics, Procedure, To configure a RAN
performance management policy, to check performance data.
Reference: Also, refer to 5620 SAM Statistics Management Guide for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From 5620 SAM client, check that no alarms are raised on the updated eNodeB.
Reference: Refer to the following guides and procedures to check for alarms from
the eNodeBs:
• Refer to 5620 SAM User Guide, Chapter, Alarm management, Section, Alarm
management procedures, Procedure, To view alarms raised against equipment,
logical components, and services, to view alarms.
• Refer to 5620 SAM Alarm Reference, Chapter, Alcatel-Lucent 9xxx eNodeB
alarms, for eNodeB alarm descriptions.
• Refer to 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide, to troubleshoot reported alarms from
the eNodeB.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
9 9 onfigure 9926 BBU for
C
Dual-Band, Dual-Modem
Operation
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to configure the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU with one bCEM
already installed for dual-band, dual-modem operation. The procedure adds a second
bCEMP1.0 or greater and a second set of RFMs (RRHs/TRDUs, up to three) for the
second band.
Notices
Note: The term “9926 BBU” refers to either the 9412 eNodeB or a distributed 9926
BBU throughout this procedure.
Contents
Preparation 9-2
Procedure 9-1: Configure 9926 BBU hardware 9-9
Procedure 9-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation with two modems 9-12
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Preparation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preparation
Purpose
The following information describes what is needed to upgrade a Alcatel-Lucent 9926
BBU, with a bCEM already installed, and adding a second bCEM to configure for a
dual-band cell site.
Note: The bCEM must be a bCEMP1.0 or greater.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
1 hour
Safety
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Preparation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figures

Extractor
4 LED Status Hole

The following figure shows a dual-band 9926 BBU with two bCEMs installed and six
RFMs (RRHs/TRDUs) (up to three for each band). Refer to Table 9-1, “Supported RFM
combinations for dual-band operation” (p. 9-4) for supported RFM combinations.
Figure 9-2 Dual-band 9926 BBU with two bCEMs

9926 BBU
CCM
Bandwidth #1 RRH
Carrier #1 Band #1 Sector #1
Sector #1
bCEM #1
Band #1 Bandwidth #1
RRH
Carrier #1
Band #2
Sector #2
Bandwidth #1
Carrier #1
Sector #3 RRH
Band #1 Sector #2
RRH
Bandwidth #1 Band #2
Carrier #1
Sector #1
bCEM #2
RRH
Carrier #1
Band #1 Sector #3
Sector #2
Bandwidth #1 RRH
Carrier #1 Band #2
Sector #3
Required software
The following software/backup files must be available/installed before the bCEM
PRELIMINARY
installation:
• LTE Release 6.0 or later)
• SAM 10.0 Rx or later
• Current SNMP MIB backup files (must be loaded on NEM PC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• LA6.0 NEM or later
• LA6.0 MIM or later
Consult the Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD
Release Notes, 9YZ-04152-0001-FMZZA, for current software requirements.
Required license
Parameter, isDualCarrierEnabled, requires a license token activation. Refer to
Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI) Customer
License Manager User Guide for details. Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access
Network Feature Activation Procedure for feature activation procedures.
Required hardware
The following hardware must be installed and operational (single-band) before the second
bCEM is installed in the 9926 BBU:
• 9926 BBU V2 sub-rack
• RUC/High-Capacity Fan Tray
• eCCM-U (CA/CB) or eCCM2
• One bCEM
• Up to three RFMs for one band (refer to Table 9-1, “Supported RFM combinations for
dual-band operation” (p. 9-4) for supported RFM combinations)
The following hardware must be available for the dual-band upgrade:
• One bCEM
• Up to three RRHs/TRDUs need to be installed and CPRI lines run to the 9926 BBU
for the second band (refer to Table 9-1, “Supported RFM combinations for dual-band
operation” (p. 9-4) for supported RFM combinations)
The following RFM (RRH/TRDU) combinations are supported when the 9926 BBU is
configured for dual-band operation.
Table 9-1 Supported RFM combinations for dual-band operation
RFM combinations Description

2x40-07L and 2x40-07U 2x40W 700 MHz Lower (Band 13) and
2x40W 700 MHz Upper (Band 17)
2x40-07L and 2x40-AWS 2x40W 700 MHz Lower (Band 13) and
2x40W 1721 MHz AWS (Band 4)
PRELIMINARY
2x40-08 and 2x40-26 2x40W 800 MHz (Band 20) and 2x40W 2600
MHz (Band 7)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, consult with Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support for the latest product
configurations/updates.
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager LTE Parameter Reference
• Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD Release Notes
• Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI) Customer
License Manager User Guide
• Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network Feature Activation Procedure
• Alcatel-Lucent LTE FDD Remote Radio Head (RRH) Technical Description
• Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) LTE Base Band Unit (BBU)
Technical Description
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware procedure overview
upgrade the 9926 BBU with two bCEMs and up to six RFMs. The following table
illustrates the upgrade procedures involved and where the given steps take place, either at
OMC or on-site at the 9926 BBU.
Note: The 9926 BBU must be operational with a single bCEMP1.0 or greater and the
appropriate number and type of RFMs for the first band.
Configure 9926 BBU hardware
The following table outlines the installation of the bCEM and RFMs for the second band
in the 9926 BBU.
Table 9-2 Configure 9926 BBU hardware procedure overview
Install second bCEM in 9926 BBU Connect RFMs to 9926 BBU

1. eNB: Remove blank filler plate. 1. eNB: Run and dress CPRI cables from RFMs to the
9926 BBU.
2. eNB: Slide bCEM into slot and secure 2. eNB: Plug the CPRI cables into CCM CPRI ports,
OPTIC 4, OPTIC 5, and OPTIC 6. Do not swap
existing CPRI cable ports with new CPRI cable ports.
3. eNB: Perform one of the following to check bCEM 3. eNB: Check LED status on the CCM and bCEM.
status:
• Check bCEM LEDs for normal operation (Green
LED on, Red LED off). bCEM resets
automatically when power is applied
• If bCEM LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED on) do
not change after 15 minutes and does not reset,
manually reset bCEM
4. eNB: When complete, go to Connect RFMs to 9926 4. eNB: When complete, go to Procedure 9-2:
BBU “Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation with
two modems” (p. 9-12).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation
The following table outlines the configuration of the 9926 BBU for dual-band operation
with two bCEMs and up to six RFMs.
Table 9-3 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation procedure overview
Modify workorder Export a single workorder Configure 9926 BBU

to 5620 SAM offline from 5620 SAM
1. OMC: From 9952 WPS 1. OMC: From 9952 WPS 1. OMC: Use SAM activation
main window, select the main window, select the manager to validate and
Workorders tab. Workorders tab. deploy WO to eNodeB
2. OMC: Select workorder to 2. OMC: Select the workorder 2. OMC: Use SAM
modify from Workorders tree to export from Workorders configuration snapshot to
sub-tree. export eNodeB configuration
data in form of snapshot files.
3. OMC: Either from 3. OMC: From either the 3. OMC: Automatically or
context-sensitive functions context-sensitive functions manually transfer snapshot
menu (right-click), or from menu (right-click) or files to application servers:
Workorders menu, select Set Workorders menu, select
workorder as current. Export workorder… and on
live server repository…
4. OMC: When completed, if 4. OMC: Navigate to the 4. OMC: Perform file
all operations have to be proper folder where the management tasks for CM
tracked, click Save Report… workorder (.xwo) will be XML files and log files
in the proper folder. Click stored, type in File Name, related to activation.
Close to the close the then click Save.
window.
5. OMC: If needed, change 5. OMC: When completed, if 5. OMC: Reset eNodeB
NE values using operational all operations have to be
procedures, or per object or tracked, click Save Report…
per attribute changes. Once in the proper folder. Click
NE values have been Close.
changed, go back to the
Workorders tab and select the
current workorder.
6. OMC: From Change panel 6. OMC: When completed, go 6. OMC: Check and clear
select network object changes to Configure 9926 BBU alarms as required.
to modify them for the desired offline from 5620 SAM.
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-3 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation procedure overview
(continued)
Modify workorder Export a single workorder Configure 9926 BBU

7. OMC: Either from 7. OMC: Test cell for call
context-sensitive functions processing. If successful, go
menu (right-click) or from to the following step.
Workorders menu, inhibit or
disinhibit changes
8. OMC: Once all 8. eNB: When operational,
modifications needed have disconnect NEM PC
been completed, from the
Workorders menu, click
Recompute planning view.
9. OMC: Click Yes.
10. OMC: When completed,
if all operations have to be
tracked, click Save Report…
in the proper folder. Click
Close to end procedure.
11. OMC: Current network
can then be checked. Repeat
from Step 5 until workorder is
properly modified.
go to Export a single
workorder to 5620 SAM.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-1: Configure 9926 BBU hardware
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-1: Configure 9926 BBU hardware

Overview
This procedure describes how to install the second bCEM (bCEMP1.0 or greater) and
connect the RFMs to the CCM.
Note: This procedure assumes the 9926 BBU is installed and operational in a
single-band configuration with up to three RFMs installed. Refer to Table 9-1,
“Supported RFM combinations for dual-band operation” (p. 9-4) for supported RFM
combinations.
Steps
Preform the following procedures to install the second bCEM and connect the RFMs to
the CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 9-1.1: “Install second bCEM in 9926 BBU” (p. 9-10)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 9-1.2: “Connect RFMs to 9926 BBU” (p. 9-11)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-1.1: Install second bCEM in 9926 BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-1.1: Install second bCEM in 9926 BBU

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the second bCEM (bCEMP1.0 or greater).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove blank filler plate from available slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert bCEM into the slot, and secure with the two faceplate mounting screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform one of the following to check bCEM status:

• Check that the bCEM LEDs show normal operation (Green LED on, Red LED off)
after about 15 minutes and should reset automatically. Continue with the following
step.
• If the bCEM LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED on) do not change after 15 minutes and
does not reset (disabled, failed status), perform the following steps to manually reset
the bCEM through NEM (opened locally or from SAM):
1. Select the Tree view.
3. Select the BB from the list that is equivalent to the installed bCEM.
the following step.
bCEM.
If the bCEM continues to fail, contact technical support.
Note: Additional LED status information can be found in Appendix D, “LED status”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When complete, continue with the following procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-1.2: Connect RFMs to 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-1.2: Connect RFMs to 9926 BBU

Before you begin
The RFMs (RRHs/TRDUs) must be properly installed and cabled before they can be
connected to the 9926 BBU. If necessary, contact technical support to have them
installed.
Steps
Perform the following steps to connect the RFMs to the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Run and dress CPRI cables from RFMs to the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Important! Before connecting the CPRI cables, verify the SPF connectors have been
properly cleaned before connecting them to the CCM.
Plug the CPRI cables into CCM CPRI ports, OPTIC 4, OPTIC 5, and/or OPTIC 6.
Note: It is not recommended to swap existing CPRI cables and CCM ports (Ports 1-3)
with the new CPRI cables and CCM ports (Ports 4-6). If the cables and ports are
changed the 9926 BBU must be reconfigured. Refer to Chapter 10, “Reconfiguring
cells” for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check LED status on the CCM and bCEM.

Reference: Refer to Appendix D, “LED status”, for additional information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When complete, continue with the following procedure, Procedure 9-2: “Configure 9926
BBU for dual-band operation with two modems” (p. 9-12).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation
with two modems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-band operation

with two modems
Overview
This procedure assumes the initial 9926 BBU is operational with Band 1 and RFMs
properly configured.
Steps
Preform the following procedures to configure the eNodeB for dual-band operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 9-2.1: “Modify workorder” (p. 9-13)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 9-2.2: “Export a single workorder to 5620 SAM” (p. 9-15)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 9-2.3: “Configure 9926 BBU offline from 5620 SAM” (p. 9-17)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.1: Modify workorder
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-2.1: Modify workorder

Overview
This procedure describes how to modify (inhibit or disinhibit) attributes, values, or
changes that belong to a workorder. This procedure includes synchronization of the
current network with the current workorders. However, the technician can modify a
workorder without impacting the current network. Ensure that the workorder to modify is
part of the workspace.
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS Version 3.0 User Guide for LTE for additional
information.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to modify the current workorder to include the
parameters for the dual-band configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS main window, select the Workorders tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the workorder to modify from the Workorders tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Either from the context-sensitive functions menu (right-click), or from the Workorders
menu, select Set workorder as current.
Result: A Setting current workorder window is displayed with a progress bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When completed, if all operations have to be tracked, click Save Report… in the proper
folder. Then click Close to the close the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If needed, change network element values using operational procedures, or per object or
per attribute changes. Once the network element values have been changed, go back to
the Workorders tab and select the current workorder.
Result: The current Workorder is updated with the attribute value change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 From the change panel, select the network object changes to change/update the following
ENBEquipment/Enb/lteCell parameters as required:
• isDualCarrierEnabled/… (true)
• expectedModemType/… (bCEM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.1: Modify workorder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If needed, from the Inhibit change panel select the attribute changes to modify them.
Use SHIFT+click or CONTROL+click to select multiple objects or attributes.
Reference: Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Macro and Metro
Products Parameters Reference Guide, for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Either from the context-sensitive functions menu (right-click) or from the Workorders
menu, inhibit or disinhibit changes using the following commands:
• Inhibit network change
• Disinhibit network change
• Inhibit changes for subtree
• Disinhibit changes for subtree
Result: The Workorders tree root is displayed in red followed by (misaligned).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Once all the modifications needed have been completed, from the Workorders menu, click
Result: A Confirmation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Yes.
Result: A Recompute network window with a progress bar is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
folder. Click Close to end the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 The current network can then be checked. Repeat from Step 5 until the workorder is
properly modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.2: Export a single workorder to 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-2.2: Export a single workorder to 5620 SAM

Overview
This procedure describes how to export a workorder.
Important! When exporting a single workorder in CM XML format, the
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS creates a _reverse.xwo workorder file. If the activation of
the workorder leads to a problem in the live network, the reverse workorder can be
used to restore the network back to its initial state. Thus, Alcatel-Lucent recommends
using this procedure to provide an easy way to restore the network.
NOTICE
Inconsistent (or unset) attribute values for network elements may cause a service
disruption.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that all workorders be merged into one workorder prior to
exporting to live network elements. Once you have exported a simple workorder, the
exported workorder might contain inconsistent (or unset) attribute values for a live
network element. Exporting a workorder will create a _reverse.xwo workorder file that
can be used to restore the live network to its initial state.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to export the workorder to 5620 SAM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The workorders tree is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the workorder to export from the Workorders sub-tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From either the context-sensitive functions menu (right-click) or Workorders menu, select
Export workorder… and on live server repository…
Important! The Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM (Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS) backup
PRELIMINARY
function does not save Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM (9952 WPS) workorders and a full
5620 SAM restore removes the workorders from the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM
server. If needed, the user must save workorders on the Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS PC
then retransfer them from the Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS PC to the Alcatel-Lucent
5620 SAM server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.2: Export a single workorder to 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A Select an output file window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Navigate to the proper folder where the workorder (.xwo) will be stored, type in the File
Name, then click Save.
Result: An Export workorder… window with a progress bar is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
folder. Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU offline from 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU offline from 5620 SAM

Steps
Perform the following procedure to configure the 9926 BBU for dual-band operation with
the activation manager. Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Offline
configuration, for additional information and procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use the activation manager function of the 5620 SAM to validate and deploy WOs to
eNodeBs as follows:
1. Create an activation session. See Procedure , To create an activation session.
2. Deploy a WO by using the activation manager. See Procedure, To deploy a WO using
the activation manager.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the configuration snapshot function of the 5620 SAM to export eNodeB
configuration data in the form of snapshot files.
1. Create a snapshot instance. See Procedure, To create a snapshot instance.
2. Take configuration snapshots manually. See Procedure, To take a configuration
snapshot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Automatically or manually transfer snapshot files to the following application servers:

• 9952 WPS
• 9459 NPO
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform file management tasks for CM XML files and log files related to activation as
required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Unlock the bCEM from either OMC or eNodeB as follows:

• From OMC, perform the following steps to unlock the bCEM:
PRELIMINARY
9400 NEM support, Procedure, To launch the 9400 NEM from the 5620 SAM
client GUI for more details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU offline from 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6. Under HW Modules, select BB (bCEM) of interest.
7. Right-click BB and select Unlock Module.
• From eNodeB, perform the following steps to unlock the bCEM using NEM:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Attention: Perform this step only if the software is not loaded on the new bCEM after
reset occurs from the previous step.
From OMC, reset eNodeB as follows:
3. Select the affected eNB from the list.
4. Right click the eNB and select Reset Equipment.
5. The eNodeB reboots and downloads active software automatically.
6. If the eNodeB restores to the enabled state, installation is complete, continue with the
following step.
If the eNodeB does not restore to enabled state, repeat steps or replace failed bCEM
(P1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
panel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU offline from 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From OMC, test cell for call processing. If successful, go to the following step.
Note: If the testing fails and it looks as though the cell cannot be successfully placed
in service, contact technical support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 From eNodeB, when operational, disconnect the NEM PC, and if necessary, close and
lock door to cabinet.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation Procedure 9-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU offline from 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
10
Procedure 10-1: Reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs

Overview
This procedure describes how to reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs, and moving CPRI
cables between CCM ports to change the number of sectors configured on the 9926 BBU.
The following documentation is required to complete the reconfiguration of the cells:
Guide
• Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System Version 4.0 UserGuide for LTE
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE Parameter Reference
• Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM LTE Alarm Reference
Required software
This procedure requires a minimum software load of LA6.0.x or later.
Also, create the following delta workorders (*.xwo):
• One to delete one or more cells (DeleteCellx.xml)
• One to delete one or more CPRI connections. (DeleteCPRIx.xml)
• One to add one or more cells (AddCellx.xml)
• One to add one or more CPRI connections. (AddCPRIx.xml)
PRELIMINARY
• One to reconfigure the sector(s) (reconfigSectorx.xml)

The software load and workorders should be loaded on the NEM PC before going to the
cell site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Reconfiguring cells Procedure 10-1: Reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Steps
Perform the following procedure to reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs, and moving CPRI
cables between CCM ports in an existing band.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use NEM (from SAM or on site) to check which cells (Cell Configuration) are assigned
to the RFMs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use NEM Commissioning Wizard to import delta workorder (*.xwo) to BBU to delete
the cell(s) (DeleteCell1.xml). This will cause an eNodeB reboot.
Result: The following figure shows the result of the reboot. Note Cell_1 is missing
from Cell Configuration tab.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reconfiguring cells Procedure 10-1: Reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference: Refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, Chapter, Commissioning Wizard for information on importing delta
workorders into the BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove CPRI cable (or CPRI-SFP cable) and wait for “RFM communication alarm”
(RFM CommFail 4006006!) to display on Active Alarms tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Use NEM Commissioning Wizard to import delta workorder (*.xwo) to BBU to delete
CPRI equipment (deleteCPRI1.xml).
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To clear Alarm Window, remove SFP (ignore if SFP already pulled).

If SFP Alarm is still present, the alarm disappears after eNodeB reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
5 If disabled sector is still displayed after deleting RFM, close and reopen the NEM, the
alarm disappears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reconfiguring cells Procedure 10-1: Reconfigure ports/sectors/RFMs
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Plug the SFP(s) and CPRI cable(s) (or SFP-CPRI cable) into the correct CCM OPTICx
port (x=1-6) as previously assigned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Use NEM Commissioning Wizard to import delta workorder (*.xwo) to BBU to add the
CPRI equipment (addCPRIx.xml (x=1-6)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Use NEM Commissioning Wizard to import delta workorder (*.xwo) to BBU to add the
cell(s) (AddCellx.xml (x=1-6)). This will cause an eNodeB reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 When complete, return to the appropriate procedure and if necessary, create a workorder
to reconfigure the sector(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
11 11
Configure 9926 BBU for
Dual-Carrier, Single-Band
Operation
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to configure the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU for dual-carrier,
single-band operation. This procedure requires two bCEMs, assuming a bCEMP1.1 is
already installed and operational.
Contents
Preparation 11-1
Procedure 11-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for dual-carrier, single-band operation 11-9
Procedure 11-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation 11-12
Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH (OEM) configuration 11-19
Preparation
Purpose
BBU for dual-carrier, single-band operation with two bCEMs installed.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
PRELIMINARY
Intervention time
1 hour
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Preparation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Figures

Extractor
4 LED Status Hole

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Preparation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows a dual-carrier, single-band 9926 BBU with two bCEMs
installed and three FDD RRH 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS.
Figure 11-2 Dual-carrier, single-band 9926 BBU

9926 BBU
CCM
Bandwidth #1 RRH #1
Carrier #1 Carrier #1
Carrier #2
Sector #1
Sector #1
bCEM #1
Carrier #1
Sector #2
Bandwidth #1
Carrier #1
RRH #2
Sector #3
Carrier #1 Sector #2
Carrier #2
Bandwidth #1
Carrier #2
Sector #1
bCEM #2
Band #1 Bandwidth #1 RRH #3
Sector #2 Carrier #2 Sector #3
Bandwidth #1
Carrier #2
Sector #3
Required software
The following software/backup files must be available/installed before the bCEM
installation:
• LTE Release LA6.0 or later
• SAM 11.0 Rx
• LA6.0 NEM
• LA6.0 MIM
• Current SNMP MIB backup files for 9926 BBU being upgraded (must be loaded on
NEM PC)
Release Notes, 9YZ-04152-0001-FMZZA, for specific software requirements.
Required license
PRELIMINARY
Parameter, isDualCarrierEnabled, requires a license token activation. Refer to

Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI) Customer
License Manager User Guide for details. Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access
Network Feature Activation Procedure for feature activation procedures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required hardware
The following hardware must be installed and operational before the second bCEM is
installed in the 9926 BBU:
• 9926 BBU V2 sub-rack (d2Uv5)
• RUC/High-Capacity Fan Tray
• eCCM-U (CA/CB) (3JR20073CB) or eCCM2
• bCEMP1.1
• Supported FDD RRHs as follows:
– Single 4x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH per sector (Alcatel-Lucent)
– Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRHs, master-slave configuration, per sector (OEM)
The following hardware must be available for the upgrade:
• One bCEMP1.1
• Three CPRI link rate 3 fiber optic cables
The following LTE and CDMA documents must be available for this procedure.
LTE documentation
The following LTE documents must be available for this procedure:
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure overview
upgrade the 9926 BBU (eNB). The following table illustrates the upgrade procedures
involved and where the given steps take place, either at OMC or on-site at the 9926 BBU
(eNB).
Note: The 9926 BBU is already operational with a single bCEM.
Install second bCEM hardware procedure overview
The following table outlines the installation of the bCEM and connection of the RRHs to
the 9926 BBU.
Table 11-1 Install second bCEMP1.1 hardware procedure overview
Install second bCEMP1.1 Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU

1. eNB: Remove blank filler plate next to bCEMP1.1. 1. eNB: Run and dress CPRI cables from RRHs to the
9926 BBU.
2. eNB: Slide bCEMP1.1 into slot and secure 2. eNB: Plug the CPRI cables into SPF connectors
(1-3) on CCM
3. eNB: Perform one of the following to check 3. eNB: Check LED status on the CCM and
bCEMP1.1 status: bCEMP1.1.
• Check bCEMP1.1 LEDs for normal operation
(Green LED on, Red LED off). bCEMP1.1 resets
• If bCEMP1.1 LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED
on) do not change after 15 minutes and does not
reset, manually reset bCEMP1.1
4. eNB: When complete, go to Connect RRHs to 9926 4. eNB: When complete, go to Procedure 11-2:
BBU “Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation”
(p. 11-12).
Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation procedure overview

The following table outlines the configuration of the 9926 BBU for dual-carrier
operation.
Table 11-2 Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation procedure overview
Modify workorder Export a single workorder Configure BBU (eNodeB)

PRELIMINARY
Workorders tab. Workorders tab. deploy WO to BBU (eNodeB)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

sub-tree. export BBU (eNodeB)
configuration data in form of
snapshot files.
window.
5. OMC: If needed, change 5. OMC: When completed, if 5. OMC: Reset BBU
NE values using operational all operations have to be (eNodeB)
current workorder.
6. OMC: From Change pane 6. OMC: When completed, go 6. OMC: Check and clear
select network object changes to Configure 9412 eNodeB alarms as required.
BBU (eNodeB).
PRELIMINARY
disinhibit changes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

9. OMC: Click Yes.
properly modified.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for dual-carrier,
PRELIMINARY
single-band operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for dual-carrier,

single-band operation
Overview
This procedure describes how to install the second bCEMP1.1 and connect the RRHs to
the eCCM-U.
single-carrier configuration with up to three RRHs installed.
Steps
Preform the following procedures to install the second bCEMP1.1 and connect the RRHs
to the CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 11-1.1: “Install second bCEMP1.1” (p. 11-10)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 11-1.2: “Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU” (p. 11-11)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-1.1: Install second bCEMP1.1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-1.1: Install second bCEMP1.1

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the bCEMP1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: This procedure assumes the 9926 BBU is operational with a single bCEMP1.1.
Remove blank filler plate next to the bCEMP1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Insert bCEMP1.1 into open slot, and secure with the two faceplate mounting screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform one of the following to check bCEMP1.1 status:

• Check that the bCEMP1.1 LEDs show normal operation (Green LED on, Red LED
off) after about 15 minutes and should reset automatically. Continue with the
following step.
• If the bCEMP1.1 LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED on) do not change after 15 minutes
and does not reset (disabled, failed status), perform the following steps to manually
reset the bCEMP1.1 through NEM (opened locally or from SAM):
3. Select the BB from the list that is equivalent to the installed bCEMP1.1.
4. Right click the BB and select Reset Equipment. The bCEMP1.1 should reboot
and download active software automatically.
5. If the bCEMP1.1 restores to the enabled state, installation is complete, continue
with the following step.
If the bCEMP1.1 does not restore to enabled state, repeat steps or replace failed
bCEMP1.1.
If the bCEMP1.1 continues to fail, contact technical support.
Note: Additional LED status information can be found in Appendix D, “LED status”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-1.2: Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-1.2: Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU

Steps
Perform the following steps to connect the 4x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH per sector to the
9926 BBU. Refer to “Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH (OEM) configuration”
(p. 11-19) if the two OEM 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRHs are connected to the BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Run and dress CPRI cables from RRHs to the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Plug the CPRI cables into available SPF connectors (1-3) on CCM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check LED status on the CCM and bCEMP1.1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU for dual-carrier operation” (p. 11-12).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier
operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-2: Configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation

Overview
This procedure assumes the initial 9412 eNodeB is operational with the appropriate band
and RRHs configured.
Steps
Perform the following procedures to configure the 9926 BBU for dual-carrier operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 11-2.2: “Export single workorder to 5620 SAM” (p. 11-15)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 11-2.3: “Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline from 5620 SAM” (p. 11-17)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.1: Modify workorder
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
information.
Steps
parameters for the dual-carrier configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The current workorder is updated with the attribute value change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Propagate the dual-carrier template into an existing configuration (workorder). Refer to

the Release Notes for Dual-Carrier Templates for parameter details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.1: Modify workorder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
properly modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.2: Export single workorder to 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-2.2: Export single workorder to 5620 SAM

Overview
Important! When exporting a single workorder in CM XML format, the
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 WPS creates a _reverse.xwo workorder file. If the activation of
the workorder leads to a problem in the live network, the reverse workorder can be
used to restore the network back to its initial state. Thus, Alcatel-Lucent recommends
using this procedure to provide an easy way to restore the network, if necessary.
NOTICE
disruption.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
5620 SAM server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.2: Export single workorder to 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
PRELIMINARY
from 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline from

5620 SAM
Steps
Perform the following procedure to configure the 9412 eNodeB for dual-carrier operation
with the activation manager. Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide, Chapter, Offline
configuration, for additional information and procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBUs (eNodeBs) as follows:
1. Create an activation session. See Procedure , To create an activation session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
snapshot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• 9952 WPS
• 9459 NPO
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
from 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
following step.
(P1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Procedure 11-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
PRELIMINARY
from 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH (OEM) configuration

Overview
Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRHs (OEM) are daisy chained to appear as a single logical
unit (each sector) to achieve the 4Rx diversity required for the dual-carrier, single-band
configuration.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Carrier, Single-Band Operation Two 2x40W 1900 MHz PCS RRH (OEM) configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RRH cabling
The following figure shows how the two RRHs are daisy-chained to provide the
necessary 4x4 RRH configuration for each sector.
Figure 11-3 RRH cabling for dual-carrier, single-band configuration
When connecting the RRHs to the BBUs (CDMA/LTE, CPRI), temporarily connect the
CDMA BBU to RRH #1, and a special user alarm cap on RRH #2 CPRI to designate
RRH #2.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
12 12
Configure 9926 BBU for
Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band
Operation (Commercial
Carrier Aggregation (CA))
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to configure a Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU for multi-carrier,
multi-band operation, such as Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA). This procedure
requires up to three bCEMs, assuming a bCEMP1.1 is already installed and operational.
Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA)
When CA is planned for a future update but disabled, one or three bCEMs can be
installed with the third bCEM locked (disabled) from an earlier upgrade. It is normal in an
eNodeB with eCCM-U in LR13.3 and Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA) disabled.
This is because in LR13.3, OAM-C is controlling the number of HSIQs assigned per
bCEM and it makes sure the total of 6 HSIQs in eCCM-u is not exceeded. When CA is
enabled, bCEM1, bCEM2 and bCEM3 get 2 HSIQs each. When CA is disabled, bCEM1
and bCEM2 get 3 HSIQ each, while bCEM3 gets no (zero) HSIQ. In this case the 3rd
bCEM should be locked. When in LR14.1 with CA enabled the bCEM should be
unlocked.
Note: All three bCEMs must be unlocked before the Carrier Aggregation feature is
activated.
Refer to, 9400 LTE RAN Feature Activation Procedure, for activation procedure, list
the parameters to activate and configure, and list prerequisites before mapping cells.
Contents
Preparation 12-2
Procedure 12-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for multi-carrier, multi-band operation 12-10
PRELIMINARY
Procedure 12-2: Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation 12-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Preparation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preparation
Purpose
BBU for multi-carrier, multi-band operation and Carrier Aggregation reconfiguration.
Hot-swap FRU
Yes
Intervention time
1 hour
Safety
NOTICE
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Figures

Extractor
4 LED Status Hole
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Preparation
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows a multi-carrier, multi-band 9926 BBU with three bCEMs
installed and nine RFMs.
Figure 12-2 Multi-carrier, multi-band 9926 BBU
9926 DBS
CCM2 Sector #1
Bandwidth #1 RRH #0
Carrier #1
Sector #1 Carrier #1
bCEM #1 RRH #1
Bandwidth #1
Carrier #2
Carrier #1 RRH #2
Sector #2
Carrier #3
Bandwidth #1
Carrier #1
Sector #3
Sector #2
Bandwidth #2 RRH #3
Sector #1
RRH #4
bCEM #2 Carrier #2
Bandwidth #2
Carrier #2 RRH #5
Sector #2 Carrier #3
Bandwidth #2
Carrier #2
Sector #3
Bandwidth #3
Sector #3
Carrier #3 RRH #6
Sector #1
Carrier #1
bCEM #3 RRH #7
Bandwidth #3 Carrier #2
Carrier #3
Sector #2 RRH #8
Carrier #3
Bandwidth #3
Carrier #3
Sector #3
Required software
The following software/backup files must be available/installed before the additional
bCEM installation:
• LTE Release LR13.3.L or later
• SAM 11.0 Rx or later
• LR13.3.L NEM
PRELIMINARY
• LR13.3.L MIM
• LR13.3.L 9952 WPS installed on a PC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Current SNMP MIB backup files for 9926 BBU being upgraded (must be loaded on
NEM PC)
• Alcatel-Lucent Golden Parameters Template for LR13.3.L is available and loaded in
WPS. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent Customer Team representative for information on
how to access the Golden Parameters Template.
Release Notes, 9YZ-04152-0001-FMZZA, for specific software requirements.
Required license
Parameter, ActivationService:isTriCarrierEnabled, requires a license token activation.
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI)
Customer License Manager User Guide for details. Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE
Radio Access Network Feature Activation Procedure for feature activation procedures.
For CA, a license exists for Carrier Aggregation. The licensing token should be available
before activating this feature.
Required hardware
The following hardware must be installed and operational before the second/third bCEM
is installed in the 9926 BBU:
• One 9926 BBU V2 sub-rack (d2Uv5)
• One RUC/High-Capacity Fan Tray
• One eCCM2/eCCM-U (CCM)
• One bCEMP1.1
• Up to three CPRI link rate 5 fiber-optic cables connected between the CCM and
RFMs
• Up to three supported FDD RRHs/TRDUs
The following hardware must be available for the tri-carrier (CA) upgrades:
• Up to two bCEMP1.1s
• Up to six CPRI link rate 5 fiber optic cables connected between the CCM and RFMs
PRELIMINARY
The following LTE and CDMA documents must be available for this procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE documentation
The following LTE documents must be available for this procedure:
Required tools
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure overview
upgrade the 9926 BBU (eNB). The following table illustrates the upgrade procedures
involved and where the given steps take place, either at OMC or on-site at the 9926 BBU
(eNB).
Note: The 9926 BBU must start with at least one operational bCEM.
Install second/third bCEM hardware procedure overview
The following table outlines the installation of the bCEM and connection of the RRHs to
the 9926 BBU.
Table 12-1 Install second/third bCEMP1.1 hardware procedure overview
Install second/third bCEMP1.1 Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU

1. eNB: Connect NEM PC to CCM and log in. 1. eNB: Run and dress CPRI cables from RRHs to the
9926 BBU.
2. eNB: Remove blank filler plates (1 or 2) from 9926 2. eNB: Plug CPRI cables into eCCM2 SPF
BBU. connectors (4-9) or eCCM-U SPF connectors (4-6)
3. eNB: Slide new bCEMP1.1 into slot next to first 5. eNB: perform one of the following to check
bCEMP1.1 and secure bCEMP1.1 status:
• Check bCEMP1.1 LEDs for normal operation
(Green LED on, Red LED off). bCEMP1.1 resets
reset, manually reset bCEMP1.1
• For early installation, CA not activated, lock third
bCEMP1.1 from NEM.
• For current installation, unlock third bCEMP1.1
before activating CA.
• When complete, go to Step 4.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 12-1 Install second/third bCEMP1.1 hardware procedure overview
(continued)
Install second/third bCEMP1.1 Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU

4. eNB: Perform one of the following to check second 4. eNB: When complete, go to Procedure 12-2:
bCEMP1.1 status: “Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation”
• Check bCEMP1.1 LEDs for normal operation (p. 12-14).
(Green LED on, Red LED off) after about 15
minutes and should reset automatically
reset, manually reset bCEMP1.1 from NEM.
• In case bCEM is the second one in the 9926 BBU,
go to Step 5.
• In case bCEM is third one in the 9926 BBU, and
CA is required, make sure it is unlocked and
operational before activating the CA feature.
• In case this bCEM is the third one in the 9926
BBU and CA is not required, lock the bCEM.
5. eNB: When complete, go to Connect RRHs to 9926
BBU
Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation procedure overview

The following table outlines the configuration of the 9926 BBU for multi-carrier
operation (CA).
Table 12-2 Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation procedure overview

Workorders tab. Workorders tab. deploy WO to BBU (eNodeB)
sub-tree. export BBU (eNodeB)
configuration data in form of
snapshot files.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 12-2 Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation procedure
overview (continued)

window.
5. OMC: If needed, change 5. OMC: When completed, if 5. OMC: Reset BBU
NE values using operational all operations have to be (eNodeB)
current workorder.
6. OMC: From Change pane 6. OMC: When completed, go 6. OMC: Check and clear
select network object changes to Configure BBU (eNodeB) alarms as required.
BBU (eNodeB).
disinhibit changes
PRELIMINARY

9. OMC: Click Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 12-2 Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation procedure
overview (continued)

properly modified.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for multi-carrier,
(Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA)) multi-band operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-1: Upgrade 9926 BBU for multi-carrier,

multi-band operation
Overview
This procedure describes how to install the bCEMP1.1 and connect the RRHs to the
eCCM2.
single-carrier configuration with up to three RRHs installed.
Steps
Preform the following procedures to install the second/third bCEMP1.1 and connect the
RRHs to the eCCM2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 12-1.1: “Install second and/or third bCEMP1.1” (p. 12-11)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 12-1.2: “Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU” (p. 12-13)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-1.1: Install second and/or third bCEMP1.1
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-1.1: Install second and/or third bCEMP1.1

Steps
Perform the following procedure to install the second and/or third bCEMP1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect NEM PC to CCM and log in.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Note: This procedure assumes the 9926 BBU is operational with a single bCEMP1.1.
Remove blank filler plates (1 or 2) from 9926 BBU slots.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Slide new bCEMP1.1 into slot next to first bCEMP1.1 and secure with the two faceplate
mounting screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform one of the following to check new bCEMP1.1 status:

• Check that the bCEMP1.1 LEDs show normal operation (Green LED on, Red LED
off) after about 15 minutes and should reset automatically.
• If the bCEMP1.1 LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED on) do not change after 15 minutes
and does not reset (disabled, failed status), perform the following steps to manually
reset the bCEMP1.1 through NEM (opened locally or from SAM):
3. Select the BB from the list that is equivalent to the installed bCEMP1.1.
4. Right click the BB and select Reset Equipment. The bCEMP1.1 should reboot
and download active software automatically.
5. If the bCEMP1.1 restores to the enabled state, installation is complete, continue
If the bCEMP1.1 does not restore to enabled state, repeat steps or replace failed
bCEMP1.1.
If the bCEMP1.1 continues to fail, contact technical support.
• In case bCEM is the second one in the 9926 BBU, go to Step 5.
• In case bCEM is third one in the 9926 BBU, and CA is required, make sure it is
PRELIMINARY
unlocked and operational before activating the CA feature.

• In case this bCEM is the third one in the 9926 BBU and CA is not required, lock the
bCEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-1.1: Install second and/or third bCEMP1.1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Unlock the bCEM and make sure it is operational before:
– Performing an inter or intra-release software upgrade
– Activating the Carrier Aggregation feature
Note: Additional TRDU LED status information can be found in Appendix D, “LED
status”. For RRHs, refer to the appropriate RRH technical description or maintenance
guide for LED status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-1.2: Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-1.2: Connect RRHs to 9926 BBU

Steps
Perform the following steps to connect the RRHs (one per sector) to the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Run and dress CPRI cables from RRHs to the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Plug CPRI cables into eCCM2 SPF connectors (4-9) or eCCM-U SPF connectors (4-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 5. eNB: perform one of the following to check bCEMP1.1 status:

• Check bCEMP1.1 LEDs for normal operation (Green LED on, Red LED off).
bCEMP1.1 resets automatically when power is applied
• If bCEMP1.1 LEDs (Green LED on, Red LED on) do not change after 15 minutes
and does not reset, manually reset bCEMP1.1
• For early installation, CA not activated, lock third bCEMP1.1 from NEM.
• For current installation, unlock third bCEMP1.1 before activating CA.
• When complete, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBU for multi-carrier operation” (p. 12-14).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2: Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier
(Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA)) operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-2: Configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier

operation
Overview
This procedure assumes the initial 9926 BBU is operational with the appropriate band and
RRHs configured.
Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network Feature Activation Procedure
for activation and reconfiguration parameters and procedures.
Steps
Perform the following procedures to configure the 9926 BBU for multi-carrier operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 12-2.2: “Export single workorder to 5620 SAM” (p. 12-17)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 12-2.3: “Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline from 5620 SAM” (p. 12-19)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.1: Modify workorder
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
information.
Steps
parameters for the multi-carrier configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The current workorder is updated with the attribute value change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Propagate the multi-carrier template into an existing configuration (workorder). Refer to

the Release Notes for Multi-Carrier Templates for parameter details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.1: Modify workorder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
properly modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.2: Export single workorder to 5620 SAM
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-2.2: Export single workorder to 5620 SAM

Overview
Important! When exporting a single workorder in CM XML format, the 9952 WPS
creates a _reverse.xwo workorder file. If the activation of the workorder leads to a
problem in the live network, the reverse workorder can be used to restore the network
back to its initial state. Thus, Alcatel-Lucent recommends using this procedure to
provide an easy way to restore the network, if necessary.
NOTICE
disruption.
Steps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
5620 SAM server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.2: Export single workorder to 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
PRELIMINARY
(Commercial Carrier Aggregation (CA)) from 5620 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline from

5620 SAM
Steps
Perform the following procedure to configure the 9412 eNodeB for multi-carrier
operation with the activation manager. Refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide,
Chapter, Offline configuration, for additional information and procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBUs (eNodeBs) as follows:
1. Create an activation session. See Procedure, To create an activation session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
snapshot .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• 9952 WPS
• 9459 NPO
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
following step.
(P1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Configure 9926 BBU for Multi-Carrier, Multi-Band Operation Procedure 12-2.3: Configure 9926 BBU (eNodeB) offline
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
13 13
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for
Combined Transmit Mode
operation with
TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to upgrade the 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs.
Contents
Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode operation 13-2
with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs Transmit Mode operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit

Mode operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
Purpose
This procedure describes how to configure a 9412 eNodeB from a 2T2R, Normal
Transmit Mode (2T2R NTM, with normal power output), configuration to a 2T2R,
Combined Transmit Mode (2T2R CTM, with high power output), configuration using
TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs.
Note: This procedure assumes the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor RF
cabinet includes the necessary components and internal cabling as described in
“Prerequisites” (p. 13-8). It also assumes that six antennas and cabling have been
installed.
Configurations
The following figure shows a typical three sector configuration with three TRDUs (one
per sector) in a 2T2R, Normal Transmit Mode (with normal power output, 60 W per
antenna port), configuration.
The 2T2R, Normal Transmit Mode (2T2R NTM), configuration using TRDU2x60-AWS
TRDUs, requires two antennas per TRDU, one TRDU per sector. This configuration is the
starting point for this upgrade to the 2T2R Combined Transmit Modes (2T2R CTM).
Figure 13-1 2T2R, Normal Transmit Mode configuration

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows a typical three sector configuration with six TRDUs (two per
sector) in a 2T2R, Combined Transmit Mode (with high power output, 120 W per antenna
port), configuration.
The 2T2R, Combined Transmit Mode, configuration requires two TRDUs per sector and
only one antenna per TRDU. Unused antenna ports must be terminated/capped.
Figure 13-2 2T2R, Combined Transmit Mode configuration
Hot-swap FRU
No
The affected/installed 9412 eNodeB must be powered down. The following procedures
assume the TRDUs, antennas, and RF cabling are already installed.
Intervention time
This procedure requires 3-4 hours to install a second 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor RF
cabinet with TRDUs, cabling, and provisioning. This does not include the initial
installation and provisioning of the initial 9412 eNodeB Compact BB/RF cabinet
configuration or the installation of six antennas.
Required tools
PRELIMINARY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Socket wrench
• ESD Strap
Safety
WARNING
Personal Injury
Improper handling of the TRDU may cause personal injury.
Use both hands when removing or installing the TRDU. Faceplate corners can cause
injury if the TRDU is not properly handled during transportation, removal, and
installation. Transport TRDUs to a site in their original shipping container and do not
remove until ready for installation.
NOTICE
Applying power to an unterminated TRDU can damage the unit.
Only apply power to the TRDU AFTER ALL RF cables and antennas are properly
connected to prevent damage to the unit.
NOTICE
Notify OMC (5620 SAM administrator) in case of service interruption or reduction in
service.
Steps
PRELIMINARY
Perform the following procedures to upgrade the 9412 eNodeB for a Combined Transmit
Mode configuration with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 13-1.1: “Shutdown 9412 eNodeB” (p. 13-6)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1: Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 13-1.2: “Install TRDU2x60-AWS configured 9412 eNodeB OD RF cabinet

(RF2)” (p. 13-8)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 13-1.3: “Connect CPRI cables between BB1, RF1, and RF2” (p. 13-10)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 13-1.4: “Connect RF cables between TRDUs and antennas” (p. 13-12)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 13-1.5: “Apply power to eNodeB” (p. 13-16)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 13-1.6: “License and activate feature” (p. 13-17)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.1: Shutdown 9412 eNodeB
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1.1: Shutdown 9412 eNodeB

Overview
This procedure shuts down the operational Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact
Outdoor cell site, with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs installed, and being upgraded from
2T2R Normal Transmit Mode to 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode configuration. This is a
prerequisite to reconfiguring antennas and installing a second Alcatel-Lucent 9412
eNodeB Compact Outdoor RF cabinet with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs installed in it.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to shutdown the 9412 eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.1: Shutdown 9412 eNodeB
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When completed, continue with the following procedure to install/reconfigure the

antennas for 2T2R CTM operation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.2: Install TRDU2x60-AWS configured 9412
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs eNodeB OD RF cabinet (RF2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1.2: Install TRDU2x60-AWS configured 9412

eNodeB OD RF cabinet (RF2)
Overview
The following procedure describes how to install the TRDU2x60-AWS configured 9412
eNodeB OD RF cabinet (RF2).
Note: This procedure assumes the TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs have been installed and
pre-wired in the 9412 eNodeB OD RF cabinet at the factory.
Prerequisites
The following components are required to install the 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode
configuration:
• An already operational Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor BB/RF
cabinets (BB1 and RF1) with the following components:
– One Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit V2
– One enhanced Core Controller Module-2 (eCCM2) or enhanced Core Controller
Module (eCCM-U), unless otherwise noted, CCM is used for common references.
– Two broadband Channel Element Module (bCEM)s
– One Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Sub-Rack (d2UV5)
– One RUC/High-Capacity Fan Tray
– Three TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs for the 2T2R, Normal Transmit Mode
configuration (see Figure 13-1, “2T2R, Normal Transmit Mode configuration”
(p. 13-2))
– Ancillary components (PDPs, fans, cables (CPRI, power, Backhaul, GPS, etc.),
eAMi/o
– Six antennas and cabling (two per TRDU).
• A second Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor RF cabinet (RF2) with the
following components:
– Three TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs.
– Ancillary components (PDPs, fans, cables (CPRI, power, antenna), eAMo.
– 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode configuration requires only one antenna, cable,
and a terminator for unused antenna connection per TRDU. Three antennas are
moved from existing TRDUs to new TRDUs (see Figure 13-2, “2T2R, Combined
Transmit Mode configuration” (p. 13-3)).
PRELIMINARY
– Mounting platform for the cabinet: wall, equipment rack, or floor-mounted stand.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.2: Install TRDU2x60-AWS configured 9412
PRELIMINARY
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs eNodeB OD RF cabinet (RF2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor RF cabinet (RF2)
Perform the following procedure to install the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact
Outdoor RF cabinet, RF2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install appropriate cabinet mounting platform. Keep in mind distance from BB1/RF1 and
accessibility to RF2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor RF cabinet on appropriate

mounting platform.
Note: Use the appropriate lifting device when mounting the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Install appropriate conduits for power and control cabling between BB1 and RF2 or RF1
and RF2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Label and run power, ground, and control cables between BB1 and RF2 or RF1 and RF2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Connect grounding cable to RF2 grounding location (exterior of cabinet), and if

necessary, to the mounting platform.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 WARNING
Electric-shock hazard can cause damage to the equipment.
Verify power is NOT ON at this point in the procedure. Only apply power when
instructed.
Connect unpowered power cable between BB1 cabinet PDP and RF2 cabinet PDP DC
power connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 When completed, continue with the following procedure to connect CPRI cables between
BB1, RF1, and RF2.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.3: Connect CPRI cables between BB1, RF1,
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs and RF2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1.3: Connect CPRI cables between BB1, RF1,

and RF2
Steps
Perform the following procedure to connect the CPRI cables between BB1 (CCM), RF1
(TRDU 1-3), and RF2 (TRDU 4-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Label CPRI cables, BB-RF1 to BB-RF3, and run from BB1 to RF1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Label CPRI cables, BB-RF4 to BB-RF6, and run from BB1 to RF2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The following figure illustrates the CPRI cabling between BB1 (CCM), RF1, and RF2.
Figure 13-3 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode CPRI cabling

SECTOR1 SECTOR2 SECTOR3
Dx Dx
ANT1 ANT3 ANT4 ANT6
T T T T T T
R R R R R R
D D D D D D
U U U U U U
1 2 3 4 5 6
RF1 RF2
CPRI
1-3 BB1
CPRI BBU
4-6
2T2R COMBINED TRANSMIT MODE

TRDU=TRDU2x60-AWS
BBU=d2Uv5 subrack, eCCM/eCCM2,
2x bCEM,RUC V5
PRELIMINARY
Connect the CPRI cables between BB1 (CCM), RF1, and RF2 as described in the
following table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.3: Connect CPRI cables between BB1, RF1,
PRELIMINARY
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs and RF2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 13-1 CPRI cable connections between BB1, RF1, and RF2
From BB1 CCM CPRI CPRI cable (label To RF1 and RF2 TRDU CPRI PRI
ports cables) connector
OPTIC1 BB-RF1 RF1 TRDU 1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When completed, continue with the following procedure to connect RF cables between
TRDUs and antennas.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.4: Connect RF cables between TRDUs and
operation with TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs antennas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1.4: Connect RF cables between TRDUs and

antennas
Prerequisite
The antennas should already be installed and identified before performing this procedure.
Steps
Perform the following procedure to connect RF cables between TRDUs and antennas.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect RF cables between the TRDU TX1/RX1 and TX2/RX2 connections and the RF
cabinet, RF feedthru, connectors as described in the following tables.
For 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode, the following figure illustrates the RF cabling.
Figure 13-4 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode RF cabling

SECTOR1 SECTOR2 SECTOR3
Dx Dx
ANT1 ANT3 ANT4 ANT6
T T T T T T
R R R R R R
D D D D D D
U U U U U U
1 2 3 4 5 6
RF1 RF2
CPRI
1-3 BB1
CPRI BBU
4-6
2T2R COMBINED TRANSMIT MODE

TRDU=TRDU2x60-AWS
BBU=d2Uv5 subrack, eCCM/eCCM2,
2x bCEM,RUC V5
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.4: Connect RF cables between TRDUs and
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode, connect RF cables/50 ohm terminators as
described in the following table.
Table 13-2 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode TRDUs to RF feedthru connectors
Sector RF cabinet TRDU Connectors RF feedthru

connector (see
following figure)
1 RF1 TRDU 1 - TX1/RX1 ANT1
RF1 TRDU 1 - TX2/RX2 ANT2, leave
Terminator 1 unterminated
RF1 TRDU 2 - TX2/RX2 ANT4 leave
Terminator unterminated
Notes:
1. Remove cable from TRDU and attach terminator.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.4: Connect RF cables between TRDUs and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the top of the cabinet and the RF feedthru connectors.
Figure 13-5 RF feedthru connectors
Note: Screw on each RF connector finger tight, then use torque wrench to tighten to
2.3 Nm (20 in-lb). Use a second wrench to hold connector in place when securing
cable connections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect RF cables between the RF cabinet, RF feedthru connectors and the antennas as
described in the following tables.
For 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode, connect RF cables as described in the following
table.
Table 13-3 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode RF cables to antennas
Sector RF cabinet TRDU RF feedthru Antenna

Connectors connector
1 RF1 TRDU 1 - ANT1 ANT1
TX1/RX1
RF1 TRDU 1 - ANT2, No
TX2/RX2 connection
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2 connection
PRELIMINARY
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2 connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.4: Connect RF cables between TRDUs and
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 13-3 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode RF cables to antennas (continued)
Sector RF cabinet TRDU RF feedthru Antenna

Connectors connector
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2 connection
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2 connection
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2 connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to apply power to eNodeB.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.5: Apply power to eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1.5: Apply power to eNodeB

Steps
Perform the following procedure to apply power to the eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From eNodeB, turn power ON to the 9926 BBU as follows:

• With power switch on RUC/Fan Tray, turn power ON as follows:
• Without power switch on RUC/Fan Tray, turn the power ON at the PDP BBU circuit
breaker.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From eNodeB, observe the CCM status LED matrix and CPRI LEDs:
• If successful, check OMC for eNodeB status, if operational continue with the
following step.
• If unsuccessful: contact technical support.
Reference: Refer to, Appendix D, “LED status”, for CCM LED status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When completed, continue with the following procedure to license and activate the
feature.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.6: License and activate feature
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1.6: License and activate feature

Steps
Perform the following procedure to license and activate the feature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 License the TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs as follows:

1. Refer to, Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE RAN License Key Delivery Infrastructure (LKDI)
Customer License Manager User Guide, 9YZ-04152-0008-REZZA, to license the
necessary TRDU2x60-AWS TRDUs.
2. When completed, continue with the following step to activate and provision the
feature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Activate and provision the 2T2R Combined Transmit Mode operation.

Reference: Refer to Alcatel-Lucent 9400 LTE Radio Access Network Feature
Activation Procedure, 9YZ-04152-0011-RJZZA, to activate and provision, Feature ID
161187, 2x120W Tx MIMO Using Two TRDU2x60-AWS.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Upgrade 9412 eNodeB for Combined Transmit Mode Procedure 13-1.6: License and activate feature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Appendix A: References
Overview
Purpose
This appendix provides reference material for this document.
Contents
Reissue history A-1
Reissue history
Overview
The revision history of this document is described in the following paragraphs.
Release LR14.1.L Issue 0.05

in this issue.
Table A-1 Revision history for LR14.1.L Issue 0.05
Location Revision
Procedure 4-3.2: “Remove CCM and Step 13/7. Added to remove bCEM before software
bCEM(s) using NEM” (p. 4-36) load installation.
Procedure 4-4.3: “Remove CCM and
bCEM(s) using 5620 SAM” (p. 4-66)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary A-1
PRELIMINARY References Reissue history
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1 Revision history for LR14.1.L Issue 0.05 (continued)
Location Revision
Procedure 4-3.4: “Install bCEM(s) Step 3. Added to install bCEM after software load
and restore 9412 eNodeB using installation.
NEM” (p. 4-43) Step 4/5/6. Updated step to include eCCM-U, eCCM2,
Procedure 4-4.5: “Restore CCM with and eCCM2-HR ENBEquipment parameters.
aligned software using 5620 SAM”
(p. 4-73)
Procedure 4-4.6: “Restore CCM with
mis-aligned software using 5620
SAM” (p. 4-80)
Release LR14.1.L Issue 0.03

in this issue.
Table A-2 Revision history for LR14.1.L Issue 0.03
Location Revision
Procedure 4-1: “Soft Shutdown Added 128237 eNB Soft Shutdown
eNodeB/Cells” (p. 4-3)
Procedure 4-3: “Replace CCM using Added 171136 eCCM2-HR
NEM” (p. 4-24)
Procedure 4-4: “Replace CCM using
5620 SAM” (p. 4-49)
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
Appendix B: Product
conformance statements
Overview
Purpose
This appendix describes the product conformance statements that apply to the BBU d2U
(Alcatel-Lucent 9926 Base Band Unit).
In regions such as North America and the European Union, the statements that are
required are determined primarily by national or multi-national regulations. However, in
some regions, contract terms determine which statements are required.
The presence of the statement indicates that the product does comply with that statement
wherever it is required to do so.
Contents
United States B-2

Canada B-4
European Union B-5
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary B-1
PRELIMINARY Product conformance statements United States
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
United States
Introduction
The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the 9926
LTE BBU/9926 BBU V2 when deployed in the United States.
Federal Communications Commission

Important! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Alcatel-Lucent, Inc.
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
.
47 CFR FCC Part 15
This device complies with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Part 15 Class A)
Important! This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to CFR 47 Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protections against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the
user's expense.
Product safety conformance

This equipment is safety certified for the United States of America by a Nationally
Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) accredited by the US Department of Labor,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), such as UL, CSA, or others.
The product bears this certification mark of this certification laboratory on its main
nameplate label. Should the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) require prior or
additional verification of this certification, a product certificate of compliance can be
obtained from the specific certification laboratory by the business/product unit Applicant
PRELIMINARY
for the product.

Any modifications to this equipment are not permitted without review and written official
authorization from the specific certification laboratory. Unauthorized changes may violate
the product safety certification. Modifications or changes authorized by official CN/CNN
are assumed to have received prior approval from this Lab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Product conformance statements United States
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established. For more information
regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific
jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services – Environmental Health and
Safety organization.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Product conformance statements United States
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Material content compliance
The following notification applies to Alcatel-Lucent products distributed for sale, resale
or use. This product, part, or both may include a lithium-manganese dioxide battery,
which contains very small amounts of a perchlorate substance. Special handling may
apply.
For California: Perchlorate Material -special handling may apply. See
http:\\www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorat
Canada
Introduction
LTE BBU/9926 BBU V2 when deployed in Canada.
Industry Canada
ICES-003: Interference-Causing Equipment Standard Digital Apparatus
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IC CS-03: Specification for Terminal Equipment, Terminal Systems, Network
Protection Devices, Connection Arrangements and Hearing Aids Compatibility
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
RF approval
• RSS-132: Cellular Telephones Employing New Technologies Operating in the Bands
824-849 MHz and 869-894 MHz
The term “IC” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the
Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
• RSS-133: PCS Radio Standards Specifications
The term “IC” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the
Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Product safety conformance

This equipment is safety certified for Canada by a laboratory accredited by the Standards
PRELIMINARY
Council of Canada (SCC), such as CSA, UL, or others. The product bears this
certification mark of this certification laboratory on its main nameplate label. Should the
local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) require prior or additional verification of this
certification, a product certificate of compliance can be obtained from the specific
certification laboratory by the business/product unit Applicant for the product.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Product conformance statements Canada
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Any modifications to this equipment are not permitted without review and written official
authorization from the specific certification laboratory. Unauthorized changes may violate
the product safety certification. Modifications or changes authorized by official CN/CNN
are assumed to have received prior approval from this Lab.

European Union
Introduction
LTE BBU/9926 BBU V2 bearing the CE Marking when deployed in the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity for radio and telecommunication terminal equipment under the scope
of Directive 1999/5/EC
Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that the equipment documented in this publication is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2004/108/EC for EMC requirements. The technical documentation as required by the
Conformity Assessment procedure is kept at the Alcatel-Lucent location which is
responsible for this product. For more information, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent
Customer Service Organization.
CE marking
This product has been CE-marked in accordance with the following European Directive:
• 204/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
EMC compliance
The equipment complies with the following EMC and EMI specifications:
•
PRELIMINARY
EN 55022 ed. 2006, Class A

• EN 300 386 V1.4.1: 2008.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Product conformance statements European Union
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Class A warning statement
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Protection requirements of Directive 2004/108/EC statement
This equipment is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
Product safety
The equipment complies with the following product safety specifications:
• EN 60950-1 ed. 2005, 2006 + A11 (2009)
• IEC 60950-1: 2005
• EN 60215 ed. 1989 + A1:1992 + A4: 1994
• IEC 60215 ed. 1987 + A1:1990 + A2: 1993

Recycling / take-back / disposal of product

Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below when put on the
market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end of their useful
life, in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation. They shall not
be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be
contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human
health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: For electronic products put on the market in the European Union, a solid bar
under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the market
after 13 August 2005.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Product conformance statements European Union
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For batteries put on the market in the European Union, a chemical symbol Hg
(mercury), Cd (cadmium), or Pb (lead), or a combination of those symbols, beneath
the cross-out wheeled bin indicates that the battery contains the corresponding heavy
metals.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products
displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers. For information regarding take-back of
equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more information regarding the requirements for
recycling/disposal of a product, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent account manager.
Visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback)
web page, or contact Alcatel-Lucent Takeback Support (mail to:takeback@alcatel-
lucent.com). For technical information on product treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent
Recycling Information (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_recycling) web page.
Material content compliance

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, “Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances” (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium,
and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic equipment. This Directive applies
to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU market after 1 July 2006, with
various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network infrastructure
equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU after 1 July 2006 comply with the
EU RoHS Directive.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Product conformance statements European Union
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Appendix C: Abbreviations
Overview
Purpose
This appendix lists abbreviations used in this document and the expanded form of those
abbreviations.
Contents
Abbreviations C-1
Abbreviations
A
AHJ authority having jurisdiction
B
BB base band
BBU base band unit
BeO beryllium oxide
C
CB circuit breaker
CC Comcode
PRELIMINARY
CIQ Customer Information Questionnaire

Code Server It is the storage and transfer location from either the NEM PC (LMT) or
the SAM to obtain software loads.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary C-1
PRELIMINARY Abbreviations Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D
DHCP Dynamic Host Control Protocol
E
bCEM broadband Channel Element Module
eAM enhanced Alarm Module
eCCM-U enhanced Core Controller Module
eCCM2 enhanced Channel Element Module-2
EMI electromagnetic interference
eNodeB (eNB) evolved NodeB
9412 eNodeB
ESD electrostatic discharge
F
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDA/CDRH Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological
Health
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
G
GPS Global Positioning System
I
IEAM Integrating External Alarm Module
Internal SFTP server Secure File Transfer Protocol server
Part of the NEM software installation to provide a secure file transfer capability between
the NEM PC (LMT) and the eNodeB to download backup data files and software updates.
L
LMT Local Management Terminal
LTE Long Term Evolution
PRELIMINARY
LTE RAN (eUTRAN, E-UTRAN) Long Term Evolution radio access network
M
MIB machine information base
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Abbreviations Abbreviations
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N
NE ID network entity identifier
NEM Network Element Manager
NRTL Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory
NEM PC Technician laptop, also referred to as Local Management Terminal (LMT), that
includes the necessary software and other data to support the replacement and/or
update of a eNodeB in the field.
O
OLCS Online Customer Support
OMC Operations and Maintenance Center
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
P
PDP power distribution panel
R
RAN radio access network
RBP Rear Backplane
RRH remote radio heads
RUC Rack User Commissioning
RUC/Fan Tray
RST Reset
S
SFTP server See Internal SFTP server
SLI Single Logistical Item
STAT status
T
TRDU Transmit/Receive Duplexer Unit
PRELIMINARY
X
XMS (eXtended Management System) 9453 XMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary C-3
PRELIMINARY Abbreviations Abbreviations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
PRELIMINARY
Appendix D: LED status
Overview
Purpose
This appendix describes the functional status of the CCM and CEM LEDs in the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU, and TRDU LEDs in the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB
Compact or Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB Compact Smart.
Contents
eCCM-U LED status D-1

eCCM-U Model 2 LED status D-5
bCEM LED status D-11
TRDU LED status D-13
eCCM-U LED status

Purpose
The following tables provide an interpretation of the eCCM-U LED matrix and eCCM-U
CPRI LEDs.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary D-1
PRELIMINARY LED status eCCM-U LED status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eCCM-U LED matrix
The following figure shows the LED matrix on the eCCM-U.
Figure D-1 eCCM-U LED matrix

bCEM-U (1,2,3)
LED STATUS
RED GREEN
eCCM-U LED
MATRIX
CMA
SYNC
MDA
PCM
CMA PCM
MDA
SYNC
eCCM-U LED
MATRIX
9926 BBU in 9926 BBU in
9412 eNodeB Equipment Rack
CMA LED status

CMA (top row of matrix) The two left-most LEDs light after the eCCM-U has fully
booted. If they are not on, reboot the 9926 BBU by cycling power.
SYNC LED status

The SYNC LEDs show the status of the drop loads and GPS synchronization during
integration.
SYNC LED status during D30 software loads
The following table verifies the GPS synchronization when the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
is booting during D30 software loads.
Table D-1 SYNC LED status during D30 software loads
SYNC Description What to do

(2nd row/
column)
Solid Green When the SYNC LEDs are solid No action required.
green the 9926 BBU timing is
PRELIMINARY
Locked.
Off When the 9926 BBU is first booted No action required.
on D30 software there should not be
any LEDs on the SYNC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
LED status eCCM-U LED status
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table D-1 SYNC LED status during D30 software loads (continued)

(2nd row/
column)
Flashing Green When the SYNC LEDs are flashing No action required.
green the 9926 BBU is acquiring
GPS signal but still Unlocked.
Solid Red When the SYNC LEDs are solid red Check for GPS signal, cable
the 9926 BBU is unable to detect connections.
the GPS signal.
SYNC LEDs status during D50 and D60 software loads

The following table verifies the GPS synchronization when the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
is booting during D50 software loads.
Table D-2 SYNC LEDs status during D50 and D60 software loads

(2nd row/
column)
Off When the eNB is first booted on D50 No action required.
software there should not be any LEDs
on the SYNC.
Flashing In D50, during the power up, the eNB database.xml file is not integrated.
Amber does not have a database.xml file Complete integration.
which is required to establish GPS
lock. The SYNC LEDs flash amber
until the eNB is integrated.
Solid Green In D50, solid green SYNC LEDs No action required.
indicate the eNB has a valid NOTE: Solid green only appears after
database.xml file and has GPS lock. integration is complete.
eCCM-U MDA/PCM LEDs

The MDA and PCM LEDs are not used.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LED status eCCM-U LED status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eCCM-U CPRI LEDs
The following table shows the CPRI LED status for the CPRI cables between the TRDU
or RRH. The LEDs are located just above the SFP ports.
Table D-3 eCCM-U CPRI LEDs
TX LED RX LED Description What to do

Solid Green Solid Green Indicates an active signal No action require.
between TRDU/RRH and Check TRDU/RRH CPRI LEDs
eCCM. for the same indication for normal
operation.
Off Solid Green Indicates an active RX Check SFP, cables, and
signal and no TX signal connections. If necessary, replace
between TRDU/RRH and SFP and/or cables. If that fails,
eCCM. test and/or replace
TRDU/RRH/eCCM.
Check TRDU/RRH CPRI LEDs
for the same indication.
Solid Green Off Indicates an active TX Check SFP, cables, and
signal and no RX signal connections. If necessary, replace
between TRDU/RRH and SFP and/or cables. If that fails,
eCCM. test and/or replace
TRDU/RRH/eCCM.
Off Off Indicates no signal between Check SFP, cables, and
TRDU/RRH and eCCM. connections. If necessary, replace
SFP and/or cables. If that fails,
test and/or replace
TRDU/RRH/eCCM.
eCCM-U GigE MDA port LED status

GigE MDA ports have LEDs that indicate signal activity.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED status eCCM-U Model 2 LED status
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eCCM-U Model 2 LED status

Purpose
The following provides an interpretation of the eCCM-U Model 2 LED matrix and
eCCM-U Model 2 CPRI LEDs.
eCCM2 LED Matrix

The following figure shows the LED matrix on the eCCM2.
Figure D-2 eCCM2 LED Matrix
eCCM2 CMA LED status

The following figure shows the operation of the CMA 3 and CMA 4 LEDs which display
the status of the eCCM2 self tests, software downloads, and boots.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LED status eCCM-U Model 2 LED status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure D-3 eCCM2 CMA 3 and 4
The following figure shows the operation of the CMA 2 LED which displays the software
technology loaded on the eCCM2 board.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure D-4 eCCM2 CMA 2
The following figure shows the operation of the CMA 1 LED which displays the activity
status of the eCCM2 board.
Figure D-5 eCCM2 CMA 1
PRELIMINARY
eCCM2 SYNC LED status

The following figures show the operation of the SYNC LEDs which display the status of
the GPS receiver.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure D-6 eCCM2 SYNC 4

PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: This external source can be a slave eCCM2 that would acquire its
synchronization from a master eCCM2.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eCCM2 LNK LED status

The following figure shows the operation of the LNK (link) LEDs which display which
source is currently selected to discipline the local oscillator.
Figure D-10 eCCM2 LNK 1, 2, 3, and 4
If blinking, the local oscillator is in holdover, meaning it has temporarily lost

communication with the source identified by the blinking LED.
If red, the holdover time has been exceeded.
eCCM2 CPRI LEDs

There are two LEDs per CPRI to show port status (SFP Tx enabled - green; SFP Rx
detected signalling - green).
eCCM2 SFP LEDs

PRELIMINARY
There are two LEDs per SFP backhaul to show port status (SFP Tx enabled - green; SFP
Rx detected signalling - green).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eCCM2 RJ-45 port LEDs
There are two LEDs per RJ-45 port to show link and activity status (link is connected -
green; data in transmission - blinking yellow).
bCEM LED status

Purpose
The following information provides an interpretation of the status LED configurations for
the bCEM.
Check four LED bCEM status

Determine whether the bCEM requires replacement by observing the condition of the
status LEDs on the faceplate as described in the following table. The LED column shows
the condition of the LED matrix. The Status column indicates the status of the bCEM
based on the illumination of the four-LED matrix. The What to do column describes how
to react to the status displayed by the LED matrix.
Table D-4 Four LED bCEM status
LED Status What to do

1 Power off. Check RUC/Fan Tray and/or PDP power switch.
• If power is turned off to the BBU, cycle power and
check for change in status.
– If status changes from LED 2 to LED 8, bCEM is
functioning properly, replacement procedure
completed.
– If status changes to LED 9, or LED 10, bCEM has
failed, continue with procedure and/or replace
bCEM.
• If power is turned on to the BBU, bCEM has failed,
continue with procedure and replace bCEM.
2 Power on with bCEM Allow bCEM to continue processing on to LED 3.
restart.
.
PRELIMINARY
3 Beginning startup. Allow bCEM to continue processing on to LED 4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LED status bCEM LED status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table D-4 Four LED bCEM status (continued)
LED Status What to do

4 BISTS starting. Allow bCEM to continue processing on to LED 5.
.
5 After BISTS started Allow bCEM to continue processing on to LED 6.
and until end of
startup.
.
6 Software upgrade in Allow bCEM to continue processing on to LED 8.
progress, with bCEM
ok.
.
7 Software upgrade in Allow bCEM to continue processing on to LED 8.
progress, with bCEM
partially not ok.
.
8 Startup completed. If bCEM successfully completes startup, bCEM is operating
bCEM ok. properly. No further changes/updates are required.
.
9 BISTS failed (bCEM Cycle power and follow LED status. If BISTS fails again,
partially not ok). continue with procedure and replace bCEM.
.
10 bCEM out of service Cycle power and follow LED status. If bCEM goes out of
(internal failure). service again, continue with procedure and replace bCEM.
.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED status TRDU LED status
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRDU LED status

Purpose
The following tables provide an interpretation of the TRDU General Status LEDs and
TRDU CPRI Status LEDs.
TRDU LEDs
The following figure shows the location of the TRDU General Status LEDs (General
Status LEDs) and TRDU CPRI Status LEDs (Primary CPRI Connector (to CCM)).
TRDU General Status LEDs

The following tables provide an interpretation of the TRDU General Status LEDs. There
is a cluster of three adjacent LEDs, Green, Yellow, and Red, that indicate the general
status of the TRDU.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LED status TRDU LED status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table D-5 TRDU General Status LEDs
Green Yellow Red LED TRDU Description What to do

LED LED Status
Initial Power has been applied and no Wait for startup to
Power On critical failures or faults have been be completed.
detected. TRDU tests General
Status LEDs by illuminating them
for at least 1 second.
Normal Power applied, normal operation No action required.
Operation with no critical faults or failure
detected.
Standby Power applied, no critical failures Wait until the
or faults detected, but TRDU is in system enables unit
Standby mode and is not before continuing.
transmitting.
Critical BLST, self test, diagnostics, or Perform the
HW Failure monitoring has detected a critical following
hardware failure that prevents procedures to
TRDU from operating. The failure replace the TRDU.
is non-recoverable. This covers
both BL.0 ST Failure and Critical
Failure. Replace TRDU.
Partial or One or more hardware assets or If degradation is
Non- functions have failed in a affecting network
Critical non-recoverable fashion, but TRDU performance,
Failure is still operational in a degraded perform the
mode. following
procedures to
replace the TRDU.
Temporary One or more hardware assets or If the faults are not
HW functions in TRDU have a cleared, perform
Critical recoverable hardware fault. TRDU the following
Fault is not operational now, but should procedures to
recover in time. This covers both replace the TRDU.
Under-Temperature Warm-Up
warning and Over-Temperature
Critical Shutdown. Wait until
PRELIMINARY
hardware fault has cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LED status TRDU LED status
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table D-5 TRDU General Status LEDs (continued)
Green Yellow Red LED TRDU Description What to do

LED LED Status
Slave CPRI Slave CPRI link is not Check security of
Link synchronized. Check external slave the CPRI cables
External CPRI link connections. connected to the
Failure TRDU and
eCCM-U.
External For either EAC port, either antenna Check internal and
Antenna has a VSWR fault or antenna cable external RF
Failure is not properly connected. cabling. Antennas
may be faulty.
Software TRDU is undergoing an NVM Wait until update
Download firmware or software update. has completed to
TRDU cannot provide service while verify normal
downloading. operation.
Back- TRDU is undergoing an NVM No action required.
ground firmware or software update.
Software TRDU is presently providing
Download service.
No Power TRDU is not receiving DC power. Check external
Supplied power supply and
connections.
External TRDU is receiving DC power but Check external
Power the source is out-of-range. power supply
Supply voltage.
Failure
TRDU CPRI Status LEDs

The following table provides an interpretation of the TRDU CPRI PRI/SEC Status LED.
There is a multi-color LED next to each of the two CPRI link connections. The
multi-color LED is capable of displaying Green and Red.
Table D-6 TRDU CPRI PRI/SEC Status LED
CPRI LED CPRI Status Description What to do

PRELIMINARY
Andrews TRDU
Active CPRI link active and No action required.
working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY LED status TRDU LED status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table D-6 TRDU CPRI PRI/SEC Status LED (continued)
CPRI LED CPRI Status Description What to do

Failure, CPRI link failed or not Check operation and/or CPRI
Alarm, or not connected cable, eCCM-U, and/or TRDU.
present Replace as required.
Inactive Power off When 9412 eNodeB is
operational, turn power on,
and/or check/replace power
connections.
When 9412 eNodeB is not
operational (power off), no action
is required.
MTI TRDU
Active CPRI link active and No action required.
working
Failure or CPRI link failed Check operation and/or replace
Alarm CPRI cable, eCCM-U, and/or
TRDU.
Inactive or CPRI link not connected When 9412 eNodeB is
not connected or power off operational, check power is on,
check power connections and/or
check CPRI connection.
When 9412 eNodeB is not
operational, no action is required.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Appendix E: Update 9926 BBU
software loads
Overview
Purpose
This appendix describes how to bring an 9926 BBU software load up to the current LTE
RAN loads on the system.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD
Release Notes, 9YZ-04152-0001-FMZZA, for “information on the software deliverables
supported in LR14.1.L” for 9926 BBU and NEM “upgrade paths” for “officially
supported eNodeB upgrade paths” and “load parity”.
Important notice
Read through this section and prepare the NEM PC with the appropriate NEM application
and the current LTE RAN loads on the system before going to the 9926 BBU. Keep
previous applications and software loads on the NEM PC if a fallback is required.
Contents
Required software and eCCM-U identification E-2

Procedure E-1: Establish connection between NEM and eCCM-U E-4
Procedure E-2: Check eCCM for current LTE RAN load on the system E-5
Procedure E-3: Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM PC E-6
Procedure E-4: Download release notes E-9
Procedure E-5: Update to current LTE RAN load on system E-10
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary E-1
PRELIMINARY Update 9926 BBU software loads Required software and eCCM-U identification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required software and eCCM-U identification

General
The following tables highlight the latest versions of 9926 BBU tools and software
required to update the software loads on the eCCM-U. All of the specified items can be
downloaded from ALED.
Required NEM software

supported in LR14.1.L” for NEM.
Refer to 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide, for
instructions to install the NEM software.
Note: Review the following information about NEM:
• Unlike RMT, NEM supports multiple 9926 BBU software loads, so 9926 BBU
software is not packaged with NEM and must be downloaded separately. Keep
previous loads in case a fallback to a previous release is required.
• The NEM installation program does not remove the old version of NEM, but
because each NEM creates its own folder there are no issues with keeping
multiple versions on a laptop.
• The Java software needed to run NEM is loaded along with the application.
9926 BBU current LTE RAN load on system

supported in LR14.1.L” for 9926 BBU “upgrade paths” for “officially supported eNodeB
upgrade paths” and “load parity”.
Note: Monitor LTE release notes and alerts/flashes for future updates to the 9926
BBU current LTE RAN load on system
Note: For Carrier Aggregation upgrade: In case a third bCEM is installed in the
9926 BBU and Carrier Aggregation feature is not required, lock the bCEM.
Important! Unlock the bCEM and make sure it is operational before:
• Performing an inter or intra-release software upgrade
•
PRELIMINARY
Activating the Carrier Aggregation feature
Identifying eCCM-U types and compatible software loads

Important! The replacement eCCM-U type (factory or spared) must be identified
before being installed in the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Update 9926 BBU software loads Required software and eCCM-U identification
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are different versions of the eCCM-U that support specific software loads. The
eCCM-U type is identified by the part number (SLI) barcode found on the eCCM
faceplate as follows:
• For P0 eCCM SLI, 3JR20073CAxxnn labeled eCCM-Us (see figure), software loads
from LA2.0 and on are supported.
• For P2 eCCM SLI, 3JR20073CBxxnn labeled eCCM-Us (see figure), software loads
from LA3.0 and on are supported.
Attention: Do not install a P2 eCCM-U in a network running LA2.0 software loads.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-1: Establish connection between NEM and
eCCM-U
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure E-1: Establish connection between NEM and

eCCM-U
Steps
Perform the following procedure to establish connection between NEM and eCCM-U.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the NEM PC to the eCCM-U PORT1 with a RJ45 NEM Test Cable. Open NEM
and login with the following information:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the 9926 BBU is offline and the equipped bCEM are reporting in the NEM
Tree View.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Continue with the following procedure to check on the eCCM software loads.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-2: Check eCCM for current LTE RAN load on the
PRELIMINARY
system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure E-2: Check eCCM for current LTE RAN load on the
system
Steps
Perform the following procedure to check the “Running SW File Name” and the “Not
Running SW File Name” software loads listed on the eCCM-U.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From NEM PC, select the Root View window and click SW Properties tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Compare and note the listed software loads on the 9926 BBU with the software loads
listed in the LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD Release Notes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-3: Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM
PC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure E-3: Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM PC

Overview
Important! This procedure must be performed from a location with Internet/intranet
access to the On-Line Customer Support (OLCS) and Alcatel-Lucent Electronic
Delivery (ALED) website or the customer software repository.
NEM supports multiple versions of 9926 BBU software. So 9926 BBU loads are not
included in the NEM and they must be downloaded separately.
The 9926 BBUs may be shipped from the factory or taken out of stores with different
software versions. Several different 9926 BBU software packages may need to be loaded
onto the NEM PC to support the various software update steps which may be required.
Note: The last few numbers in the 9926 BBU Software load names (the “E” numbers)
restart with every “D” number (for example, ENBLA200D30E01800 is older than
ENBLA200D50E01100).
Required 9926 BBU software loads

Note: The folder and filenames used in the following procedure are examples, refer to
the release notes for specific filenames.
Steps
Perform the following steps to download the software loads onto the NEM PC. .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On the NEM PC, create a sub-folder for each software load, like C:/My
Downloads/eNBSW/<sw-sub-folder>, like the following sub-folders:
• LA5.0D30E01800 (for ENBLA0500D30E01800 srs.tar.gz)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open OLCS website, https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/?path=//

index3_0.html:
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Login as Registered User with user name and password. LTE Solution Releases page is
displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-3: Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM
PRELIMINARY
PC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the current Software Downloads page, for example, LTE LE4.0.02 Software
Downloads. LTE Solution Release LE3.0.02 Downloads page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select software load matching current network load, for example, 9926 BBU E6506.
Electronic Delivery page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select Product Lookup next to the Please select a Product/Sub-category field. Product
Index (Alphabetical Listing) page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In Product Name Look-up field, enter 9926 BBU and click Go. Product Name Lookup
Results page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click 9926 BBU. 9926 BBU page is displayed. Close Product Name Lookup Results
page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select Downloads: Electronic Delivery. Electronic Delivery page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 At Please navigate through hierarchy to download field, select release generic, for
example LR14.1.L.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Next field, select maintenance load (MNCLx) for the update. Look through each load
until the correct load is found, for example LA5.0.2_MNCL5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Next field, select subload, for example LA05.00.70.00.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Next field, select tar’d file, for example END_LA500_D50_E06506.srs.tar.gz. Click

Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 On next page, click Download (not DownloadPlus).

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 On next page, click Accept and Submit. Download process page is displayed. File is
downloaded to C:\\temp or select desired folder for download.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-3: Download 9926 BBU software loads to NEM
PC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 When completed, Download Succeeded message is displayed. Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Return to LTE Solution Releases page. Leave page open form next procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-4: Download release notes
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure E-4: Download release notes

Steps
Perform the following procedure to download release notes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Return to main page and select View List. Product Index (Alphabetical Listing) page is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In Product Name Look-up field, enter 9926 BBU and click Go. Product Name Lookup
Results page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click 9926 BBU. 9926 BBU page is displayed. Close Product Name Lookup Results
page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select Manuals and Guides. Library of Manuals and Guides for 9926 BBU page is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 At Release field select All and Content Type field select Release Information. A list of
release notes are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Right-click “pdf” for the desired release notes, for example 418-000-005_LA5.0_E06506.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select Target As window is displayed. Select desired location (folder) and click Save.
Release notes downloaded.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 When completed, logout of OLCS and continue with the following procedure.
Reference: Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products
LR14.1.L FDD Release Notes, 9YZ-04152-0001-FMZZA, for “information on the
software deliverables supported in LR14.1.L” for 9926 BBU and NEM “upgrade
paths” for “officially supported eNodeB upgrade paths” and “load parity”.
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-5: Update to current LTE RAN load on system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure E-5: Update to current LTE RAN load on system

Requirements
Note: The folder and filenames used in the following procedure are examples, refer to
the release notes for specific filenames.
Steps
Perform the following the steps to update the 9926 BBU to the current LTE RAN load
your system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the code server as follows:

1. Select Configuration > Set Code Server and click Yes on question message. The Set
Code Server is displayed.
Note: If the SW Replacement button is grayed out, it means 9926 BBU is not set with
“Allocate Configuration Rights”. Set this via NEM menu Configuration > Allocate
Configuration Rights. This enables the SW Replacement option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the NEM Root View, select the SW Properties tab, click SW Replacement, and click
Yes to use internal SFTP server (NEM PC or SAM as the source location).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Navigate to the appropriate file folder, for example ENBLA0500D30E40400.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the appropriate file, for example#BI_enb#FT_OMsdf#FI_sdf#FV_ENB_LA0500_

PRELIMINARY
D30_E40400, and Click Open to start the download.

Note: Uncheck the Unattended Running box.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-5: Update to current LTE RAN load on system
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When the download is complete, click Activate. The 9926 BBU reboots and the NEM
connection is lost. The activation takes up to 15 minutes depending on number of files
being installed.
Note: If the NEM connection is not automatically re-established after 15 minutes,
then close the Software Update window, restart the NEM connection and re-open
Software Update window to continue.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Accept to complete the software replacement, when the NEM connection returns.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify the new software replacement has been complete (in SW Properties tab). The
running software state should be “installed”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click the Tree View icon in the NEM window. This displays the individual hardware
modules.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click HW Modules on the left panel of NEM.

Note: Monitor the bCEM and RFM (TRDUs or RRHs) status with NEM and wait
until all units have a green checkmark (enabled) next to them. RRHs are not displayed
in NEM until they are powered up after the BBU software update is completed.
Important! The eCCM (CB), all equipped bCEMs (BBs), and RFMs (TRDUs and
RRHs) must be enabled. If a unit fails to initialize, right click on it in the right panel
then select Reset Equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select Configuration > Release Configuration Rights. This disables the SW Replacement
option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 When completed with the software updates, return to the eCCM-U replacement
procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Update 9926 BBU software loads Procedure E-5: Update to current LTE RAN load on system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Appendix F: Recommission 9926
BBU
Overview
Purpose
This appendix describes how to recommission the 9926 BBU after replacing a failed
CCM or RUC/Fan Tray.
Contents
Requirements F-2
Documentation Requirements F-2
Hardware Requirements F-3
Software Requirements F-4
Recommissioning scenarios F-6
Procedure F-1: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with NEM F-7
Procedure F-2: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with delta work F-13
order
Procedure F-3: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with full snapshot F-18
file
Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self commissioning F-23
Procedure F-5: Set OAM Routing F-27 PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary F-1
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Overview
Requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Requirements
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the document and software requirements for an 9926 BBU
recommissioning.
Contents
Documentation Requirements F-2

Hardware Requirements F-3
Software Requirements F-4
Documentation Requirements
Overview
Refer to the following documents to recommission the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU:
• LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD Release Notes
• Customer Information Sheet (CIS)
• Customer Information Questionnaire (CIQ) or equivalent transport and
commissioning data from the customer network and design engineering department
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Recommission 9926 BBU Hardware Requirements
PRELIMINARY
Requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware Requirements
Overview
Check the eNodeB for the following LR13.x required components and settings:
• The control board is type eCCM. Hardware variant of the eCCM module:
– Enhanced sync eCCM (3JR20073CA/CB):
With eNodeB power ON, the two left-most LEDs of the top row (CMA) will be
lit. All the LEDs in the SYNC row should be lit green to indicate clock
synchronization.
GPS: All the LEDs in the SYNC row should be lit green to indicate GPS lock. If
these are red, there is a problem. The NEM will not connect. Check the GPS
antenna or splitter cable to determine possible loss of GPS signal.
1588 V2 synchronization: When this feature is on, synchronization comes from
packets delivered from an external server using the two Gigabit Ethernet ports.
The eNodeB automatically discovers the 1588 server addresses. In case of failure
of the master server, the eNodeB is able to resynchonize with the secondary
server. If synchronization fails with both servers, the eNodeB provides alarms and
then switches to the internal clock or other source.
Reference: Refer to the 9400 LTE RAN eNodeB 1588 V2 Synchronization
Reconfiguration Procedure for details.
Note 1: The choice of clock source is defined from the 5620 SAM after
commissioning. The option chosen and its status are then displayable from the
NEM.
Note 2: There is an eCCM variant equipped with enhanced OCXO (that is,
oscillator) that provides hold-over capability in case of a clock synchronization
failure. During this major alarm, the eCCM functions in free-running mode
(displayable from the NEM Clock Properties tab), using the OXCO for
synchronization. A critical alarm is raised when the frequency hold-over is within
12 hours of exceeding the OCXO capabilities. Another critical alarm is raised
when the OCXO capability is reached and RF transmission is terminated.
• The modem board is type bCEM.
There is a single hardware variant of the bCEM:
– Up to three bCEMs can be installed in the eNodeB.
PRELIMINARY
– Does not support dual technology

– From the top of the faceplate, LED1 (red or off) and LED 2 (green or off) indicate
the board status. LED3 is the application marker (green = LTE, orange =
WCDMA). LED4 indicates board action (blinking or fixed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Hardware Requirements
Requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The eNodeB can be equipped with an optional Receiver Diversity Expansion Module
(RDEM) installed with an RRH2x. The RDEM adds two receive RF paths (that is,
antenna ports Rx3 and Rx4) to the RRH2x. Note: This feature provides just the hardware.
The software for the RDEM is not yet supported.
Once the software is supported, the RDEM will support the following:
• The RDEM allows the eNodeB to support LTE cells in a 2X4 MIMO configuration or
LTE cells configured to use a 2X2 operating mode.
• The RDEM makes the RRH2x hardware-ready to support two sectors in a 1X2 SIMO
configuration (that is, 1 Tx Path and two Rx Paths). The cells assigned to an RRH2x
is this configuration must be in the same frequency band.
• The RDEM becomes an integral part of the RRH2x. It is not seen as a new object in
the OAM model.
• The Rx paths supported by the RDEM will not have TMAs.
• RRH2x software supports Tx and Rx VSWR tests.
• Verification of the Rx3 and Rx4 cable connectivity is provided.
LTE and CDMA Baseband Unit (BBU) operations are possible on the same RRH/TRDU.
Each CDMA/LTE Multi-Standard Radio Equipment (MSRE) has a direct connection to
each BBU. Configurations may include daisy-chained MSREs. In this case only the last
MSRE in the chain is connected to LTE and the other MSREs in the chain support
CDMA only and are managed only by the CDMA management system.
Note: The LTE BBUs configured in this manner are commissioned in a manner
similar to other LTE BBUs, except that an LTE BBU at the end of a daisy-chain will
have the RFM Control Mode parameter on an RRH/TRDU RFM Table set to
“Secondary” instead of the default setting of “Standalone”. The RFM Control Mode
cannot be “Primary” for LTE.
Software Requirements
eNodeB software
For the current LTE RAN software updates, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB
Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L FDD Release Notes, for details.
To update the eNodeB LTE RAN software from 5620 SAM, refer to 5620 SAM LTE RAN
User Guide, Chapter, NE maintenance, for details.
PRELIMINARY
The eNodeB software can be downloaded to the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM or NEM PC
from the Alcatel-Lucent Electronic Delivery (ALED) website. Refer to Appendix E,
“Update 9926 BBU software loads” for the eNodeB software download procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommission 9926 BBU Software Requirements
PRELIMINARY
Requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
During a “Factory Mode” commissioning of the 9926 BBU, an automatic eNodeB
software upgrade (taking one issue of software to another issue of the same software) will
be started. The new eNodeB software must be present on the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM
client for this to occur.
NEM software
The current NEM software should be installed on the NEM PC. Refer to 9400 LTE RAN
eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User Guide for installation and configuration
procedures. Refer to Alcatel-Lucent LTE eNodeB Macro and Metro Products LR14.1.L
FDD Release Notes, for current NEM software details.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the available recommissioning scenarios for the eNodeB.
Contents
Procedure F-1: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with NEM F-7

Procedure F-2: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with delta work F-13
order
Procedure F-3: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with full snapshot F-18
file
Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self commissioning F-23
Procedure F-5: Set OAM Routing F-27
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-1: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site
PRELIMINARY
Recommissioning scenarios with NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure F-1: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site with

NEM
Purpose
This procedure describes the recommissioning scenario for provisioned eNodeBs using a
local NEM to manually recommission the alpha parameters on the eNodeB. This
procedure is applicable to eNodeBs with a fixed IP address and no IPsec on the OAM
interface.
Required alpha parameters for fixed OAM IP address recommissioning

The following table lists the alpha parameters needed when using the Fixed OAM IP
address NEM scenario with the NEM Commissioning Wizard. Use the appropriate list
based on the eNodeB software and the OAM IP version. The following data must be
obtained prior to recommissioning with the Fixed OAM IP commissioning.
Table F-1 Fixed OAM IP address alpha parameters
Software load Fixed OAM IP address parameters

LA5.0 and Later (IPv4) Parameters for LA5.0/TA6.0/LA6.0/LR13.1
loads using IPv4 OAM IP Addresses:
• OAM IP Address
• OAM Gateway IP Address
• Gateway Netmask
• OAM VLAN ID
LA5.0 and Later (IPv6) Parameters for LA5.0/LA6.0/ LR13.1 loads
using IPv6 OAM IP Addresses:
• OAM IP Address
• Routing Prefix Length
• OAM VLAN ID
Verify eNodeB software release

Perform the following the steps to verify the required software release is running on the
PRELIMINARY
eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect the NEM PC to CCM PORT 1 using the NEM Test Cable and start NEM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-1: Recommission provisioned eNodeB on-site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: A standard Ethernet cable cannot be used for commissioning. The NEM Test
Cable must be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure all the software identified in the following tables, are loaded on the NEM PC, as
applicable.
Table F-2 Macro eNodeB Minimum Commissioning Loads
Macro eNodeB Release Macro eNodeB Minimum Recommended NEM

Commissioning Load
LA6.0 LA5.0 D31 E55803 NEM LA6.0_D1.16
LR13.1 LR13.1 D16 E00025 NEM LR13.1_D1.21
LR13.1 (3rd bCEM) LR13.1 D16 E00031 NEM LR13.1_D1.21
LR13.3 LR13.3 D50 E00725 NEM LR13.3_D1.24
Notes:
1. LA5.0 D30 EXXXXX and later loads are designated as “LA6.0” releases.
2. Some features require alternate minimum commissioning loads, see Table F-3,
“Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads” (p. F-8).
The following table dentifies the earliest load supporting eNodeB modules. Use the
specified or later load
Table F-3 Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads
Equipment/Feature Minimum Load Notes

700 Lower TRDU LA5.0 D31 E54400 CAUTION: Updating
eNodeBs to software loads
earlier than LA5.0 D31
E54400 will damage the 700
MHz Lower TRDUs
(eUTRAN Bands 12 and 17).
800 MHz iDEN LR13.1 D16 E00025
1900 Active Antenna (AA) LR13.1 D16 E00025
Adding 3rd bCEM on LR13.1 LR13.1 D16 E00028 Preparation for Carrier
Aggregation in future release
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Use NEM to verify that the eNodeB is on the correct software load as follows:
• Go to Running Software version (Active Software version) to check current softeware
load on eNodeB.
• If necessary, update the eNodeB to the target load (this target load should be at least
or more recent than the Minimum Commissioning Load of the Commissioning Data
(Work Order) Release (e.g., LA6.0, LR13.1, or LR13.3)). This would not require an
intermediate software release to do to the Minimum Commissioning Load which is
not necessary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Start Commissioning Wizard

Perform the following step to start the Commissioning Wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click Configuration on the NEM menu bar and click on Allocate Configuration Rights.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Configuration on the NEM menu bar again and click on Commissioning Wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Next at the bottom of the welcome screen to continue.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Next at the bottom of the Import Work Order File screen.
Note: The Import Work Order feature is not used in this procedure, so settings are not
needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK in the warning window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Go to one of the following:

• If the OAM IP Format is IPv4, then go to “IP Settings (IPv4) Data Entry” (p. F-10).
• If the OAM IP Format is IPv6, then go to “IP Settings (IPv6) Data Entry” (p. F-10).
PRELIMINARY
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Settings (IPv4) Data Entry
Perform the following steps to enter IPv4 data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On the IP Settings Screen, set the following parameters:

• Select IPv4 in the Oam IP Format pull-down.
• Select false in the IP Config Mode Automatic pull-down.
• Populate the IP Address, IP Netmask, IP Gateway, and NTP Server IPv4 Address
fields using the Required Commissioning Data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Next at the bottom of the screen to continue

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Go to “VLAN Settings Data Entry” (p. F-11).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
IP Settings (IPv6) Data Entry

Perform the following steps to enter IPv6 data. Skip these steps if the eNodeB has an
IPv4 OAM IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On the IP Settings Screen, set the following parameters:

• Select IPv6 in the Oam IP Format pull-down.
• Select false in the IP Config Mode Automatic pull-down.
• Populate the IP Address, Routing Prefix Length, IP Gateway, and NTP Server IPv6
Address fields using the Required Commissioning Data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Next at the bottom of the screen to continue.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Go to “VLAN Settings Data Entry” (p. F-11).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VLAN Settings Data Entry
Perform the following steps to enter VLAN data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter VLAN information on the VLAN Settings Screen as follows:

• Select Edit VLAN Properties by clicking in the box
• Enter the VLAN ID in the field provided with information from Fixed OAM IP
Commissioning Data.
• Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Yes in the popup window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Yes in the next popup window.

Note: After the eNodeB resets, NEM automatically reconnects and continues the
Commissioning Wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Wait about 4 minutes for the eNodeB boot to complete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Go to Disable External Alarms on “Disable External Alarms” (p. F-11).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Disable External Alarms

Perform the following steps to disable external alarms..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click Next on the various Commissioning pages without making any changes until
reaching the External Alarms page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select “Don’t Use External Alarm”

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
3 Click Next at the bottom of the page.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Yes in the popup window.

Note: Click Yes if an additional question window pops up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Finish to exit the Commissioning Wizard.

Note: Do not exit NEM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the eNodeB software is LA5.0, LA6.0, or LR13.1, check and test the eNodeB as
required to confirm operational readiness.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Recommissioning scenarios with delta work order
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

delta work order
Overview
local NEM and a delta work order to recommission the alpha parameters on the eNodeB.
This procedure is applicable to eNodeBs with a fixed IP address. It also supports
recommissioning of IPsec on the OAM interface.
Required alpha parameters for delta work order

The following table lists the alpha parameters needed when using the delta work order
scenario with the NEM Commissioning Wizard. Use the appropriate list based on the
eNodeB software and the OAM IP version. The following data must be obtained prior to
delta work order commissioning. Delta WO also contains IPsec parameters, if IPsec is
enabled, on the OAM interface
Table F-4 Delta work order alpha parameters
Software load Fixed OAM IP address parameters

LR13.3 and Later (IPv4) LR13.3 delta work order parameters required
for eNodeBs using IPv4 OAM IP Addresses:
• OAM IP Address
• Gateway Netmask
• OAM VLAN ID
• eNodeB uniqueName
LR13.3 and Later (IPv6) LR13.3 delta work order parameters required
for eNodeBs using IPv6 OAM IP addresses:
• OAM IP Address
• Routing Prefix Length
• OAM VLAN ID
• eNodeB uniqueName
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cable must be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
applicable.

Commissioning Load
LA6.0 LA5.0 D31 E55803 NEM LA6.0_D1.16
LR13.1 LR13.1 D16 E00025 NEM LR13.1_D1.21
LR13.3 LR13.3 D50 E00725 NEM LR13.3_D1.24
Notes:

MHz Lower TRDUs
PRELIMINARY

800 MHz iDEN LR13.1 D16 E00025
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-6 Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads (continued)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Go to Running Software version (Active Software version) to check current softeware
load on eNodeB.
• If necessary, update the eNodeB to the Minimum Commissioning Load of the
Commissioning Data (Work Order) Release (e.g. LA6.0, LR13.1, or LR13.3)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import delta work order

Perform the following the steps to import the eNodeB delta work order using the NEM
Commissioning Wizard utility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start NEM, if not already running

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights on the NEM menu bar.
Note: If Allocate Configuration Rights is grayed out, skip this step and continue to
Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Configuration > Commissioning Wizard.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Next on the Commissioning Wizard opening page.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 On the Import Work Order screen, select Internal File System.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Select Use Delta Configuration based on the work order file type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on Import.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Open box, navigate to the correct market folder, select the eNodeB delta work
order file (*.xml), and click Open. In the Files of Type drop-down, select the correct file
type. For LR13.1/LR13.3 software releases select the *.xml file type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Yes in the Warning window.

Note: The eNodeB boots to initialize with the information in the Work Order.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Wait 4-5 minutes for the eNodeB boot to complete. NEM will display either an hourglass
(Windows XP) or spinning wheel (Windows 7) during the boot process.
Note: Watch for the following:
• NEM may not be respond until full eNodeB connectivity is restored after boot.
• If any “netconf” warning messages appear, click OK and continue.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click Finish once the hourglass (Windows XP) or spinning wheel (Windows 7)
disappears (normal mouse cursor reappears).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Sector commissioning
Determine if sector commissioning is necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the eNodeB software is LR13.3 and later eNodeB loads, continue with “Work order
verification” (p. F-16)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Work order verification

Perform the follows steps to confirm the site specific data have been loaded properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
1 Complete the following to verify the eNodeB Friendly Name.

• Go to the NEM Root View (icon shown on right).
• Select the eNodeB Properties tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Verify the eNodeB Friendly Name is correct for this site.
– If the eNodeB Friendly Name is Correct, then procedure is complete.
– Not correct or missing, then repeat all steps in Import Work Order with the correct
Work Order (WO).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the Commissioning Data File is a delta work order, then check SFP Inventory and RFM
Ping Test.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommissioning scenarios with full snapshot file
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

full snapshot file
Overview
local NEM and a full snapshot file (full work order) to recommission the entire database
on the eNodeB. This procedure is applicable to eNodeBs with a fixed IP address. It
supports recommissioning of IPsec and other special configurations on the OAM
interface.
Pre-conditions
Verify the following conditions have been accomplished:
• eNodeB is installed but backhaul cable is disconnected.
• IPsec is used on the OAM interface.
• eNodeB is not managed by EMS
• eNodeB has factory certificate installed
• SeGW is properly provisioned for this eNodeB
• eNodeB is provisioned, not PnP; OAM link parameters are provisioned in the eNodeB
DB, not obtained from PnP mechanisms such as DHCP or DNS.
• eNodeB running SW version and snapshot file use the same MIM version as the target
SW version configured on EMS for this eNodeB. See SAM restriction #1.
SAM restriction #1: If SW Upgrade is checked, the SW Replacement (SWR) is only
executed if the running SW version on the eNB uses the same MIM version as the
target SW version configured on the EMS. This restriction will be removed in SAM
12.0 R5 (LR14.3).
• A snapshot file in the proper format for this eNodeB has been imported into the NEM.
• Snapshot contains the complete eNodeB database including eNodeBEquipment::u-
niqueName set to the correct unique name of this eNodeB.
• Snapshot has the OAM Link Parameters set as follows:
– ipConfigAutomatic is provisioned to False
– eNodeB OAM inner and outer IP address, subnet and gateway are provisioned
– eNodeB OAM Vlan ID is provisioned
– Candidate EMS IP addresses and ports are provisioned
PRELIMINARY
– SeGW IP address and all other necessary IPsec parameters are provisioned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cable must be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
applicable.

Commissioning Load
LA6.0 LA5.0 D31 E55803 NEM LA6.0_D1.16
LR13.1 LR13.1 D16 E00025 NEM LR13.1_D1.21
LR13.3 LR13.3 D50 E00725 NEM LR13.3_D1.24
Notes:

MHz Lower TRDUs
PRELIMINARY

800 MHz iDEN LR13.1 D16 E00025
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-8 Miscellaneous Macro Equipment Minimum Loads (continued)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Go to Running Software version (Active Software version) to check current software
load on eNodeB.
• If necessary, update the eNodeB to the Minimum Commissioning Load of the
Commissioning Data (Work Order) Release (e.g. LA6.0, LR13.1, or LR13.3)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import full work order

Perform the following the steps to import the eNodeB full work order using the NEM
Commissioning Wizard utility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start NEM, if not already running

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights on the NEM menu bar.
Note: If Allocate Configuration Rights is grayed out, skip this step and continue to
Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Configuration > Commissioning Wizard.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Next on the Commissioning Wizard opening page.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 On the Import Work Order screen, select Internal File System.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
6 Select Use Full Configuration based on the work order file type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on Import.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Open box, navigate to the correct market folder, select the eNodeB full work order
file (*.xml), and click Open. In the Files of Type drop-down, select the correct file type.
For LR13.1/LR13.3 software releases select the *.xml file type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Yes in the Warning window.

Note: The eNodeB boots to initialize with the information in the full work order.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Wait 4-5 minutes for the eNodeB boot to complete. NEM displays either an hourglass
(Windows XP) or spinning wheel (Windows 7) during the boot process.
Note: Watch for the following:
• NEM may not be respond until full eNodeB connectivity is restored after boot.
• If any “netconf” warning messages appear, click OK and continue.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click Finish once the hourglass (Windows XP) or spinning wheel (Windows 7)
disappears (normal mouse cursor reappears).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Sector commissioning
Determine if sector commissioning is necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If the eNodeB software is LR13.3 and later eNodeB loads, continue with “Work order
verification” (p. F-21)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Work order verification

The follow steps to confirm the site specific data was loaded properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
1 Complete the following to verify the eNodeB Friendly Name.

• Go to the NEM Root View (icon shown on right).
• Select the eNodeB Properties tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Verify the eNodeB Friendly Name is correct for this site.
– If the eNodeB Friendly Name is Correct, then procedure is complete.
– Not correct or missing, then repeat all steps in Import Work Order with the correct
work order.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the Commissioning Data File is a full work order, then check SFP Inventory and RFM
Ping Test.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self
PRELIMINARY
Recommissioning scenarios commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self

commissioning
Overview
This procedure describes the recommissioning scenario for Plug-n-Play eNodeBs using
automated PnP mechanisms and self commissioning to obtain the alpha parameters for
the eNodeB. This procedure is applicable to PnP eNodeBs managed by serial number.
Starting in LR13.1, a newly installed eNodeB is able to contact the EMS and establish the
OAM link without on-site provisioning using plug-n-play (PnP) mechanisms. In the most
likely plug-n-play scenario (shown below), the eNodeB is DHCP-enabled and the
eNodeB OAM Inner and Outer IP addresses and the Security Gateway and Candidate
EMS IP addresses are discovered using PnP mechanisms.
The operator must pre-provision the eNodeB configuration, including the eNodeB serial
number, in the EMS. eNodeB establishes the initial OAM link by sending a Hello
message with its serial number to the EMS.
For eNodeBs identified by serial number, it is imperative that the OAM link port
configured in the EMS matches the OAM link port obtained by the eNodeB during PnP
procedures. If eNodeB obtains Candidate EMSs from DHCP, eNodeB receives both IP
addresses and ports. If eNodeB obtains Candidate EMSs from DNS, eNodeB only
receives IP addresses, no ports, and so it uses default port 162 in this case. Two Use Cases
are described below: (1) EMS and eNodeB OAM Link ports match and (2) EMS and
eNodeB OAM Link ports mismatch.
Pre-conditions
Verify the following conditions have been accomplished:
• Factory pre-provisioning of OAM Link Parameters has occurred in eNodeB if
necessary.
• Factory certificate has been installed in eNodeB
• DHCP and DNS servers have been provisioned with OAM Link Parameters if
necessary
• eNodeB OAM IP address is assigned by PnP mechanisms
• eNodeB OAM IP address is not managed in EMS for another eNodeB; assigned IP
address must be a new IP address
• eNodeB is not managed in EMS
PRELIMINARY
• eNodeB basicMibVersion > 1

• eNodeB is on LR13.1 or later release
• eNodeB running SW version uses the same MIM version as the target SW version
configured on EMS. See SAM restriction #1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAM restriction #1: If SW Upgrade is checked, the SW Replacement (SWR) is only
executed if the running SW version on the eNB uses the same MIM version as the
target SW version configured on the EMS. This restriction will be removed in SAM
12.0 R5 (LR14.3).
• Operator has directed EMS to manage eNodeB based on its serial number
• eNodeB configuration is pre-provisioned in EMS with OAMInterface.provisionede-
NodeBIdentifier is set to eNodeB serial number
• EMS has Self Config Policy set for this eNodeB with the following checked:
– Auto Start
– SW Upgrade
– Configuration Deployment
– Administrative Enable
• Managing EMS is not registered in the eNodeB
• eNodeB is installed and powered on
eNodeB managed by serial number and OAM ports match

The following steps describe how the eNodeB is managed by using the eNodeB serial
number and matching OAM ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 eNodeB boots up on LR13.1 or later release.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 eNodeB initiates OAM Link establishment.

1. eNodeB determines the OAM Link Parameters to use. In this case, for the most part
they are discovered using PnP mechanisms.
2. eNodeB sets up OAM IPsec tunnel if enabled.
3. eNodeB sends Hello messages to Candidate EMS IP addresses and ports obtained
from PnP procedures. EMS and eNodeB OAM Link ports must match for the
Managing EMS to receive the Hello message.
4. Managing EMS receives Hello message.
5. EMS determines if it is the Managing EMS for the eNodeB.
6. Managing EMS opens the OAM link using the eNodeB’s OAM IP address in the
Hello message and registers itself as the Managing EMS.
• EMS sets its FM IP addresses and ports in snmpTargetAddressTable. eNodeB
PRELIMINARY
sends FM notifications (alarms, states, events, OCN) to the EMS addresses and
ports in snmpTargetAddressTable.
• EMS sets its OAM Link IP addresses and ports in emsActiveAddressTable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7. EMS begins link monitoring and sends first valid new Heartbeat message to eNodeB
to SNMP port 161.
• eNodeB sends OAM Link Opened messages to Candidate EMS IP addresses and
ports obtained from PnP procedures. EMS and eNodeB OAM Link ports must
match for the Candidate EMS to receive the OAM Link Opened message.
• eNodeB sends Heartbeat LinkUp response to the active Managing EMS at the
address and port in emsActiveAddressTable.
• eNodeB begins link monitoring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 EMS automatically downloads and activates the eNodeB software according to the self
configuration policy. See SAM restrictions #1 and #2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 EMS automatically configures the eNodeB DB using the pre-provisioned WO according

to the self configuration policy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 eNodeB resets and configures itself as specified in the eNodeB configuration. eNodeB
and EMS execute the OAM link re-establishment scenario.
• eNodeB sets up OAM IPsec tunnel if enabled. If the SeGW IP address or FQDN has
been changed in the eNodeB configuration, eNodeB sets up the IPsec tunnel to the
new Serving SeGW.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the CMS information has been provisioned, eNodeB contacts the CMS to obtain the
operator certificate.
1. eNodeB resets and eNodeB and EMS execute OAM link re-establishment scenario.
2. eNodeB sets up IPsec tunnel using operator certificate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 EMS automatically unlocks eNodeB and all the LteCells according to the self
configuration policy. See SAM restriction #3.
SAM restriction #3: If Administrative Enable is checked, SAM only unlocks the eNB,
not the LteCells. In order to enable telecom service, the operator must manually unlock
the LteCells using NEM. SAM cannot unlock LteCells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
8 eNodeB provides telecom service.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-4: Recommission Plug-n-Play eNB with self
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post-conditions
The following post-conditions are established.
• OAM Link is established.
• eNodeB is running LR13 or later software provisioned in EMS.
• eNodeB is running the configuration provisioned in EMS.
• eNodeB is managed by IP address in EMS.
eNodeB managed by serial number and OAM ports mismatch

If the EMS and eNodeB OAM Link ports do not match for a new eNodeB using serial
number as the identity, then the eNodeB can’t be discovered by the Managing EMS from
the Hello messages. If the eNodeB is using DHCP or provisioning to obtain the Candidate
EMS IP addresses and ports, this situation can be remedied by correcting the ports in the
DHCP entry or correcting the provisioned data in ProvisionedEmsAddressData.em-
sOAMLinkInitPort.
However, if the Candidate EMS IP addresses are obtained from DNS, DNS can not return
ports in its response. Therefore the eNodeB uses the default port of 162 as the OAM Link
port. To discover and manage an eNodeB in this situation either (1) the operator has to
use the previous mechanism based on a static pre-provisioned OAM IP address as the
eNodeB identity or (2) in order to use automatic or dynamic IP addressing, the Managing
EMS must be installed with the default OAM Link port of 162.
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-5: Set OAM Routing
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure F-5: Set OAM Routing

Overview
Guide, Display Transport Properties and IpSec Properties for VLAN 0 and Other VLANs,
for additional details to make the OAM connection between the 5620 SAM and the
eNodeB.
Description
Perform the following procedure to set the OAM routing between the 5620 SAM and the
eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If necessary, connect the NEM PC to CCM PORT 1, open the NEM and login as follows:
• eCCM IP address: 192.168.10.1 (netmask 255.255.255.0).
• User ID: initial_nem
Click OK. NEM main window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Set IP Configure Mode field as follows:

1. Click Root View > Transport Properties, and Edit (not grayed out).
2. Set IP Config Mode: “provisioned” (manually from the NEM) or automatic (from the
DHCP server), as required.
3. Click OK
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click VLAN 0 Transport Properties, and Edit (not grayed out).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the VLAN 0 Transport Properties fields as required:

1. IP format: IPv4/IPv6 (OAM eNodeB and 5620 SAM transport network is based only
on IPv6)
PRELIMINARY
2. Vlan Id: “xx”

3. Click Edit Traffic Descriptor 0 Values
4. OAM Manual IP address: <ip-address>
5. OAM Manual Ipv4 Netmask/Ipv6 Prefix Routing Length: <netmask-prefix>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Recommission 9926 BBU Procedure F-5: Set OAM Routing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6. OAM Manual IP gateway: <ip-address>
7. Traffic Type List: Oam (traffic types defined for an IP address)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK. eNodeB reboots.

Check the link is UP (down) at EMS Data Tab -> EMS Connection -> OAM Link Status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select Configuration > Release Configuration Rights.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Appendix G: Change CCM static
MAC address in 7750 SR
Procedure G-1: Change CCM static MAC address

Purpose
This appendix describes how to update the CCM (eCCM2 or eCCM-U) static MAC
address in the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 router when the CCM is replaced in the
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU.
Note: This procedure must be performed by a qualified OMC network administrator.
Attention: Perform this step as follows:
• If the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 router matches the new CCM static
MAC address, the procedure is complete.
• If the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 router does not match the new CCM
static MAC address, go to the following steps to change the address.
Prerequisites
The following information must be provided for the CCM static MAC address change in
the 7750 router:
• eNodeB IP address
• eNodeB name
• Telecom port IP address
Update 7750 Router 1

Perform the following procedure to update the CCM MAC address in 7750 Router 1 to
match the MAC address of the new CCM replaced in the eNodeB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
1 Log into 7750 Router 1. Verify Router 1 is logged in.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter command to check for the IPV4 setup:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary G-1
PRELIMINARY Change CCM static MAC address in 7750 SR Procedure G-1: Change CCM static MAC address
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
show router arp | match <xxx>
<xxx> is the last 3 digits of eNodeB number, for example, 123xxx_eNodeB_Name
Result: The following example output displays the eNodeB telecom IP address
(123.45.567.98) and MAC address (00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f (existing MAC address)):
123.45.567.98 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 00h00m00s Oth[I] to-BTS0281-7705

123.45.567.98 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 02h55m32s Dyn[I] to-BTS0281-7705
enbtelecomip-1 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 00h00m00s Oth[I] L3-Telecom-eNodeB0xxx
enbtelecomip 00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f 00h00m00s Sta[I] L3-Telecom-eNodeB0xxx
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter command to check for the IPV6 setup:

show router neighbor | match 0XXX post-lines 1
Result: The following example output displays the eNodeB IPV6 Neighbor IP address
and IPV6 Neighbor MAC address (00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f (existing MAC address)):
Enbtelecom_IPV6_IP_Neighbor L3-Telecom-eNodeB0XXX (IPV6 Neighbor IP

address)
00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f REACHABLE - Static No
(IPV6 Neighbor MAC)
Enbtelecom_IPV6_IP L3-Telecom-eNodeB0XXX
00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f STALE 03h59m57s Dynamic No
If IPV6 is not set up, no output occurs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check/modify the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 router:

• If the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 Router 1 matches the new CCM static
MAC address, go to “Update 7750 Router 2” (p. G-4).
• If the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 Router 1 does not match the new CCM
static MAC address, go to the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter command:
show router 4 arp | match <xxx>
Result: The following example output displays the eNodeB IP address and OAM port
dynamic IP address:
PRELIMINARY
123.45.567.98 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 00h00m00s Oth[I] L3-EDN-BTS0xxx

123.45.567.98 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 03h40m41s Dyn[I] L3-EDN-BTS0xxx
eNodeBip-1 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 00h00m00s Oth[I] L3-OAM-eNodeB0xxx
eNodeBip 00:11:3f:ca:a8:e1 03h59m46s Dyn[I] L3-OAM-eNodeB0xxx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Change CCM static MAC address in 7750 SR Procedure G-1: Change CCM static MAC address
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure the OAM IP address matches the eNodeB IP address and make note of the
MAC address. Update the telecom MAC address on Router 2 to match this MAC
address.
00:11:3f:ca:a8:e1 is the new MAC address in this example.
The MAC address of the eNodeBip and enbtelecomip must match.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Ping eNodeB to verify connection as follows:

ping router 4 <eNodeB_IP>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat the following command and verify the values have not changed:
show router 4 arp | match <xxx>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter command:
configure service ies 1 interface L3-Telecom-eNodeB0xxx
Result: Prompt changes to config>service>ies>if#
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter command:
info
Result: The following shows an example of the output for IPV4 or IPV6:
If IPV4 is setup:
description "eNodeB0281-7705-Telecom-eCCM"
address enbtelecomip-1/31
mac 00:00:01:00:02:81
static-arp <enbtelecomip> 00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f
spoke-sdp 281:31281157 create
exit
OR, if IPV6 is setup
mac 00:00:01:00:02:81
ipv6
PRELIMINARY
address 2001:4888:2010:9126:103:400::/64
mac 00:00:01:00:02:81
neighbor enb::IPV6::IP:addr:ess 00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f
exit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The MAC (00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f) and IP addresses should match the information the
show command displayed in Step 2 or Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter command as follows for IPV4 or IPV6:

• For IPV4 address:
static-arp <enbtelecomip> <new_MAC_address>
ipv6 neighbor <ipv6neighborIP> <new_MAC_address>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter command:
info
Verify the new MAC address matches the eNodeB IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Enter command:
exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Enter command to save the changes:

admin save
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Update 7750 Router 2

Perform the following procedure to update the CCM MAC address in 7750 Router 2 to
match the MAC address of the new CCM replaced in the eNodeB, and Router 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into 7750 Router 2. Verify Router 2 is logged in.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
2 Enter command to check for IPV4 setup:

show router arp | match <xxx>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The following example output displays the eNodeB telecom IP address
(123.45.567.98) and MAC address (00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f (existing MAC address)):
123.45.567.98 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 00h00m00s Oth[I] to-BTS0281-7705

123.45.567.98 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 02h55m32s Dyn[I] to-BTS0281-7705
enbtelecomip-1 ma:c_:ad:dr:ess 00h00m00s Oth[I] L3-Telecom-eNodeB0xxx
enbtelecomip 00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f 00h00m00s Sta[I] L3-Telecom-eNodeB0xxx
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter command to check for IPV6 setup:

show router neighbor | match 0XXX post-lines 1
Result: The following example output displays the eNodeB IPV6 Neighbor IP address
and IPV6 Neighbor MAC address (00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f (existing MAC address)):
Enbtelecom_IPV6_IP_Neighbor L3-Telecom-eNodeB0XXX (IPV6 Neighbor IP

address)
00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f REACHABLE - Static No
(IPV6 Neighbor MAC)
Enbtelecom_IPV6_IP L3-Telecom-eNodeB0XXX
00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f STALE 03h59m57s Dynamic No
If IPV6 is not set up, no output occurs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check/modify the CCM static MAC address on 7750 Router 2:

• If the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 Router 2 matches the new CCM static
MAC address, procedure completed.
• If the CCM static MAC address on the 7750 Router 2 does not match the new CCM
static MAC address, go to the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter command:
configure service ies 1 interface L3-Telecom-eNodeB0xxx
Result: Prompt changes to config>service>ies>if#
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter command for IPV4 or IPV6:

info
Result: The following shows an example of the output:
PRELIMINARY
If IPV4 is setup:
mac 00:00:01:00:02:81
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
exit
OR, if IPV6 is setup
mac 00:00:01:00:02:81
ipv6
address 2001:4888:2010:9126:103:400::/64
mac 00:00:01:00:02:81
neighbor enb::IPV6::IP:addr:ess 00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f
exit
The MAC (00:11:3f:c7:fb:5f) and IP addresses should match the information the
show command displayed in Step 2 or Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter command as follows for IPV4 or IPV6:

static-arp <enbtelecomip> <new_MAC_address>
ipv6 neighbor <ipv6neighborIP> <new_MAC_address>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter command:
info
Verify the new MAC address matches the eNodeB IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter command:
exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter command to save the changes:

admin save
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
11 Procedure completed. Return to previous procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Appendix H: Restore from
Factory Mode Procedure
Procedure H-1: Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode

Overview
When a replacement CCM (spare or factory) is installed and powered up, compatibly
checks are performed to determine if the factory/spare CCM is compatible with the target
9926 BBU. The CCM reverts to "Factory Mode" when a mismatch is detected between
the CCM and frame (RUC) configurations. When this condition is detected, the CCM
deletes the eNodeB running software, MIM data, and MIB data. The following procedure
describes the steps needed to reinstall the software load and database files (MIB and
MIM).
Steps
Perform the following procedures to restore 9926 BBU from factory mode to the
appropriate running load and configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 When the “eNB is in factory mode” message is displayed after logging into NEM, click
Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the SW Properties tab to check the Running SW file name and Not Running SW
file name fields are not showing any software loads.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights. SW Replacement button is

un-grayed on the SW Properties tab.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 A message appears asking to use the internal SFTP server, click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the next window select current running load software and click Open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary H-1
PRELIMINARY Restore from Factory Mode Procedure Procedure H-1: Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If necessary, refer to current alerts or release notes for up-to-date information
on software loads.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The next window (SW replacement) shows installation progress.

For attended/unattended running:
• For unattended running, check Unattended running to allow software installation to
occur automatically (Activate and Accept are performed). When done, continue with
the following step.
• For attend running, leave Unattended running unchecked and continue with the
following:
1. Click Activate, when the three files are loaded.
2. Click Accept. When done, the main window appears, select SW Properties to see
that the three files are loaded and verify the load release.
3. When done, continue with the following step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The running load is now installed. Wait for all files to appear on SW Properties tab. The
number of files depends on the eNodeB configuration.
Check SW Properties, bottom of window, to see that the software is being installed. Three
files are initially installed, with additional files appearing after hardware discovery has
happened. This process can take a much as 15 minutes to complete.
Perform one of the following:
• If replacing the eCCM-U with an eCCM-U or the eCCM2 with an eCCM2, continue
• If replacing the eCCM-U with an eCCM2 or the eCCM2 with an eCCM-U, return to
the Restore eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using NEM procedure to restore the full
eNodeB database backup file to the 9926 BBU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 From eNodeB, from eNodeB-NEM restore MIM backup file using NEM Commissioning
Wizard as follows:
1. If not already selected, select Configuration > Allocate Configuration Rights
(selected in Step 3).
2. Select Configuration > Commissioning Wizard, and Click Next.
3. Select Use Internal File System (MIM backup saved on NEM PC).
PRELIMINARY
4. Select Use Full Configuration.

5. Click Import (import database from NEM PC).
Open tab is displayed. If the MIM backup file saved on NEM PC does not have the
extension .xwo (it could have .xml or .xcm), from Files of Type, select All Files.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Restore from Factory Mode Procedure Procedure H-1: Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6. Click the folder icon to display the directories, locate, and select latest MIM backup
file.
7. Click Open to restore the selected MIM backup file.
The following message appears: This action will cause a reset of the eNB, if a class A
parameter is modified. You will have to wait a few minutes for the eNB to start again.
Do you want to continue? Click Yes to continue.
8. Click Finish. Wait until 9926 BBU resets before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select Configuration > MIB Restore, if backup was done, click Yes for internal SFTP
server, find the MIB file and restore it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 When completed, return to the appropriate replacement procedure, Restore 9926 BBU
operation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary H-3
PRELIMINARY Restore from Factory Mode Procedure Procedure H-1: Restore 9926 BBU from factory mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Index
PRELIMINARY
Numerics prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
9412 eNodeB using 5620 SAM, 4-64
corrective maintenance procedures, 4-1 remove CCM using NEM, 4-36
9926 BBU remove eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),

using 5620 SAM, 4-66
replacement procedures, 5-2
remove RUC/Fan Tray, 4-16
9926 BBU in MBI cabinet
replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack, 4-96
replace bCEMbCEM, 4-86
9926 BBU to RRH SFP diagram, 4-119
replace CCM using NEM, 4-24
................................................................................................
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620
A about this document SAM, 4-49
safety, 1-1 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using
add bCEM to existing 9926 BBU, 7-1 eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-17
add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU replace RUC/Fan Tray, 4-10
hardware issues, 7-1 restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)

using NEM, 4-43
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
corrective maintenance procedures in MBI cabinet, with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-73
6-1
................................................................................................ with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-80
B backhaul interface SFP optical module provisioning, BBU in 9412 eNodeB
4-120
BB cabinet bCEM
install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), faceplate, 9-3, 11-2, 12-2
PRELIMINARY

in MBI cabinet, 6-79
install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
using NEM, 4-40 in rack-mounted 9926 BBU, 5-78
install RUC/Fan Tray, 4-20 indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-86

bCEM LED status, D-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-1
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
bCEM-U replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with eCCM-U
(downgrade/fallback) using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
faceplate, 4-86, 5-78, 6-79
cabinet, 6-17
broadband Channel Element Module (bCEM)
replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with eCCM-U
See: bCEM
(downgrade/fallback) using NEM, indoor/BB
See: bCEM
outdoor cabinet, 4-24
indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-86
................................................................................................ (downgrade/fallback) using SAM, in MBI cabinet,
6-43
C CCM
replace eCCM-U with eCCM2 using NEM, 9926
install in 9926 BBU, 5-33
BBU, 5-17
install using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-34 replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR
remove from 9926 BBU, 5-29 (upgrade) using 5620 SAM, in 9926 BBU, 5-42
remove from indoor cabinet using NEM, 4-36 replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR
(upgrade) using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB outdoor
remove using eNodeB-NEM, from MBI cabinet,
cabinet, 4-49
6-30
replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR
replace eCCM2 with eCCM2 using NEM, 9926
(upgrade) using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
BBU, 5-17
6-17
replace eCCM2 with eCCM-U using NEM, 9926
BBU, 5-17
(upgrade) using NEM, indoor/BB outdoor cabinet,
replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with 4-24, 4-24
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 SAM, in 9926
BBU, 5-42
(upgrade) using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-43
replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with
replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using 5620 SAM, in
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB
9926 BBU, 5-42
replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using 5620 SAM,
indoor/BB outdoor cabinet, 4-49
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet, 6-17 replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using
eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-17
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using NEM, indoor/BB replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using NEM, 9926
outdoor cabinet, 4-24 BBU, 5-17
replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using NEM,
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using SAM, in MBI cabinet, indoor/BB outdoor cabinet, 4-24, 4-24
6-43 replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using SAM, in MBI
replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with eCCM-U cabinet, 6-43
(downgrade/fallback) using 5620 SAM, in 9926
PRELIMINARY
restore 9926 BBU using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI

BBU, 5-42
cabinet, 6-37
restore in 9926 BBU, 5-36
(downgrade/fallback) using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB
outdoor cabinet, 4-49 status, using 5620 SAM, 4-52, 5-45
status using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU
Index
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
status, using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-46 prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
using 5620 SAM from indoor/BB outdoor cabinet,
CCM in NEM procedure
4-64
status, 4-27, 5-20
prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
CEM LED status using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-57
bCEM, D-11 process, 3-1
CMA LED, D-2 rack-mounted BBU procedures, 5-1
configure 9926 BBU for dual-carrier, single-band remove CCM using eNodeB-NEM, from MBI
operation, 11-1 cabinet, 6-30
configure 9926 BBU for multi-carrier, multi-band remove CCM using NEM, 5-29
operation, 12-1
remove CCM using NEM from indoor/BB outdoor
connections cabinet, 4-36
RUC/Fan Tray, 4-12, 5-6, 6-6 remove eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using SAM,
corrective maintenance in MBI cabinet, 6-59
remove eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
9412 eNodeB, 4-1
9926 BBU, 5-2
remove eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
BBU in 9412 eNodeB, 4-2 using 5620 SAM from indoor/BB outdoor cabinet,
BBU in MBI cabinet, 6-2 4-66
eAM, 5-108, 6-111 remove RUC/Fan Tray from indoor/outdoor cabinet,

4-16
install CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
6-34 remove RUC/Fan Tray from LTE 9926 BBU, 5-10
install CCM using NEM, 5-33 remove RUC/Fan Tray from MBI cabinet, 6-10
install eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using SAM, replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor BB
in MBI cabinet, 6-62 cabinet, 4-96
install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU,
using 5620 SAM, 4-69 5-88
install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet, 6-90
using 5620 SAM, 5-61 replace bCEM in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-86
install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) replace bCEM in MBI cabinet, 6-78
using NEM, 4-40
replace bCEM in rack-mounted 9926 BBU, 5-77
install RUC/Fan Tray in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet,
replace CCM using NEM, 9926 BBU, 5-17
4-20
install RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU, 5-13 replace CCM using NEM, in indoor/BB outdoor
cabinet, 4-24
PRELIMINARY
install RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet, 6-13

replace eCCM-U and/or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using
prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-43
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620
SAM, in 9926 BBU, 5-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 ................................................................................................
SAM, in indoor/BB outdoor cabinet, 4-49
E eCCM2/eCCM2-HR
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using
eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-17 faceplate, 5-19
replace RUC/Fan Tray, 4-10 faceplate, in 9926 BBU, 5-44
replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU, 5-4 faceplate, indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-26, 4-51
replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet, 6-4 faceplate, MBI cabinet, 6-19
replace SFP transceivers, 4-115 faceplate, using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-45
replacement/repair process, 3-2 replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with

eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 SAM, in 9926
required tools, 3-5 BBU, 5-42
restore CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with
6-37 eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB
restore CCM using NEM, 5-36 outdoor cabinet, 4-49
restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with

using 5620 SAM, 6-66, 6-72 eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet, 6-17
restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
using NEM, 4-43 replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using NEM, indoor/BB
restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), outdoor cabinet, 4-24
with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-73, 5-65
restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using SAM, in MBI cabinet,
with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-80, 6-43
5-71
safety requirements, 3-5 (downgrade/fallback) using 5620 SAM, in 9926
torque requirements for mechanical connections, 3-7 BBU, 5-42
corrective maintenance procedures replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with eCCM-U

(downgrade/fallback) using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB
Alcatel-Lucent 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet, 6-1
CPRI interface SFP optical module provisioning, 4-117
CPRI LEDs (downgrade/fallback) using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet, 6-17
eCCM-U, D-4
CPRI Status LEDs
(downgrade/fallback) using NEM, indoor/BB
TRDU, D-15 outdoor cabinet, 4-24
................................................................................................ replace eCCM2/eCCM2-HR with eCCM-U
(downgrade/fallback) using SAM, in MBI cabinet,
PRELIMINARY
D document support, xxxi

6-43
dual-carrier, single-band operation, 11-1 replacement procedure using 5620 SAM, in 9926
BBU, 5-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replacement procedure using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM)
install using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-62, 6-62
replacement procedure using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI
cabinet, 6-17
using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-57
replacement procedure using NEM, indoor/BB
remove using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-59
eCCM-U LED status
replacement procedure using SAM, in MBI cabinet,
6-43 CMA LED, D-2
eCCM2-HR CPRI LEDs, D-4
faceplate, 5-19 GigE MDA port LEDs, D-4

faceplate, indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-26, 4-51 matrix, D-2
faceplate, MBI cabinet, 6-19 MDA/PCM LEDs, D-3

eCCM-U SYNC LED, D-2
faceplate, 5-19 eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
faceplate, in 9926 BBU, 5-44 install in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM, 5-61, 5-61
faceplate, indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-26, 4-51 install in indoor cabinet using NEM, 4-40
faceplate, MBI cabinet, 6-19 install in outdoor BB cabinet using NEM, 4-40
faceplate, using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-45 install using 5620 SAM, in indoor cabinet, 4-69
LEDs, D-1 install using 5620 SAM, in outdoor BB cabinet, 4-69
replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
(upgrade) using 5620 SAM, in 9926 BBU, 5-42 in 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM, 5-56
replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
(upgrade) using 5620 SAM, indoor/BB outdoor in indoor cabinet using 5620 SAM, 4-64
cabinet, 4-49 remove from 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM, 5-58
replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR remove from indoor cabinet, using 5620 SAM, 4-66
(upgrade) using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
6-17 restore in indoor cabinet using NEM, 4-43
replace eCCM-U with eCCM2/eCCM2-HR restore in outdoor BB cabinet using NEM, 4-43
(upgrade) using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-43 restore, using 5620 SAM, 6-66, 6-72
replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using 5620 SAM, in restore, with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 5-65
9926 BBU, 5-42
restore, with aligned software using 5620 SAM in
replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using 5620 SAM, indoor cabinet, 4-73
indoor/BB outdoor cabinet, 4-49
restore, with aligned software using 5620 SAM in
replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using
PRELIMINARY
outdoor BB cabinet, 4-73

restore, with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM,
replace eCCM-U with eCCM-U using SAM, in MBI 5-71
cabinet, 6-43
restore, with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM
in indoor cabinet, 4-80
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
restore, with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM hot swap
in outdoor BB cabinet, 4-80
FRUs, 3-2
enhanced Core Controller Module (eCCM-U)
................................................................................................
See: eCCM-U
enhanced Core Controller Module-2 (eCCM2) I indoor cabinet
See: eCCM2 install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
enhanced Core Controller Module-2 High Rate using 5620 SAM, 4-69
(eCCM2-HR) install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
See: eCCM2-HR using NEM, 4-40
................................................................................................ install RUC/Fan Tray, 4-20
F faceplate prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, 5-19
remove CCM using NEM, 4-36
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, in 9926 BBU, 5-44
remove eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, indoor/outdoor BB cabinet,
4-26, 4-51
remove RUC/Fan Tray, 4-16
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, MBI cabinet, 6-19
eCCM2/eCCM2-HR, using SAM, in MBI cabinet,
6-45 replace bCEM, 4-86, 4-86
eCCM2-HR, 5-19 replace CCM using NEM, 4-24
eCCM2-HR, indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-26, 4-51 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620
SAM, 4-49
eCCM2-HR, MBI cabinet, 6-19
eCCM-U, 5-19
eCCM-U, in 9926 BBU, 5-44
replace RUC/Fan Tray, 4-10
eCCM-U, indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-26, 4-51
restore CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
eCCM-U, MBI cabinet, 6-19 6-37
eCCM-U, using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-45 restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
using NEM, 4-43
FRU, 3-2
FRUs
with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-73
hot swap, 3-2
................................................................................................ with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-80
G general precautions for installation procedures, 1-3 install a new bCEM, 7-2
GigE MDA port LEDs, D-4 ................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY
................................................................................................ L LED status
H hardware issues bCEM, D-11
add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU, 7-1 TRDU, D-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEDs ................................................................................................
eCCM-U, D-1 O outdoor cabinet

eCCM-U CMA, D-2 install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) in
eCCM-U CPRI, D-4 BB cabinet using NEM, 4-40
eCCM-U GigE MDA, D-4 install eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),

using 5620 SAM in BB cabinet, 4-69
eCCM-U matrix, D-2
install RUC/Fan Tray in BB cabinet, 4-20
eCCM-U MDA/PCM, D-3
eCCM-U SYNC, D-2 using 5620 SAM from BB cabinet, 4-64
lightRadio cabinet remove CCM using NEM from BB cabinet, 4-36
replace SFP transceivers, 4-115 remove eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
LTE 9926 BBU using 5620 SAM from BB cabinet, 4-66
remove RUC/Fan Tray, 5-10 remove RUC/Fan Tray from BB cabinet, 4-16
replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack, 5-88 replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack, 4-96
replace RUC/Fan Tray, 5-4 replace bCEM, 4-86
................................................................................................ replace bCEM in BB cabinet, 4-86
M MBI cabinet replace CCM using NEM, in BB cabinet, 4-24
corrective maintenance procedures, 6-1 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620

SAM, in BB cabinet, 4-49
install CCM using eNodeB-NEM, 6-34
install eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using SAM, eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-17
replace RUC/Fan Tray, 4-10
install RUC/Fan Tray, 6-13
restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) in
prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement BB cabinet using NEM, 4-43
remove CCM using eNodeB-NEM, from MBI with aligned software using 5620 SAM in BB
cabinet, 6-30 cabinet, 4-73
remove eCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using SAM, restore eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
in MBI cabinet, 6-59 with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM in BB
remove RUC/Fan Tray, 6-10 cabinet, 4-80
................................................................................................
replace bCEM, 6-78 P PCM LEDs, D-3
replace eCCM-U and/or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using phone numbers

PRELIMINARY
SAM, 6-43
for document support, xxxi
replace RUC/Fan Tray, 6-4 prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement,
MDA LEDs, D-3 4-64, 5-56
multi-carrier, multi-band operation, 12-1 using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
preventive maintenance replacement procedures
9926 BBU, 2-1 9926 BBU, 5-2
9926 BBU component requirements, 2-2 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet, 6-2
9926 BBU component schedule, 2-2 BBU in 9412 eNodeB, 4-2
safety, 1-1 eAM, 5-108, 6-111
product conformance statements, B-1 install CCM using NEM, 5-33
Canada, B-4 install RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU, 5-13
European Union, B-5 install RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet, 6-13
United States, B-2 installCCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
6-34
................................................................................................
installeCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using SAM,
R rack-mounted 9926 BBU
replace bCEM, 5-77 installeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
rack-mounted BBU using 5620 SAM, 4-69
corrective maintenance procedures, 5-1 installeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) using

5620 SAM, 5-61
replace eAM, 5-108, 6-111
installeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM) using
remove bCEM from existing 9926 BBU, 7-1
NEM, 4-40
remove existing bCEM, 7-4 installRUC/Fan Tray in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet,
remove RUC/Fan Tray 4-20
from LTE 9926 BBU, 5-10 prepare 5620 SAM/9926 BBU for CCM replacement
using 5620 SAM, 4-64, 5-56
Replace CCM
things to do before going out to the cell site using
5620 SAM, 4-59, 5-52
remove CCM using NEM, 5-29
5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-53 remove RUC/Fan Tray from 9926 BBU, 5-10
replace CCM removeCCM using eNodeB-NEM, from MBI
cabinet, 6-30
eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-25 removeCCM using NEM, 4-36
Replace CCM removeeCCM-U and/or eCCM2 (CCM) using SAM,

NEM, 4-31, 5-24 removeeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
replace RUC/Fan Tray
PRELIMINARY
removeeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)

indoor cabinet, 4-10
LTE 9926 BBU, 5-4
removeRUC/Fan Tray from indoor/outdoor BB
MBI cabinet, 6-4 cabinet, 4-16
outdoor BB cabinet, 4-10 removeRUC/Fan Tray from MBI cabinet, 6-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
PRELIMINARY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in indoor/outdoor BB required tools
cabinet, 4-96
corrective maintenance, 3-5
replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in LTE 9926 BBU,
restore 9412 eNodeB operation
5-88
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
replace 9926 BBU Sub-Rack in MBI cabinet, 6-90
using NEM, 4-43
replace bCEM in indoor/outdoor BB cabinet, 4-86
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
replace bCEM in MBI cabinet, 6-78 with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-73
replace bCEM in rack-mounted 9926 BBU, 5-77 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-80
replace CCM using NEM, 9926 BBU, 5-17
restore 9926 BBU operation
replace CCM using NEM, in indoor/BB outdoor
cabinet, 4-24 replace CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
6-37
replace eCCM-U and/or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using
SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-43 replace CCM using NEM, 5-36
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
SAM, in 9926 BBU, 5-42 using 5620 SAM, 6-72
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using 5620 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
SAM, in indoor/BB outdoor cabinet, 4-49 using SAM, 6-66
replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR using replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-17 with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 5-65
replace RUC/Fan Tray in LTE 9926 BBU, 5-4 replace eCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM, 5-71
replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet, 6-4
RUC/Fan Tray
replace SFP transceivers, 4-115
connections, 4-12, 5-6, 6-6
replaceRUC/Fan Tray, 4-10
indoor cabinet, 4-10
restoreCCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet,
6-37 install in indoor cabinet, 4-20
restoreCCM using NEM, 5-36 install in LTE 9926 BBU, 5-13
restoreeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), install in MBI cabinet, 6-13
using 5620 SAM, 6-66, 6-72
install in outdoor BB cabinet, 4-20
restoreeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM)
LTE 9926 BBU, 5-4
using NEM, 4-43
MBI cabinet, 6-4, 6-5
restoreeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM),
with aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-73, 5-65 module, 4-11, 5-5, 6-6
restoreeCCM-U or eCCM2/eCCM2-HR (CCM), outdoor BB cabinet, 4-10
with mis-aligned software using 5620 SAM, 4-80,
PRELIMINARY
procedures for 9926 BBU, 5-8

5-71
procedures for indoor/outdoor, 4-14
replacement/repair process
procedures for MBI cabinet, 6-9
remove from indoor cabinet, 4-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
remove from MBI cabinet, 6-10 torque requirements for mechanical connections
remove from outdoor cabinet, 4-16 corrective maintenance, 3-7
status, indoor/outdoor, 4-12 TRDU
status, LTE 9926 BBU, 5-6 CPRI Status LEDs, D-15
status, MBI cabinet, 6-7 General Status LEDs, D-13
RUC/HC Fan Tray TRDU LED status, D-13
See: RUC/Fan Tray
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
U update 9926 BBU software loads, E-1
S safety, 1-1
general precautions for installation procedures, 1-3

specific safety hazards, 1-5
structure of hazard statements, 1-2
safety requirements
SFP optical module provisioning
9926 BBU to RRH SFP diagram, 4-119
backhaul interface, 4-120
CPRI interface, 4-117
software loads
update 9926 BBU, E-1
specific safety hazards, 1-5
status
CCM in NEM procedure, 4-27, 5-20
CCM, using 5620 SAM, 4-52, 5-45
CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-20
CCM, using SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-46
structure of hazard statements, 1-2
SYNC LED, D-2
................................................................................................
T things to do before going out to the cell site

PRELIMINARY
CCM using 5620 SAM, 4-59, 5-52

CCM using 5620 SAM, in MBI cabinet, 6-53
CCM using eNodeB-NEM, in MBI cabinet, 6-25
CCM using NEM, 4-31, 5-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9YZ-04152-0021-REZZA LR14.1.L 9926 DBS HW Maint Upgd Guide 0.10 Prelim June 2014

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

9YZ-04152-0021-REZZA LR14.1.L 9926 DBS HW Maint Upgd Guide 0.10 Prelim June 2014

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Product conformance statements can be found in Appendix B, “Product conformance statements”.

What's new .................................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxii

Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

How to use this document .................................................................................................................................................... xxiv

Safety information .................................................................................................................................................................... xxv

Conventions used ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxv

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxvi

Document support ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxxi

How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

Part I: 9926 BBU Maintenance

1 LTE Product Safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

General precautions for installation procedures ............................................................................................................ 1-3

Specific safety hazards ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-5

2 9926 BBU Preventive Maintenance

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

9926 BBU preventive maintenance requirements ........................................................................................................ 2-2

9926 BBU preventive maintenance schedule ................................................................................................................. 2-2

Procedure 2-2: Inspect/clean RUC/Fan Tray fans ........................................................................................................ 2-7

3 Corrective maintenance process

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Replacement/repair process .................................................................................................................................................. 3-2

Safety requirements .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5

Required tools ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-5

Torque requirements for mechanical connections ........................................................................................................ 3-7

4 Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in 9412 eNodeB

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

9926 BBU replacement procedures in 9412 eNodeB .................................................................................................. 4-2

Procedure 4-1: Soft Shutdown eNodeB/Cells ................................................................................................................ 4-3

Procedure 4-2: Replace RUC/Fan Tray ........................................................................................................................ 4-10

Procedure 4-3: Replace CCM using NEM .................................................................................................................... 4-24

Procedure 4-4: Replace CCM using 5620 SAM ......................................................................................................... 4-49

Procedure 4-5: Replace bCEM .......................................................................................................................................... 4-86

Procedure 4-7: Replace SFP transceivers .................................................................................................................... 4-115

5 Corrective maintenance procedures for rack-mounted 9926 BBU

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

9926 BBU replacement procedures ................................................................................................................................... 5-2

Procedure 5-2: Replace CCM using NEM .................................................................................................................... 5-17

Procedure 5-4: Replace bCEM .......................................................................................................................................... 5-77

6 Corrective maintenance procedures for 9926 BBU in MBI cabinet

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

9926 BBU in MBI cabinet replacement procedures .................................................................................................... 6-2

Procedure 6-1: Replace RUC/Fan Tray in MBI cabinet ............................................................................................. 6-4

Procedure 6-4: Replace bCEM in MBI cabinet ........................................................................................................... 6-78

Procedure 6-6: Replace eAM ........................................................................................................................................... 6-111

Part II: 9926 BBU Upgrade/Reconfiguration Procedures

7 Add/remove bCEM to/from 9926 BBU

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

Hardware issues ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

Procedure 7-1: Install a new bCEM ................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Procedure 7-2: Remove existing bCEM ........................................................................................................................... 7-4

8 Add new cell to eNodeB

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

LTE cell creation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

Procedure 8-1: Add new cell to eNodeB .......................................................................................................................... 8-3

9 Configure 9926 BBU for Dual-Band, Dual-Modem Operation

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

Preparation .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2